Honeywell SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter

Honeywell SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option
User’s Manual
34-SM-25-06
Revision 2.0
December 2015
Honeywell Process Solutions
Copyrights, Notices and Trademarks
© Copyright 2015 by Honeywell, Inc.
Revision 2, December 2015
While the information in this document is presented in good faith and believed to be
accurate, Honeywell disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in the written
agreement with and for its customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any
indirect, special, or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this
document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell, TDC 3000, SFC, SmartLine, PlantScape, Experion PKS, MCT202, MCT404
and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Other brand or
product names and service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Honeywell Process Solutions
1860 Rose Garden Lane
Phoenix, AZ 85027
Page ii
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
About This Manual
This manual provides the details of programming Honeywell SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable
Transmitters for applications involving HART and Digitally Enhanced (DE) communication
protocols. For installation, wiring, and maintenance information refer to the SMV800 SmartLine
Multivariable Transmitter User Manual, document number 34-SM-25-03.
The configuration of your Transmitter depends on the mode of operation and the options selected
for it with respect to operating controls, displays and mechanical installation. Details for
operations involving the Honeywell Multi-Communication (MC) Tookit (MCT404) and
SmartLine Configuration tool (SCT3000) are provided only to the extent necessary to accomplish
the tasks-at-hand. Refer to the associated
The SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable transmitter can be digitally integrated with one of two
systems:


Experion PKS: you will need to supplement the information in this document with the data and
procedures in the Experion Knowledge Builder.
Honeywell’s TotalPlant Solutions (TPS): you will need to supplement the information in this
document with the data in the PM/APM SmartLine Transmitter Integration Manual, which is
supplied with the TDC 3000 book set. (TPS is the evolution of the TDC 3000).
Release Information
SMV800 Series HART /DE Option User Manual, Document # 34-SM-25-06 (this document)
Rev. 1.0, October 2015 – First Release (RQUP)
Rev. 2.0, December 2015 - Prod release
References
The following list identifies publications that may contain information relevant to the information
in this document.
SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter Quick Start Installation Guide, # 34-SM-25-04
SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter Safety Manual w/ HART, 34-SM-25-05
SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter User Manual, # 34-SM-25-03
MC Tookit User Manual (MCT404), Document # 34-ST-25-50
SCT3000, SmartLine Configuration Tool guide, Document # 34-ST-10-08
PM/APM SmartLine Transmitter Integration Manual, # PM 12-410
SMV800 Series Multivariable, Analog, HART Communications form, Drawing #50049892
Smart Field Communicator Model STS 103 Operating Guide, Document # 34-ST-11-14
Technical Bulletin, Communicating with Honeywell™ ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters,
#TB-960704B
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page iii
Patent Notice
The Honeywell SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter family is covered by one or more of
the following U. S. Patents: 5,485,753; 5,811,690; 6,041,659; 6,055,633; 7,786,878; 8,073,098; and
other patents pending.
Support and Contact Information
For Europe, Asia Pacific, North and South America contact details, see back page or refer to the
appropriate Honeywell Solution Support web site:
Honeywell Corporate
www.honeywellprocess.com
Honeywell Process Solutions
https://www.honeywellprocess.com/smart-multivariable-transmitters
Training Classes
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/en-US/training
Telephone and Email Contacts
Area
United States and
Canada
Global Email
Support
Page iv
Organization
Honeywell Inc.
Honeywell Process
Solutions
Phone Number
1-800-343-0228 Customer Service
1-800-423-9883 Global Technical Support
ask-ssc@honeywell.com
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
SMV800 Physical and Functional Characteristics ......................................................................... 1
1.1
Overview ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2
Features and Options .............................................................................................................. 1
1.2.1
Physical Characteristics .................................................................................................. 2
1.2.2
Functional Characteristics .............................................................................................. 3
1.3
Series, Model and Number ..................................................................................................... 3
1.4
Safety Certification Information............................................................................................. 4
1.5
Transmitter Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4
1.6
Local Display Options ............................................................................................................ 5
1.7
Optional 3-Button Assembly .................................................................................................. 5
1.8
Universal Temperature Sensor Option Licensing .................................................................. 6
Communication Modes .................................................................................................................. 7
2.1
Overview ................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2
DE Mode Communication...................................................................................................... 7
2.3
HART Mode Communication ................................................................................................ 9
Configuration Tools and Interfaces .............................................................................................. 10
3.1
Overview .............................................................................................................................. 10
3.2
Pre-requisites ........................................................................................................................ 10
3.3
Application Design, Installation, Startup, and Operation ..................................................... 10
3.3.1
Organization ................................................................................................................. 10
3.4
Toolkit Participation ............................................................................................................. 11
3.4.2
Toolkit Software Applications...................................................................................... 11
3.4.3
Configuration Databases .............................................................................................. 11
3.4.4
Configuration................................................................................................................ 11
3.4.5
MC Toolkit–Transmitter Electrical/Signal Connections .............................................. 12
3.5
SmartLine Configuration Toolkit (SCT 3000) ..................................................................... 13
3.5.6
SmartLine Configuration Toolkit for use with DE models .......................................... 13
3.6
Considerations for SCT 3000 ............................................................................................... 14
3.6.7
SCT 3000 Requirements............................................................................................... 14
Setting up Communications with the SCT3000 ........................................................................... 15
4.1
Establishing Communications .............................................................................................. 15
4.1.1
Off-line Versus On-line SMV Configuration ............................................................... 15
4.1.2
Off-line Configuration Procedures ............................................................................... 15
4.1.3
SCT Hardware Connections ......................................................................................... 15
4.1.4
SCT 3000 On-line Connections to the SMV ................................................................ 16
4.1.5
Establishing On-line Communications with the SMV ................................................. 17
4.1.6
Checking Communication Mode and Firmware Version ............................................. 18
4.1.7
DE Communication ...................................................................................................... 18
4.1.8
Changing Communication Mode.................................................................................. 18
DE Transmitter Configuration ...................................................................................................... 19
5.1
Configuration Personnel Requirements ................................................................................ 19
5.2
Configuration using the SCT3000 ........................................................................................ 19
5.2.1
SCT On-line Help and User Manuals ........................................................................... 19
5.3
About Configuration............................................................................................................. 19
5.3.2
Configuration Summary ............................................................................................... 20
5.4
Using the SCT for SMV800 Configuration .......................................................................... 21
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page v
5.5
Device Configuration ........................................................................................................... 22
5.5.3
Transmitter Tag Name and PV1 Priority ..................................................................... 22
5.5.4
General Configuration ................................................................................................. 22
5.5.5
DPConf Configuration - PV1 ....................................................................................... 24
5.5.6
SP Conf Configuration - PV2..................................................................................... 28
5.5.7
TempConf Configuration - PV3 ................................................................................. 30
5.5.8
FlowConf Configuration - PV4.................................................................................. 35
5.5.9
Using Custom Engineering Units ................................................................................ 39
5.5.10 Flow Compensation Wizard (DE only)........................................................................ 40
5.6
Using the SCT3000 Tool to Configure Local Display Screens on SMV800....................... 42
5.6.11 Display Screen Configuration Instructions .................................................................. 42
5.6.12 Display Screen Configuration Parameters: .................................................................. 47
5.6.13 Saving, Downloading and Printing a Configuration File ............................................. 50
5.6.14 Verifying Flow Configuration ..................................................................................... 50
6 HART Transmitter Configuration................................................................................................ 51
6.1
Overview .............................................................................................................................. 51
6.1.1
Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................... 51
6.2
Overview of FDC Homepage .............................................................................................. 52
6.2.2
Settings ......................................................................................................................... 53
6.2.3
Manage DDs ................................................................................................................ 54
6.2.4
Online configuration .................................................................................................... 56
6.2.5
Offline configuration.................................................................................................... 56
6.2.6
Online Configuration Overview................................................................................... 56
6.2.7
Overview of Device Homepage ................................................................................... 57
6.2.8
Tabs on the Device Home page ................................................................................... 57
6.2.9
Using FDC for various device operations .................................................................... 59
6.2.10 Device Configuration and Parameter Descriptions ...................................................... 61
6.2.11 Procedure to Enter the Transmitter Tag ..................................................................... 123
6.2.12 Selecting Variable units of measurement ................................................................... 123
6.2.13 Selecting Pressure Units............................................................................................. 123
6.2.14 Selecting Temperature Units ...................................................................................... 124
6.2.15 Selecting Flow Units .................................................................................................. 124
6.2.16 Setting PV URV, and LRV Range Values (for Differential Pressure values) ........... 125
6.2.17 Setting Range Values for Applied Pressure for DP ................................................... 126
6.2.18 Setting URV, and LRV Range Values (for Static Pressure Values) .......................... 127
6.2.19 Setting Range Values for Applied Static Pressure ..................................................... 127
6.2.20 Setting URV, and LRV Range Values (for Temperature Values) ............................. 128
6.2.21 Setting Range Values for Applied Temperature ........................................................ 128
6.2.22 Entering URV, and LRV Range Values (for Flow Values) ....................................... 129
6.2.23 Saving device history ................................................................................................. 129
6.2.24 Exporting device history records to FDM .................................................................. 130
6.2.25 Exporting device history records to DocuMint .......................................................... 131
6.2.26 Custom Views ............................................................................................................ 131
6.2.27 Offline Configuration................................................................................................. 133
7 DE Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 136
7.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 136
7.2
Calibration Recommendations ........................................................................................... 136
7.3
Test Equipment Required for Calibration .......................................................................... 136
7.4
DE Output Calibration ....................................................................................................... 137
7.4.1
Output Calibration Preparation .................................................................................. 137
7.4.2
Output Calibration using SCT3000 ............................................................................ 138
Page vi
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
7.5
Calibrating Range Using a Configuration Tool .................................................................. 140
7.5.3
Conditions for Input Calibration................................................................................. 140
7.5.4
Input Calibration Procedures Description .................................................................. 140
7.6
DE Input Calibration Procedure ......................................................................................... 141
7.6.5
DP Input Cal ............................................................................................................... 141
7.6.6
Correct DP Input at the Lower Range Value (LRV) .................................................. 142
7.6.7
Correct DP Input at URV ........................................................................................... 144
7.6.8
AP Input Calibration................................................................................................... 146
7.6.9
AP Input Cal LRV (Lower Range Value) Correct_ ................................................... 146
7.6.10 AP Input Cal URV (Upper Range Value) Correct ..................................................... 147
7.6.11 Reset Corrects ............................................................................................................. 147
7.6.12 Temperature Input Calibration ................................................................................... 148
7.6.13 Process Temperature LRV (Lower Range Value) Correct_ ....................................... 148
7.6.14 Process Temperature URV (Upper Range Value) Correct ......................................... 149
7.6.15 Reset Corrects ............................................................................................................. 149
8 HART Calibration ...................................................................................................................... 150
8.1
About This Section ............................................................................................................. 150
8.1.1
About Calibration ....................................................................................................... 150
8.1.2
Equipment Required ................................................................................................... 150
8.2
Analog Output Signal Calibration ...................................................................................... 151
8.3
Calibrating Range ............................................................................................................... 152
8.3.3
Correcting the Lower Range Value (LRV) for Differential pressure ......................... 152
8.3.4
Correcting the Upper Range Value (URV) for Differential Pressure ......................... 152
8.3.5
Resetting Calibration for Differential Pressure .......................................................... 154
8.3.6
Correcting the Lower Range Value (LRV) for Temperature ..................................... 154
8.3.7
Correcting the Lower Range Value (URV) for Temperature ..................................... 155
8.3.8
Resetting Calibration for Temperature ....................................................................... 155
8.3.9
Calibration Records .................................................................................................... 156
8.3.10 Dual / Triple Calibration ............................................................................................ 158
9 HART Advanced Diagnostics .................................................................................................... 159
9.1
About This Section ............................................................................................................. 159
9.2
Advanced Diagnostics ........................................................................................................ 159
10
Troubleshooting and Maintenance ......................................................................................... 160
10.1 Troubleshooting Using the SCT ......................................................................................... 160
11
Using DTMs ........................................................................................................................... 162
11.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 162
11.2 Components ........................................................................................................................ 162
11.3 Downloads .......................................................................................................................... 162
11.4 Procedure to Install and Run the DTM ............................................................................... 162
11.5 SMV800 Online Parameterization...................................................................................... 163
11.5.1 Device Health: ............................................................................................................ 164
11.5.2 Process Variables: ...................................................................................................... 164
11.5.3 Device Setup:.............................................................................................................. 164
11.1 Basic Setup Page ................................................................................................................ 165
11.2 Advanced Flow Setup (for DTM only) .............................................................................. 166
11.2.4 Unit Configuration...................................................................................................... 166
11.2.5 Advanced Flow Setup................................................................................................. 169
11.2.6 Flow Configurations Screen ....................................................................................... 177
11.2.7 Process Data Screen ................................................................................................... 182
11.2.8 Element Specific Properties screen ............................................................................ 186
11.2.9 Flow Parameters ......................................................................................................... 189
11.3 DevVar Mapping ................................................................................................................ 191
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page vii
11.4 Diff. Pressure Config ......................................................................................................... 192
11.5 Static Pressure Config ........................................................................................................ 193
11.6 Process Temp. Config ........................................................................................................ 193
11.7 Flow Config ...................................................................................................................... 194
11.8 Meter Body Temp. Config ................................................................................................. 196
11.9 Process Variables ............................................................................................................... 197
11.10
Calibration...................................................................................................................... 198
11.11
Device Status ................................................................................................................. 199
11.12
Diagnostics:.................................................................................................................... 200
11.13
Services .......................................................................................................................... 201
11.14
Detailed Setup ................................................................................................................ 202
11.15
Meter body Details ......................................................................................................... 202
11.16
Display Setup ................................................................................................................. 203
11.17
Upgrade Options ............................................................................................................ 203
11.18
Review ........................................................................................................................... 204
11.19
Saving the current Online Configuration as Offline dataset .......................................... 205
11.20
SMV800 Offline Parameterization ................................................................................ 207
12
Comparison of configuration options from DD host vs DTM .............................................. 208
13
Example Configuration of Flow for below specification: ...................................................... 209
14
HART DD binary file format compatibility matrix ............................................................... 218
15
Security .................................................................................................................................. 219
15.1 How to report a security vulnerability ............................................................................... 219
16
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 220
16.1 Diagnostic Messages for DE transmitters .......................................................................... 220
16.2 HART Diagnostic Messages .............................................................................................. 235
16.3 Flow Configuration Diagnostics, Messages and Values .................................................... 254
Appendix A. ....................................................................................................................................... 256
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 278
Page viii
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
List of Figures
Figure 1 – SMV800 Major Assemblies .................................................................................................. 2
Figure 2 – Electronics Housing Components ......................................................................................... 2
Figure 3 –Typical Name Plate Information ............................................................................................ 3
Figure 4 – DE Communication through SCT ......................................................................................... 7
Figure 5 – DE Mode Value Scaling ....................................................................................................... 8
Figure 6 – HART Point-to-Point and Multi-drop Value Scaling ........................................................... 9
Figure 7 – MC Toolkit-Transmitter Electrical/Signal Connections ..................................................... 12
Figure 8 - SmartLine Configuration Tool ............................................................................................ 13
Figure 9 - SCT Hardware Components ................................................................................................ 15
Figure 10 - SMV On-line Configuration Process ................................................................................. 20
Figure 11 - Square Root Dropout Points for PV 1 ............................................................................... 27
Figure 12 – RTD Range Configuration ................................................................................................ 33
Figure 13 - Current Range Settings ...................................................................................................... 34
Figure 14 - Typical Volumetric Flow Range Setting Values ............................................................... 37
Figure 15 - Low Flow Cutoff ............................................................................................................... 38
Figure 16 – FDC Homepage................................................................................................................. 52
Figure 17 – Device Homepage ............................................................................................................. 57
Figure 18 – Output Calibration Test Connections .............................................................................. 137
Figure 19 – DE Analog Mode Scaling and Test Connections ............................................................ 138
Figure 20 – Input Calibration Connections ........................................................................................ 141
Figure 21 - Setup to manually set the PV LRV and URV .................................................................. 153
Figure 22 - Typical Volumetric Flow Range Setting Values ............................................................. 195
Figure 23 – Low Flow cutoff action ................................................................................................... 196
Figure 24 - Advanced Flow Setup Tab............................................................................................... 212
Figure 25- Algorithm Options ............................................................................................................ 213
Figure 26 - Input types ....................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 27 - Density, Viscosity parameters ......................................................................................... 215
Figure 28 - Pipe / Bore diameters ....................................................................................................... 216
Figure 29- Summary page .................................................................................................................. 217
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page ix
List of Tables
Table 1 – Features and Options.............................................................................................................. 1
Table 2 – Available Display Characteristics .......................................................................................... 5
Table 3 – User Manual Related Topics ................................................................................................ 10
Table 4 - Making SCT 3000 Hardware Connections ........................................................................... 16
Table 5 - Making SCT 3000 On-line Connections .............................................................................. 17
Table 6 - PV Type Selection for SMV Output..................................................................................... 22
Table 7 - SMV Analog Output Selection ............................................................................................. 23
Table 8 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV 1 ...................................................................... 24
Table 9 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV2* ..................................................................... 28
Table 10 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV3 ..................................................................... 30
Table 11 - Sensor Types for PV3 Process Temperature Input ............................................................. 31
Table 12- Pre-programmed Volumetric Flow Engineering Units for PV4 .......................................... 35
Table 13 - Pre-programmed Mass Flow Engineering Units for PV4................................................... 36
Table 14 - Primary Flow Elements ...................................................................................................... 40
Table 15 – Display Screen Configuration Parameters ......................................................................... 47
Table 16 - Display Screen configuration parameters details ............................................................... 48
Table 17 - FDC homepage elements .................................................................................................... 52
Table 18 - Device health status ............................................................................................................ 57
Table 19 - HART Transmitter Parameters ........................................................................................... 79
Table 20 – Basic Setup ........................................................................................................................ 79
Table 21 - Standard Flow Setup........................................................................................................... 81
Table 22 – Device Variable Mapping .................................................................................................. 95
Table 23 – Differential Pressure Configuration ................................................................................... 96
Table 24 – Static Pressure Configuration ............................................................................................ 97
Table 25 – Process Temperature Configuration................................................................................... 98
Table 26 – Flow Configuration ............................................................................................................ 99
Table 27 – Meter body Temperature Configuration .......................................................................... 100
Table 28 – Process Variables ............................................................................................................. 101
Table 29 - Calibration ........................................................................................................................ 102
Table 30 – Device Status ................................................................................................................... 106
Table 31 – Diagnostics....................................................................................................................... 109
Table 32 – Services ............................................................................................................................ 113
Table 33 – Detailed setup .................................................................................................................. 115
Table 34 – Meter body details ........................................................................................................... 116
Table 35 – Display setup.................................................................................................................... 118
Table 36 – Upgrade Options .............................................................................................................. 120
Table 37 – Review ............................................................................................................................. 120
Table 38 – Tamper Reporting Logic Implementation with Write Protect ......................................... 122
Table 39 – DP/SP Calibration Records .............................................................................................. 156
Table 40- Temperature Calibration records ....................................................................................... 157
Table 41 – Viewing Advanced Diagnostics ....................................................................................... 159
Table 42 - Accessing SMV 3000 Diagnostic Information using the SCT ......................................... 160
Table 43 – Unit Configuration ........................................................................................................... 167
Table 44 – Configure Advanced Flow Setup ..................................................................................... 170
Table 45 - Flow Configuration........................................................................................................... 177
Table 46 – Process Data ..................................................................................................................... 182
Table 47 - Viscosity Coefficients: Dependency to Algorithm option................................................ 184
Table 48 - Density Coefficients: Dependency to Algorithm option .................................................. 185
Table 49 - Element Specific Properties.............................................................................................. 188
Page x
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 50 – Flow Parameters ............................................................................................................... 189
Table 51 – Flow Parameters ............................................................................................................... 208
Table 52 – Flow Configuration parameters ........................................................................................ 209
Table 53 - HART DD binary file format compatibility matrix .......................................................... 218
Table 54 - Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table......................................................................... 221
Table 55 - Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table ................................................................ 224
Table 56 - Communication Status Message Table ............................................................................. 230
Table 57 - Information Message Table............................................................................................... 232
Table 58 - SFC Diagnostic Message Table ................................................................................... 233
Table 59 – HART Critical Details ...................................................................................................... 235
Table 60 - Non-Critical 1 Diagnostic Details ..................................................................................... 241
Table 61 - Non-Critical 2 Diagnostic Details ..................................................................................... 246
Table 62 - Non-Critical 3 Diagnostic Details ..................................................................................... 248
Table 63 – Extended Device Status Diagnostic Details ..................................................................... 253
Table 64 - Air Through a Venturi Meter Configuration Example...................................................... 265
Table 65 - Superheated Steam using an Averaging Pitot Tube Configuration Example ................... 266
Table 66 - Liquid Propane Configuration Example ........................................................................... 269
Table 67 - Air Configuration Example ............................................................................................... 272
Table 68 - Superheated Steam Configuration Example ..................................................................... 275
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page xi
This page has been intentionally left blank
Page xii
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
1 SMV800 Physical and Functional Characteristics
1.1 Overview
This section is an introduction to the physical and functional characteristics of Honeywell’s family of
SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitters.
1.2 Features and Options
The SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter type SMV800 supports five device variables: DP
(Differential Pressure), SP (Static Pressure), PT (Process Temperature), Flow and MBT (Meter body
Temperature) and four dynamic variables: PV (Primary Variable), SV (Secondary Variable), TV
(Tertiary Variable) and QV (Quaternary Variable). Primary variable (PV) can be configured as DP,
SP, PT and Flow. Secondary Variable (SV), Tertiary Variable (TV), Quaternary Variable (QV) can
be configured as DP, SP, PT, Flow and MBT.
The dynamic variables can be set to any of the said device variables. Table 1 lists the protocols,
human interface (HMI), materials, approvals, and mounting bracket options for the SMV800
Transmitter.
Table 1 – Features and Options
Feature/Option
Standard/Available Options
Communication Protocols
HART 7 and Digitally Enhanced (DE)
Human-Machine Interface
(HMI)
Advanced Digital Display
Calibration
Approvals (See Appendix C
for details.)
Mounting Brackets
Integration Tools
Revision 2
Three-button programming (optional)
Advanced display languages: English, German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Russian, Turkish, Chinese & Japanese
Single, Dual and Triple Cal for PV1 (Diff.Pressure) and PV2 (Static
Pressure)
ATEX, CSA, FM, IECEx, NEPSI
Angle/flat carbon steel/304 stainless steel, Marine 304 stainless steel
Experion
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 1
1.2.1 Physical Characteristics
As shown in Figure 1, the SMV800 is packaged in two major assemblies: the Electronics Housing
and the Meter Body. The elements in the Electronic Housing respond to setup commands and execute
the software and protocol for the different pressure measurement types: DP (Differential Pressure),
SP (Static Pressure), PT (Process Temperature) and MBT (Meter body Temperature).
The Meter Body provides connection to a process system. Several physical interface configurations
are available, as determined by the mounting and mechanical connections. Refer to the SMV800
SmartLine User’s manual, document #34-SM-25-03 for installation and wiring details.
Figure 1 – SMV800 Major Assemblies
Figure 2 – Electronics Housing Components
Page 2
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
1.2.2 Functional Characteristics
The SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable transmitter measures Differential Pressure, Static Pressure
(Absolute or Gauge), and Process Temperature. These measurements are used to calculate volumetric
or mass flow rates. The measured values and calculated flow may be read by a connected Host.
Available communications protocols include Honeywell Digitally Enhanced (DE) and HART. Output
options include Digital and 4-20 mA Analog.
The SMV800 measures Process Temperature from an external RTD or Thermocouple.
The device may be configured to map any of the four Process Variable to the Analog Output (4-20
mA):
 Differential Pressure PV1
 Static Pressure PV2
 Process Temperature PV3
 Calculated Flow Rate PV4
An optional 3-button assembly is available to set up and configure the transmitter via the Display. In
addition, a Honeywell MCT404/MCT202 Toolkit is available for configuration of HART models.
The SCT SmartLine Configuration Tool (not supplied with the Transmitter) can facilitate setup and
configuration for DE devices.
Certain adjustments can be made through an Experion Station or a Universal Station if the
Transmitter is digitally integrated with Honeywell’s Experion or TPS/TDC 3000 control system.
1.3 Series, Model and Number
The Transmitter nameplate mounted on the top of the Electronics Housing (see Figure 2) lists the
model number, physical configuration, electronics options, accessories, certifications, and
manufacturing specialties. Figure 3 is an example of a typical SMV800 Transmitter name plate.
The model number format consists of a Key Number with several table selections.
Figure 3 –Typical Name Plate Information
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 3
You can readily identify the series and basic Transmitter type from the third and fourth digits in the
key number. The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic measurement types for the Static
Pressure:


A = Absolute Pressure
G = Gauge Pressure
E.g. SMA810, SMA845 or SMG870
For a complete selection breakdown, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection
Guide provided as a separate document.
1.4 Safety Certification Information
An “approvals” name plate is located on the bottom of the Electronics Assembly; see Figure 1 for
exact location. The approvals name plate contains information and service marks that disclose the
Transmitter compliance information. Refer to Appendix C of the SMV800 SmartLine Transmitters
User’s manual, document number 34-SM-25-03 for details.
1.5 Transmitter Adjustments
Zero and Span adjustments are possible in new generation SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable
Transmitters by using the optional three-button assembly located at the top of the Electronic Housing
(see Figure 2). However, certain capabilities are limited in the following configurations:
1. Without a display – Zero and Span setting only for HART and DE devices.
o Zero/Span button option works for DP, SP and PT when the same is mapped to
analog output accordingly. For example:
- If DP is mapped to AO, Zero/Span buttons options applied on DP.
- If SP is mapped to AO, Zero/Span buttons options applied on SP.
- If PT is mapped to AO, Zero/Span buttons options applied on PT.
- If Flow is mapped to AO, Zero/Span buttons options will not be applied, it will
give the user message “NOT_SUPPORTED” accordingly.
2. With a display – Complete Transmitter configuration is possible for HART and DE
devices.
You can also use the Honeywell MCT404 Configuration Tool – FDC application to make any
adjustments to an SMV800 Transmitter with HART.
For DE models the SCT3000 PC tool application can be used to configure the device.
Certain adjustments can also be made through the Experion or Universal Station if the Transmitter is
digitally integrated with a Honeywell Experion or TPS system.
SMV800 HART models can be configured using Honeywell tools such as Experion in conjunction
with FDM, using DTMs running in FDM or Pactware, or Emerson 375 or 475.
Page 4
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
1.6 Local Display Options
The SMV800 Multivariable Transmitter has an Advanced display; see Table 2.
Table 2 – Available Display Characteristics

Advanced Display














Screen Format
o Large process variable (PV)
o PV with bar graph
o PV with trend (1-24 hours, configurable)
PV Selection
Display Units
Decimals
PV Scaling
Scaling Low
Scaling High
Display Low Limit
Display High Limit
Custom Unit
Custom Tag
Trend Duration (h)
Language
o
EN, FR, GE, SP, RU, IT & TU
o
EN, CH (Kanji), JP
PV Rotation,
Sequence Time (sec)
1.7 Optional 3-Button Assembly
The optional 3-button assembly provides the following features:





Opportunity for immediate reaction with minimal disruptions
Improved maintenance time
Potential savings on hand-held units
Suitable for all environments: hermetically sealed for long life in harsh environments
Suitable for use in all electrical classifications (flameproof, dustproof, and intrinsically safe)
The 3-button assembly is externally accessible and provides the following capabilities:


Menu-driven configuration with optional display:
o Using increment, decrement & enter keys
o A comprehensive on screen menu guides the way
o Configure the transmitter
o Configure the display
o Set zero and span
Zero and span settings without optional display
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 5
1.8 Universal Temperature Sensor Option Licensing
In a standard device, only RTD Temperature sensor types may be used for measuring Process
Temperature.
The Universal Temperature Sensor option can be enabled after the transmitter is shipped by
purchasing and activating a license, to expand the selection of temperature sensor types to include
thermocouples.
For DE models, this option is only available at time of order entry and no license for activation is
supported.
To obtain and activate a license for the Universal Temperature Sensor option:
 Obtain the device's Serial Number from the local display menu or from the host interface.
 Place an order for Universal Temperature Sensor Field Upgrade for SMV 800, part number
#50127216-501 with the Serial Number.
 Based on this information the regional distribution center will generate and return a license
key.
 The license is activated by entering the License Key parameter value from the local display
menu or host interface.
 A restart of the display only will then occur.
 License activation can be confirmed by observing that the Universal Temperature Sensor
option is enabled using the local display menu or host interface.
Page 6
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
2 Communication Modes
2.1 Overview
The SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter is available with either Honeywell's Digitally
Enhanced (DE) or HART revision 7 communications protocols. This manual addresses the processes
to configure and calibrate a Transmitter for DE and HART communication.
2.2 DE Mode Communication
The SMV800 can transmit its output in either an analog 4 to 20 milliampere format or a Digitally
Enhanced (DE) protocol format for direct digital communications with our TPS/TDC 3000 control
system. In the analog format, only a selected variable is available as an output which can be any one
of the following:
 Differential Pressure PV1,
 Static Pressure PV2,
 Process Temperature PV3, or
 Calculated Flow Rate PV4
Note that the secondary variable is only available as a read only parameter through the SCT shown in
Figure 4.
Figure 4 – DE Communication through SCT
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 7
In the digital DE protocol format, all four process variables are available for monitoring and control
purposes; and the meter body temperature is also available as a secondary variable for monitoring
purposes only - See Figure 4
The SMV800 transmitter has no physical adjustments. You need an SCT to make any adjustments in
an SMV800 transmitter. Alternately, certain adjustments can be made through the Universal Station if
the transmitter is digitally integrated with our TPS/TDC 3000 control system.
For more information see section 3.5 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit (SCT 3000)
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Mode Communication
Although it is unnecessary to put a control loop in manual mode before communicating
with a Transmitter operating in DE mode, caution is required if there is potential for error in
identifying the operating mode.
In DE mode, the PV is available for monitoring and control purposes.
Much of the operation in the Digitally Enhanced (DE) mode is similar to that of analog operation.
The essential characteristics of DE transmitter are shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5 – DE Mode Value Scaling
As indicated at the right of Figure 5, output values of process variables, as well as communications
are transferred to a receiving device digitally. The digital coding is Honeywell proprietary, which
requires the use of DE-capable Honeywell control equipment.
The use of DE mode offers several advantages:




Page 8
Process Safety: Unlike analog mode, communications devices do not bump the PV value.
Accuracy: requires less maintenance.
Digital communication: Relatively immune to small variations in circuit resistance or supply
voltage.
Facilitates Maintenance Tasks: Honeywell control systems include operating displays that
enable direct communication with transmitters operating in DE mode.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
2.3 HART Mode Communication
When using MCT404,before connecting to a HART 7 transmitter, verify that the FDC
application is used and not the MC Toolkit application. For DE models use the SCT3000 PC
tool application.

Transmitters with HART 7 capability have features that vary among manufacturers and with
the characteristics of specific devices. The FDC software application executing on the
MCT404/MCT202 supports the HART Universal, Common Practice and Device Specific
Commands which are implemented in the Honeywell Transmitters.
As indicated in Figure 6, the output of a Transmitter configured for HART protocol includes two
primary modes:
Figure 6 – HART Point-to-Point and Multi-drop Value Scaling


Point-to-Point Mode, in which one Transmitter is connected via a two-conductor, 4-20 mA
current loop to one receiver.
Multi-Drop Mode, in which several Transmitters are connected through a two-conductor
network to a multiplexed receiver device.
In point-to-point mode, the value of the primary Process Variable (PV) is represented by a 4-20 mA
current loop, almost identical to that of a Transmitter operating in analog mode. In this case, however,
the analog signal is modulated by Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), using frequencies and current
amplitude that do not affect analog sensing at the receiver. The accuracy of the analog level must be
precisely controlled for accurate sensing. HART communication will not bump process variables.
In multi-drop mode, up to 16 transmitters in HART 5 (addresses 0-15) and up to 64 transmitters in
HART6/7 (addresses 0-63) can exist on the two-conductor network.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 9
3 Configuration Tools and Interfaces
3.1 Overview
This section describes the tools and interfaces involved in configuring a new SMV800 SmartLine
Multivariable Transmitter for HART or DE communication operation. The information in this section
also applies to adjusting the configuration of a Transmitter that has been in operation and updating
one that is currently in operation.
3.2 Pre-requisites
The information and procedures in this manual are based on the assumption that personnel
performing configuration and calibration tasks are fully qualified and knowledgeable in the use of the
Honeywell MC Toolkit or MCT202/MCT404 and the PC tool SCT3000 application.
Furthermore, we assume that the reader is intimately familiar with the SMV800 family of SmartLine
Multivariable Transmitters and thoroughly experienced in the type of process application targeted for
Transmitter deployment. Therefore, detailed procedures are supplied only in so far as necessary to
ensure satisfactory completion of configuration tasks.
3.3 Application Design, Installation, Startup, and Operation
The SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitters User’s Manual, document number 34-SM-25-03,
provides the details for application design, installation, and startup; see Table 3 for topics.
Table 3 – User Manual Related Topics
SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitters User’s Manual, 34-SM-25-03
Section 2. Application Design
Section 3. Installation and Startup
Safety
Accuracy
Diagnostics messages
Site evaluation, Toolkit issues
Display installation concerns,
Transmitter mounting, Piping &
wiring, Startup tasks and procedures
Section 4. Operation
Three-button option
Failsafe direction setup
Monitoring displays
Other sections include but not limited to: Section 5. Maintenance, Section 6. Calibration, Section 7
Troubleshooting, Section 8. Parts List, Appendix. Certificates, Security Vulnerability
3.3.1 Organization
This information in this section is arranged in the following sequence:
 MCT404 Toolkit operation in SMV800 Transmitter HART Setup and Configuration:
o Physical circuit connections
o Application components
o Configuration for Analog and HART operation
 SCT3000 operation in SMV800 Transmitter DE Setup and Configuration:
o Physical circuit connections
o Application components
o Configuration for DE operation
Page 10
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
3.4 Toolkit Participation
Before using the MC Toolkit, be sure that you are aware of the potential consequences of
each procedure, and that you use appropriate safeguards to avoid possible problems. For
example, if the Transmitter is an element in a control loop, the loop needs to be put in manual
mode, and alarms and interlocks (i.e., trips) need to be disabled, as appropriate, before
starting a procedure.
3.4.2 Toolkit Software Applications
The MCT404 Toolkit – FDC software applications to work with SMV800 HART Transmitters and
the SCT3000 SmartLine Configuration tool for use configuring DE Transmitters:


MCT404 Toolkit Field Device Configurator (FDC). This application is used for
configuring, calibrating, monitoring, and diagnosing HART devices. FDC conforms to the
IEC 61804-3 EDDL (Electronic Data Description Language) standard specification. The FDC
application is an open solution that supports devices with a registered device description
(DD) file compatible with HART Communication Foundation (HCF) requirements.
SCT3000 tool. This application is used for configuring, calibrating, monitoring, and
diagnosing Honeywell Digitally Enhanced (DE) devices. For more information see section
3.5 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit (SCT 3000)
Details for working with the MC Toolkit are provided in the MC Toolkit User Manual, document
#34-ST-25-50 (MCT404). In subsequent sections of this manual, explicit operating instructions are
provided only in so far as necessary to complete required tasks and procedures. For SCT3000
application refer to User manual #34-ST-10-08
3.4.3 Configuration Databases
Both tools can be used to establish and/or change selected operating parameters in a Transmitter
database.
3.4.4 Configuration
Configuration can be accomplished both online and offline with the Transmitter powered up and
connected to the MC Toolkit. Online configuration immediately changes the Transmitter operating
parameters. For offline configuration, Transmitter operating characteristics are entered into Toolkit
memory for subsequent downloading to a Transmitter.
When you set up or configure a Transmitter, it can take up to 30 seconds for the value
to be stored in it. If you change a value and Transmitter power is interrupted before the
change is copied to nonvolatile memory, the changed value will not be moved to nonvolatile
memory.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 11
3.4.5 MC Toolkit–Transmitter Electrical/Signal Connections
Figure 7 displays how to connect the MC Toolkit directly to the terminals of a HART-only
Transmitter.
Figure 7 – MC Toolkit-Transmitter Electrical/Signal Connections
Page 12
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
3.5 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit (SCT 3000)
3.5.6 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit for use with DE models
Honeywell’s SCT 3000 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit is a cost-effective means to configure,
calibrate, diagnose, and monitor the SMV800 and other smart field devices. The SCT 3000 runs on a
variety of Personal Computer (PC) platforms using Windows XP® and Window 7®. It is a bundled
Microsoft Windows software and PC-interface hardware solution that allows quick, error-free
configuration of SMV transmitters. Figure 8 shows the major components of the SCT 3000.
Some SCT 3000 features include:
 Preconfigured templates that simplify configuration and allow rapid development of
configuration databases.
 Context-sensitive help and a comprehensive on-line user manual.
 Extensive menus and prompts that minimize the need for prior training or experience.
 The ability to load previously configured databases at time of installation.
 Automatic verification of device identification and database configuration menus and
prompts for bench set up and calibration.
 The ability to save unlimited transmitter databases on the PC.
Figure 8 - SmartLine Configuration Tool
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 13
3.6 Considerations for SCT 3000
3.6.7 SCT 3000 Requirements
The SCT 3000 consists of the PC application and the Honeywell DE Modem hardware interface used
for connecting the host computer to the SMV transmitter.
Be certain that the host computer is loaded with the proper operating system necessary to run the SCT
program.
See the SCT 3000 SmartLine Configuration Toolkit Start-up and Installation Manual #34-ST-10-08
for complete details on the host computer specifications and requirements for using the SCT 3000.
Page 14
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
4 Setting up Communications with the SCT3000
If you have never used an SCT to “talk” to an SMV800 transmitter, this section tells you how to
connect the SMV with the SCT, establish on-line communications and make initial checks.
ATTENTION
The SCT 3000 contains on-line help and an on-line user manual providing complete instructions for
using the SCT to setup and configure SMV transmitters.
4.1 Establishing Communications
4.1.1 Off-line Versus On-line SMV Configuration
The SCT 3000 allows you to perform both off-line and on-line configuration of SMV transmitters.
 Off-line configuration does not require connection to the transmitter. By operating the SCT
3000 in the off-line mode, you can configure and save database files of an unlimited number
of transmitters prior to receipt, , and then download the database files, save them either to
portable media and then download the database files to the transmitters during
commissioning.
 An on-line session requires that the SCT is connected to the transmitter and allows you to
download previously-configured database files at any time during installation or
commissioning of your field application. Note that you can also upload a transmitter’s
existing configuration and then make changes directly to that database.
4.1.2 Off-line Configuration Procedures
Refer to the SCT User Manual (on-line) for detailed procedures on how to off-line configure SMV
transmitters using the SCT 3000.
4.1.3 SCT Hardware Connections
A PC or laptop computer (host computer) which contains the SCT application is connected to the
wiring terminals of the SMV transmitter and other smart field devices via the Honeywell DE Modem.
Figure 9 shows the hardware components of the SCT.
Figure 9 - SCT Hardware Components
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 15
ATTENTION Connecting the host computer to an SMV for on-line communications requires
SmartLine Option Module consisting of a DE Modem connection.
4.1.4 SCT 3000 On-line Connections to the SMV
Table 4 provides the steps to connect the assembled SCT 3000 hardware between the host computer
and the SMV for on-line communications.
WARNING
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not explosion proof.
Table 4 - Making SCT 3000 Hardware Connections
Step
1
Action
With the power to the host computer turned off.
-- TMB-240 Single Slot Internal Front Panel Adapter
-- TM50 Dual Slot Internal Front Panel Adapter
-- GS-120 Greystone Peripherals, Inc.
-- GS-320 Greystone Peripherals, Inc.
2
Remove the end-cap at the terminal block side of the SMV and
connect the easy hooks or alligator clips at the end of the adapter
cable to the respective terminals on the SMV as follows:
•
Connect the red lead to the positive terminal.
•
Connect the black lead to the negative terminal.
ATTENTION
Page 16
The SCT 3000 can be connected to only one SMV at a time.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
4.1.5 Establishing On-line Communications with the SMV
Table 5 lists the steps to begin an on-line session with the loop-connected SMV and upload the
database configuration from the transmitter.
Table 5 - Making SCT 3000 On-line Connections
Step
Action
1
Make sure that 24V dc power is applied to the proper SMV transmitter
SIGNAL terminals. For wiring details refer to the SMV800 Transmitter User’s
manual for details (34-SM-25-03).
2
Apply power to the PC or laptop computer and start the SCT 3000 application.
3
Perform either step 4A (recommended) or 4B (but not both) to upload the current
database configuration from the SMV.
4A
• Select Tag ID from the View Menu (or click on the Tag ID toolbar button) to
access the View Tag dialog box.
--If the SCT 3000 detects that the transmitter is in analog mode, a dialog box
displays prompting you to put the loop in manual and to check that all trips
are secured (if necessary) before continuing. Click OK to continue.
-- After several seconds, the SCT 3000 reads the device’s tag
ID and displays it in the View Tag dialog box.
• Click on the Upload button in the View Tag dialog box to upload the current
database configuration from the SMV and make the on-line connection.
-- A Communications Status dialog box displays during the uploading
process.
4B
Select Upload from the Device Menu (or click on the Upload toolbar button) to
upload the current database configuration from the SMV and make the on-line
connection.
-- If the SCT 3000 detects that the transmitter is in analog mode, a dialog
box displays prompting you to put the loop in manual and to check that all trips
are secured (if necessary) before continuing. Click OK to continue.
-- A Communications Status dialog box displays during the uploading
process.
5
When the on-line view of the SMV appears on the screen, access the
Status form by clicking on its tab. The Status form is used to verify the status of
the connected field device.
• Separate list boxes for Gross Status and Detailed Status are presented in
the Status form. Refer to the SCT 3000 User Manual (on-line) for explanations
of each status condition.
6
Refer to the SCT 3000 User Manual (on-line) for a procedure on how to
download any previously-saved configuration database files.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 17
4.1.6 Checking Communication Mode and Firmware Version
Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to confirm the transmitter’s mode of operation and
identify the version of firmware being used in the transmitter.
 Communication mode (either ANALOG or DE mode) is displayed on the Status Bar at the
bottom SCT application window.
 The transmitter’s firmware version is displayed on the Device configuration form
4.1.7 DE Communication
A transmitter in the digital (DE) mode can communicate in a direct digital
Mode fashion with a Universal Station in Honeywell’s TPS and TDC 3000 control systems. The
digital signal can include all four transmitter process variables and its secondary variable as well as
the configuration database.
4.1.8 Changing Communication Mode
You can select the mode you want the transmitter to communicate with the control system. The
communication mode is selected in the SCT General Configuration form tab card.
Page 18
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
5 DE Transmitter Configuration
5.1 Configuration Personnel Requirements
The configuration processes in this section reflect the assumption that you will use the Honeywell
SCT3000 Configuration Tool to configure an SMV800 SmartLine DE Transmitter.
The other tools that support DE Transmitter configuration are Honeywell’s Experion or TPS/
TDC 3000.
5.2 Configuration using the SCT3000
This section introduces you to SMV800 transmitter configuration.
It identifies the parameters that make up the transmitter’s configuration database and provides
information for entering values/selections for the given configuration parameters using the SCT.
ATTENTION
Please verify that you have the SCT software version that is compatible with your SMV800.
To check the software version, connect an SCT to the transmitter.
Using the SCT: Perform Upload of the SMV database to the SCT. The SMV firmware version can be
read from the Device tab card.
To check the SCT software version, select About SCT from the Help pull down menu. The software
version will be displayed.
5.2.1 SCT On-line Help and User Manuals
IMPORTANT: While the information presented in this section refers to SMV800 transmitter
configuration using the SCT 3000 application (Ver. 6.18.445 or above). The SCT on-line manual and
help topics contain complete information and procedures on SMV800 configuration and should be
followed to properly configure the transmitter.
This section of the manual should be viewed as subordinate to the SCT on-line manual and if
inconsistencies exist between the two sources, the SCT on-line manual will prevail.
5.3 About Configuration
Each SMV800 Transmitter includes a configuration database that defines its particular operating
characteristics. You use the SCT 3000 to enter and change selected parameters within a given
transmitter’s database to alter its operating characteristics. We call this process of viewing and/or
changing database parameters “configuration”.
SMV configuration can be done using the SCT either on-line, where configuration parameters are
written to the SMV through a direct connection with the SCT, or off-line where the transmitter
configuration database is created and saved to disk for later downloading to the SMV. Figure 10
shows a graphic summary of the on-line configuration process.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 19
Figure 10 - SMV On-line Configuration Process
5.3.2 Configuration Summary
The SCT contains templates that you can use to create configuration database for various smart field
devices. The SMV templates contain the configuration forms (or tab cards) necessary to create the
database for an SMV transmitter.
When using a Honeywell-defined SMV template, you should choose a file template for the
temperature range and model of SMV that you wish to configure.
Configuration is complete when you have entered all parameters in the template’s tab cards, (and for
flow applications you have entered all flow data in the flow compensation wizard). You then save the
template file containing the SMV transmitter’s database as a disk file.
Page 20
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
5.4 Using the SCT for SMV800 Configuration
The SCT template files have tab cards that contain data fields for the SMV parameters which you fill
in. You start with the Device tab card to enter the device tag name (Tag ID) and other general
descriptions. Next, you can select each tab card in order and configure each PV (PV1, secondary
variable if desired, PV2, PV3, and PV4).
SMV Process Variable
SCT Template Tab Card
PV1 (Differential Pressure)
DPConf
PV2 (Absolute Pressure or Gauge APConf or GPConf *
Pressure) *
PV3 (Process Temperature)
TempConf
PV4 (Flow)
FlowConf
* PV2 will be AP or GP depending on SMV model
Use the Flow Compensation Wizard to setup the SMV800 for flow applications. The flow wizard
guides you through the steps necessary to complete your flow configuration. See Flow Compensation
Wizard, section 5.5.10 for more information about the flow wizard.
In the subsections below information is given for filling in some of the SCT tab card data fields.
Supplementary background information and reference data on SMV configuration that may be helpful
is also presented. Use the SCT on-line help and user manual for detailed “how to configure”
information.
ATTENTION
If the transmitter detects an incomplete database upon power-up, it will initialize the database
parameters to default conditions. A setting or selection with a superscript “d” in the following
subsections identifies the factory setting.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 21
5.5 Device Configuration
5.5.3 Transmitter Tag Name and PV1 Priority
Tag ID field is found on the Device tab card.
Tag ID - Enter an appropriate tag name for the transmitter containing up to eight ASCII characters
which uniquely identifies the transmitter.
NOTE: It is suggested that when you create a database configuration file for the transmitter, you
make the file name the same as the transmitter tag ID.
PV1 Priority - Enter “/ ” slash as the eighth character in tag number to set PV 1 as “priority” PV in
DE (digital) data broadcast, if all four PVs are selected for broadcast (turned ON). See “Selecting PVs
for Broadcast” on next page for an explanation on the broadcast of PVs.
Background
Normally, PV1 has the number 1 priority unless all four PVs are selected for broadcast. Then, PV4
has the number 1 priority, PV 1 is second, PV2 is third, and PV3 is fourth. However, you can set PV1
to have the top priority and PV4 to be second by entering a “/” as the eighth character in the Tag ID.
Note that the transmission rate for the various PVs depends on the number of PVs that are selected for
broadcast. When more than one PV is selected, the “priority” PV is sent every other broadcast cycle.
Device Data Fields
See the SCT help and on-line user manual for descriptions and procedures for filling in the remaining
data fields of the Device tab card.
5.5.4 General Configuration
PV Type
The PV Type field is found on the General tab card.
Selecting PVs for Broadcast
Select one of the PV Types in Table 6 to choose which of the transmitter’s PVs are to be sent
(broadcast) to the control system. Optionally, you can select whether the secondary variable (SV1) is
included as part of the broadcast message. The secondary is the SMV transmitter’s meter body
temperature.
NOTE: This configuration parameter is valid only when the transmitter is in DE mode.
Table 6 - PV Type Selection for SMV Output
If You Select PV Type . . .
These PVs are Broadcast to Control
System
PV1 (DP)
Differential Pressure (PV1) measurement.
PV1 (DP) and PV2 (SP)
Differential Pressure (PV1) and Static Pressure* (PV2)
measurements.
PV1 (DP) - PV3 (TEMP)
Differential Pressure (PV1), Static Pressure* (PV2) and
Process Temperature (PV3) measurements.
PV1 (DP) - PV4 (FLOW)
Differential Pressure (PV1), Static Pressure* (PV2) and
Process Temperature (PV3) measurements and the
Calculated flow rate value (PV4).
Page 22
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PV1 (DP) w/SV1 (M.B.Temp)
Differential Pressure (PV1) measurement with the
Secondary Variable (SV1).
PV1 (DP) w/SV1 & PV2 (SP)
Differential Pressure (PV1) and Static Pressure* (PV2)
measurements with the Secondary Variable (SV1).
PV1 (DP) w/SV1 - PV3 (TEMP)
Differential Pressure (PV1), Static Pressure* (PV2) and
Process Temperature (PV3) measurements with the
Secondary Variable (SV1).
PV1 (DP) w/SV1 - PV4 (FLOW) Differential Pressure (PV1), Static Pressure* (PV2) and
Process Temperature (PV3) measurements and the
Calculated flow rate value (PV4) with the Secondary
variable (SV1).
* Static pressure may be absolute or gauge pressure, depending on the SMV model type. (For models SMA810
and SMA845, PV2 measures absolute pressure. For model SMG870, PV2 measures gauge pressure.)
ATTENTION
To digitally integrate the SMV800 transmitter with our TPS/TDC control systems, you must have an
STIMV IOP module in your Process Manager, Advanced Process Manager, or High Performance
Process Manager. You cannot integrate the SMV800 with a control system using an STDC card or an
STI IOP module for the Smart Transmitter interface.
Contact your Honeywell representative for information about possibly upgrading an existing STI IOP
to an STIMV IOP.
Analog Output Selection
The Analog Output Selection field should contain the PV type that will represent the transmitter’s
output when the transmitter is in its analog mode.
Select the PV you want to see as the SMV output from the choices in Table 7.
Table 7 - SMV Analog Output Selection
Determine which PV is desired as SMV
Output . . .
Then Select…
PV1 – Delta P (Differential Pressure)
PV1 (DP)
PV2 – Static (Absolute or Gauge Pressure)
PV2 (SP)*
PV3 – Proc Temp (Process Temperature)
PV3 (Temp)
PV4 – Calculated (Calculated Flow Rate)
PV4 (Flow)d
d Factory setting. * Static pressure may be absolute or gauge pressure, depending on the SMV model type. (For
models SMA810 and SMA845, PV2 measure absolute pressure. For model SMG870, PV2 measures gauge
pressure.)
A transmitter output can represent only one process variable when it is operating in its analog mode.
You can select which one of the four PVs is to represent the output.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 23
Line Filter (DE only)
When using the process temperature (PV3) input, select the input filter frequency that matches the
power line frequency for the power supply.
 50 Hz
 60 Hz d
d
Factory setting.
The line filter helps to eliminate noise on the process temperature signal input to the transmitter.
Make a selection to indicate whether the transmitter will work with a 50 Hz or 60 Hz line frequency.
5.5.5 DPConf Configuration - PV1
Engineering Units
The DPConf tab card displays the Lower Range Value (LRV), Low Range Limit (LRL), Upper
Range Value (URV) and Upper Range Limit (URL) for PV 1 in the unit of measure selected in the
Engineering Units field.
PV1 Engineering Units
Select one of the preprogrammed engineering units in Table 8 for display of the PV measurement.
Table 8 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV 1
Engineering Unit
inH2O @ 39F d
Inches of Water at 39.2 °F (4 °C)
inH2O @ 68F
Inches of Water at 68 °F (20 °C)
mmHg @ 0C
Millimeters of Mercury at 0°C (32 °F)
psi
kPa
Pounds per Square Inch
Kilopascals
M Pa
Megapascals
mbar
Millibar
bar
Bar
g/cm2
Grams per Square Centimeter
Kg/cm2
Kilograms per Square Centimeter
inHg @ 32F
mmH2O @ 4C
mH2O @ 4C
ATM
inH2O @ 60F
Page 24
Meaning
Inches of Mercury at 32 °F (0 °C)
Millimeters of Water at 4°C (39.2 °F)
Meters of Water at 4 °C (39.2 °F)
Normal Atmospheres
Inches of Water at 60 °F (15.6 °C)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
LRV and URV
The Lower Range Value and the Upper Range Value fields for PV1 are found on the DPConf tab
card.
PV1 (DP) Range Values
Configure the LRV (which is the process input for 4 mA dc* (0%) output) and URV (which is the
process input for 20 mA dc* (100%) output) for the differential pressure input PV1 by typing in the
desired values on the SCT configuration.
 LRV = Type in the desired value (default = 0.0)
 URV = Type in the desired value
(default = 100 inH2O@39.2 °F for SMV models SMA845 and SMG870)
(default = 10 inH2O@39.2 °F for SMV models SMA810)
When transmitter is in analog mode.
 SMV800 Transmitters are calibrated with inches of water ranges using inches of water
pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2 °F (4 °C).
 For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as the
URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 inH2O range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV and
0 as the URV.
 The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the
present span (URV – LRV).
 If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV first.
Output Conformity
Select the output form for differential pressure (PV1) variable to represent one of these selections.
Note that calculated flow rate process variable (PV4) includes a square root operation and it is not
affected by this selection.
 LINEAR
 SQUARE ROOT
Background
The PV1 output is normally set for a straight linear calculation since square root is performed for
PV4. However, you can select the transmitter’s PV 1 output to represent a square root calculation for
flow measurement. Thus, we refer to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity
or the output form for PV 1.
About Square Root
For SMV800 transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary
Output element, the flow rate is directly proportional to the square root of the differential pressure
(PV 1) input. The PV 1 output value is automatically converted to equal percent of root DP when PV
1 output conformity is configured as square root.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 25
You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes.
• 100 = %P
Where,
ÄP = Differential pressure input in engineering units
Span = Transmitter’s measurement span (URV – LRV)
%P = Pressure input in percent of span
Therefore,
• 100 = % Flow
And, you can use this formula to determine the corresponding current
output in milliamperes direct current.
(% Flow • 16) + 4 = mA dc Output
Example: If you have an application with a differential pressure range of
0 to 100 inches of water with an input of 49 inches of water, substituting into the above formulas
yields:
Square Root Dropout
To avoid unstable output at PV1 readings near zero, the SMV800 transmitter automatically drops
square root conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings. As
shown in Figure 11, the square root dropout point is between 0.4 and 0.5 % of differential pressure
input.
Page 26
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Figure 11 - Square Root Dropout Points for PV 1
Damping
Adjust the damping time constant for Differential Pressure (PV1) to reduce the output noise. We
suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for the process.
The damping values (in seconds) for PV1 are:
0.00d, 0.16, 0.32, 0.48,
1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 16.0, and 32.0
Adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We recommend that you set the damping to the
largest value that the system can accept.
Background
The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the turndown ratio of the
transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the peak-to-peak noise on the output signal increases.
You can use this formula to find the turndown ratio using the pressure range information for your
transmitter.
Upper Range Limit_ ______
Turndown Ratio = (Upper Range Value – Lower Range Value)
Example: The turndown ratio for a 400 inH2 O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 inH2 O would be:
400
8
Turndown Ratio = (50 – 0) = 1 or 8:1
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 27
5.5.6 SP Conf Configuration - PV2
Engineering Units
The SP Conf tab card displays the Lower Range Value (LRV), Lower Range Limit (LRL), Upper
Range Value (URV) and Upper Range Limit (URL) for PV2 in the unit of measure selected in the
Engineering Units field.
Table 9 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV2*
Engineering Unit
Meaning
inH2O @ 39F
Inches of Water at 39.2 °F (4 °C)
inH2O @ 68F
Inches of Water at 68 °F (20 °C)
mmHg @ 0C
Millimeters of Mercury at 0°C (32 °F)
psi d
kPa
Pounds per Square Inch
Kilopascals
M Pa
Megapascals
mbar
Millibar
bar
Bar
g/cm2
Grams per Square Centimeter
Kg/cm2
inHg @ 32F
mmH2O @ 4C
mH2O @ 4C
ATM
inH2O @ 60F
Kilograms per Square Centimeter
Inches of Mercury at 32 °F (0 °C)
Millimeters of Water at 4°C (39.2 °F)
Meters of Water at 4 °C (39.2 °F)
Normal Atmospheres
Inches of Water at 60 °F (15.6 °C)
d
Factory setting.
* Static pressure may be absolute or gauge pressure, depending on the SMV model type.
NOTE: Depending on the SMV transmitter model type, PV2 will measure static pressure in either
absolute or gauge values.
SMV Models —SMA810 and SMA845 PV2 —Absolute Pressure
—SMG870
PV2 —Gauge Pressure
PV2 Engineering Units. Select one of the preprogrammed engineering units in Table 13 for display of
the PV2 measurements.
Atmospheric Offset
For SMV models SMG870, (which uses gauge pressure as PV2 input), you must measure the local
absolute static pressure and then enter that value in the Atmospheric Offset field.
Background
Internally, the SMV transmitter uses absolute pressure values for all flow calculations. The value
entered in the Atmospheric Offset field is added to the gauge pressure input value to approximate the
absolute pressure.
An inaccurate atmospheric pressure offset value will result in a small error of the flow calculation.
Page 28
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Use an absolute pressure gauge to measure the correct atmospheric pressure. A standard barometer
may not give an accurate absolute pressure reading.
PV2 (AP/GP or SP) Range Values (LRV and URV)
The Lower Range Value and the Upper Range Value fields for PV2 are found on the AP/GPConf tab
card.
Set the LRV (which is the process input for 0% output) and URV (which is the process input for
100% output) for the static pressure input PV2 by typing in the desired values on the SCT tab card.


LRV = Type in the desired value (default = 0.0)
URV = Type in the desired value
(default = 50 psia for model SMA810), (default = 750 psia for model SMA845),
(default = 3000 psig for model SMG870)
NOTE: Static pressure may be absolute or gauge pressure, depending on the model SMV800 you
have selected.
ATTENTION
The range for PV2 is static pressure (as measured at the high pressure port of the meter body).
 The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the
present span (URV – LRV).
 If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change LRV first.
Damping
Adjust the damping time constant for Static Pressure (PV2) to reduce the output noise. We suggest
that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for the process. The damping values
(in seconds) for PV2 are:
0.00d, 0.16, 0.32, 0.48,
1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 16.0, and 32.0
Adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We recommend that you set the damping to the
largest value that the system can accept.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 29
5.5.7 TempConf Configuration - PV3
Engineering Units
The TempConf tab card displays the Lower Range Value (LRV), Lower Range Limit (LRL), Upper
Range Value (URV) and Upper Range Limit (URL) for PV3 in the unit of measure selected in the
Engineering Units field.
Selecting PV3 Engineering Units
Select one of the preprogrammed engineering units in Table 10 for display of the PV3 measurements,
depending upon output characterization configuration.
Also select one of the preprogrammed engineering units for display of the cold junction temperature
readings (CJT Units field). This selection is independent of the other sensor measurements. See Cold
Junction Compensation on next page.
Table 10 - Pre-programmed Engineering Units for PV3
Engineering Unit
NOTE:
d
Meaning
Cd
Degrees Celsius or Centigrade
F
Degrees Fahrenheit
K
Kelvin
R
Degrees Rankine
When output characterization configuration for PV3 is NON-LINEAR (DE
only), see Output Characterization.
PV3 input readings are displayed in the following units:
mV or V
milliVolts or Volts (for Thermocouple
sensor)
Ohm
Ohms (for RTD sensor)
Factory setting.
Cold Junction Compensation
If a thermocouple is used for process temperature PV3 input, you must select if the cold junction (CJ)
compensation will be supplied internally by the transmitter or externally from a user-supplied
isothermal block.
Specify source of cold junction temperature compensation.
 Internal
 Fixed - Must also key in value of cold junction temperature for reference.
Page 30
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Background
Every thermocouple requires a hot junction and a cold junction for operation. The hot junction is
located at the point of process measurement and the cold junction is located in the transmitter
(internal) or at an external location selected by the user. The transmitter bases its range measurement
on the difference of the two junctions. The internal or external temperature sensitive resistor
compensates for changes in ambient temperature that would otherwise have the same effect as a
change in process temperature.
If you configure CJ source as fixed, you must tell the transmitter what cold junction temperature to
reference by typing in the temperature as a configuration value. For internal cold junction
configuration, the transmitter measures the cold junction temperature internally.
Background
You can have the transmitter provide a linear output which is linearized to temperature for PV3 input,
or a nonlinear output which is proportional to resistance for an RTD input, or millivolt or volt input
for T/C input. Also, if you do switch from linear to non-linearized or vice versa, be sure you verify
the LRV and URV settings after you enter the configuration data.
Sensor Type
Identify and select the type of sensor that is connected to the transmitter as its input for process
temperature PV3. This will set the appropriate LRL and URL data in the transmitter automatically.
Table 11 shows the pre-programmed temperature sensor types and the rated measurement range limits
for a given sensor selection.
Table 11 - Sensor Types for PV3 Process Temperature Input
Sensor Type
Rated Temperature Range Limits
°C
-200 to 450
-328 to 842
Type E
0 to 1000
32 to 1832
Type J
0 to 1200
32 to 2192
Type K
-100 to 1250
-148 to 2282
Type T
-100 to 400
-148 to 752
PT100 D d
d
°F
Factory setting.
ATTENTION
Whenever you connect a different sensor as the transmitter’s input, you must also change the sensor
type configuration to agree. Otherwise, range setting errors may result.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 31
T/C Fault Detect
WARNING: To accurately set the device status and Analog Output, it is highly recommended to
enable T/C or RTD fault detection.
The behavior of the device and process values is explained below when this setting is OFF vs ON to
explain why it is recommended to configure this setting ON always.
If the T/C Fault detect is OFF:
The reported temperature value may or may not be reported as a fault condition depending upon how
the open T/C connection drifts. For active temperature compensation during flow calculations an
undetected open thermocouple may result in a condition where the reported flow value is inaccurate.
For this reason it highly recommended that open thermocouple detection is turned on so that the
active temperature is used for flow compensation.
Regardless of what device variable is mapped to Analog Output, when the open input condition
occurs, device will report non-critical status, but Flow calculation will use the reported Temperature
value. Note that this case may result in inaccurate Flow value. If the sensor is repaired, the status is
cleared without device reset.
If the T/C Fault detect is ON:
When Temperature is mapped to Analog Output, on detecting open input, device will report critical
status, Temperature value will be set to NaN and Flow value will also be set to NaN. Analog Output
will be in burnout.
When DP, SP is mapped to Analog Output, on detecting open input, device will report non-critical
status, Temperature will be reported value, but Flow value will be set to NaN (when PT failsafe ON),
Analog Output will follow the input DP or SP.
When Flow is mapped to Analog Output, on detecting open input, device will report; critical status
when PT failsafe is ON. Flow will report NaN, Temperature will be reported value, Analog Output
will be at burnout or non-critical status when PT failsafe is OFF. Temperature will be reported value,
Flow calculation will use the Design or Nominal temperature value based on the selected algorithm
and report a valid Flow value. Analog output will follow the calculated flow.
Background
You can turn the transmitter’s temperature sensor fault detection function ON or OFF through
configuration.
• With the detection ON, the transmitter drives the PV3 output to failsafe in the event of an
open RTD or T/C lead condition. The direction of the failsafe indication (upscale or
downscale) is determined by the failsafe jumper on the PWA.
• When fault detection is set to OFF, these same fault conditions result in the transmitter not
driving the output to failsafe and reporting a non-critical status for an open RTD sensing lead
or any T/C lead. But when an open RTD compensation lead is detected, the transmitter
automatically reconfigures itself to operate without the compensation lead. This means that a
4-wire RTD would be reconfigured as 3-wire RTD, if possible and thus avoiding a critical
status condition in the transmitter when the transmitter is still capable of delivering a
reasonably accurate temperature output.
Page 32
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PV3 (Temperature) Range Values (LRV and URV)
The Lower Range Value and the Upper Range Value fields for PV3 are found on the TempConf tab
card.
Configure the LRV and URV (which are desired zero and span points for your measurement range)
for the process temperature input PV3 by typing in the desired values on the TempConf tab card.
•
•
LRV = Type in the desired value (default = 0.0)
URV = Type in the desired value (default = URL)
Background
You can set the LRV and URV for PV3 by either typing in the desired values on the SCT TempConf
tab card or applying the corresponding LRV and URV input signals directly to the transmitter. The
LRV and URV set the desired zero and span points for your measurement range as shown the
example in Figure 12.
Figure 12 – RTD Range Configuration



For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as the
URV. For example, to make a 0 to 500 °F range a reverse range, enter 500 as the LRV and 0
as the URV.
The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the
present span (URV – LRV). See Figure 13 for an example.
If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV first. However, if the
change in the LRV would cause the URV to exceed the URL, you would have to change the
URV to narrow the span before you could change the LRV
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 33
Figure 13 - Current Range Settings
Damping
Adjust the damping time constant for Process Temperature (PV3) to reduce the output noise. We
suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for the process.
The damping values (in seconds) for PV3 are:
0.00d, 0.3, 0.7, 1.5, 3.1, 6.3,
12.7, 25.5, 51.1, 102.3
Adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We recommend that you set the damping to the
largest value that the system can accept.
Page 34
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
5.5.8 FlowConf Configuration - PV4
Engineering Units
The FlowConf tab card displays the Lower Range Value (LRV), Lower Range Limit (LRL), Upper
Range Value (URV) and Upper Range Limit (URL) for PV4 in the unit of measure selected in the
Engineering Units field.
PV4 Engineering Units
Select one of the preprogrammed engineering units for display of the PV4 measurements, depending
upon type of flow measurement configuration. Table 12 lists the pre-programmed engineering units
for volumetric flow and Table 13 lists the engineering units for mass flow.
Table 12- Pre-programmed Volumetric Flow Engineering Units for PV4
Engineering Unit
M3/hd
Meaning
Cubic Meters per Hour
gal/h
l/h
Gallons per Hour
Liters per Hour
cc/h
Cubic Centimeters per Hour
m3/min
Cubic Meters per Minute
gal/min
l/min
Gallons per Minute
Liters per Minute
cc/min
Cubic Centimeters per Minute
m3/day
Cubic Meters per Day
gal/day
Gallons per Day
Kgal/day
Kilogallons per Day
bbl/day
m3/sec
Barrels per Day
Cubic Meters per Second
CFM
Cubic Feet per Minute
CFH
Cubic Feet per Hour
d Factory setting.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 35
Table 13 - Pre-programmed Mass Flow Engineering Units for PV4
Engineering Unit
Kg/sec
Kilograms per Second
Kg/min
Kilograms per minute
Kg/h
Kilograms per Hour
lb/min
Pounds per Minute
lb/h
lb/sec
Pounds per Hour
Pounds per Second
t/hd
Tonnes per Hour (Metric Tons)
t/min
Tonnes per Minute (Metric Tons)
t/sec
Tonnes per Second (Metric Tons)
g/h
d
Meaning
Grams per Hour
g/min
Grams per Minute
g/sec
Grams per Second
ton/h
Tons per Hour (Short Tons)
ton/min
Tons per Minute (Short Tons)
ton/sec
Tons per Second (Short Tons)
Factory setting.
PV4 (Flow) Upper Range Limit (URL) and Range Values (LRV and URV)
Set the URL, LRV, and URV for calculated flow rate PV4 output by typing in the desired values on
the FlowConf tab card.
• URL = Type in the maximum range limit that is applicable for your process conditions.
(100,000 = default)
• LRV = Type in the desired value (default = 0.0)
• URV = Type in the desired value (default = URL)
ATTENTION
Be sure that you set the PV4 Upper Range Limit (URL) to desired value before you set PV4 range
values. We suggest that you set the PV4 URL to equal two times the maximum flow rate (2 x URV)
About URL and LRL
The Lower Range Limit (LRL) and Upper Range Limit (URL) identify the minimum and maximum
flow rates for the given PV4 calculation. The LRL is fixed at zero to represent a no flow condition.
The URL, like the URV, depends on the calculated rate of flow that includes a scaling factor as well
as pressure and/or temperature compensation. It is expressed as the maximum flow rate in the
selected volumetric or mass flow engineering units.
Page 36
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
About LRV and URV
The LRV and URV set the desired zero and span points for your calculated measurement range as
shown in the example in Figure 14.
Figure 14 - Typical Volumetric Flow Range Setting Values
ATTENTION
• The default engineering units for volumetric flow rate is cubic meters per hour and tonnes per
hour is the default engineering units for mass flow rate.
• The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the
present span (URV – LRV).
• If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV first.
Damping
Adjust the damping time constant for flow measurement (PV4) to reduce the output noise. We
suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for the process.
The damping values (in seconds) for PV4 are:
0.00d, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0,
10.0, 50.0 and100.0
Adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We recommend that you set the damping to the
largest value that the system can accept.
Low Flow Cutoff for PV4
For calculated flow rate (PV4), set low and high cutoff limits between 0 and 30% of the upper range
limit (URL) for PV4.
•
Low Flow Cutoff:
Low (0.0 = default) High (0.0 = default)
Background
You can set low and high flow cutoff limits for the transmitter output based on the calculated variable
PV4. The transmitter will clamp the current output at zero percent flow when the flow rate reaches
the configured low limit and will keep the output at zero percent until the flow rate rises to the
configured high limit. This helps avoid errors caused by flow pulsations in range values close to zero.
Note that you configure limit values in selected engineering units between 0 to 30% of the upper
range limit for PV4.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 37
Figure 15 gives a graphic representation of the low flow cutoff action for sample low and high limits
in engineering units of liters per minute.
ATTENTION
If the flow LRV is not zero, the low flow cutoff output value will be calculated on the LRV and will
not be 0 %.
Figure 15 - Low Flow Cutoff
ATTENTION
The low flow cutoff action also applies for reverse flow in the negative direction. For the sample
shown in Figure 15, this would result in a low limit of –55 GPM and a high limit of –165 GPM.
Page 38
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
5.5.9 Using Custom Engineering Units
Using Custom Units for PV4 Flow Measurement
The SCT contains a selection of preprogrammed engineering units that you can choose to represent
your PV4 flow measurement. If you want the PV4 measurement to represent an engineering unit that
is not one of the preprogrammed units stored in the SCT, you must select custom units and enter a tag
that identifies the desired custom unit.
Using the SCT, selecting Custom Units allows you to choose a unit that is compatible with your
application process. Additionally, a conversion factor must be calculated and entered when
configuring the PV4 flow variable. This conversion factor is a value used to convert the standard units
used by the SMV into the desired custom units. The standard units used by the SMV are:
• Tonnes/hour – for mass flow
• Meters3/hour – for volumetric flow
For example, to calculate the conversion factor for a volumetric flow rate of Standard Cubic Feet per
Day – SCFD
Conversion Factor = 847.552
For example, to calculate the conversion factor for a mass flow rate of Kilograms per day – kg/day
Conversion Factor = 24000
This factor is then entered as the Conversion Factor value in Flow Compensation Wizard of the SCT
during configuration. Please note that when using the standard equation, the conversion factor, as well
as other values, are used to calculate the Wizard Kuser factor. When using the dynamic corrections
equation, the conversion factor is used as the Kuser factor.
Refer to the SCT on-line manual for additional information about using custom units
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 39
5.5.10 Flow Compensation Wizard (DE only)
A Flow Compensation Wizard is provided with the SCT 3000 which is used to configure PV4, the
flow variable of the SMV800 Multivariable Transmitter. The flow compensation wizard will guide
you in configuring the PV4 output for either a standard flow equation or a dynamic compensation
flow equation.
Standard Compensation Equation
 You can access the flow compensation wizard by pressing the Wizard button in the SCT
/SMV800 configuration window.
 Refer to the SCT800 on-line User Manual for detailed information for using the flow
compensation wizard.
According to the following equation:
Dynamic Compensation Equation
The SMV800 dynamic compensation flow equation is the ASME flow equation as described in
ASME MFC-3M, “Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi.” The
dynamic compensation flow equation should be used to increase the flow measurement accuracy and
flow turndown for the primary elements listed in Table 14 - Primary Flow Elements.
Table 14 - Primary Flow Elements
Primary Element
Orifice
Venturi
Page 40
- Flange taps (ASME - ISO)
Application
D t 2.3
Gases, liquids and steam
- Flange taps (ASME - ISO) 2 d D d 2.3
Gases, liquids and steam
- Corner taps (ASME - ISO)
Gases, liquids and steam
- D and D/2 taps (ASME - ISO)
Gases, liquids and steam
- 2.5D and 8D taps (ASME - ISO)
Liquids
- Machined Inlet (ASME - ISO)
Liquids
- Rough Cast Inlet (ASME - ISO)
Liquids
- Rough Welded sheet-iron inlet (ASME - ISO)
Liquids
Ellipse® Averaging Pitot Tube
Gases, liquids and steam
Nozzle (ASME Long Radius)
Liquids
Venturi Nozzle (ISA inlet)
Liquids
ISA Nozzle
Liquids
Leopold Venturi
Liquids
Gerand Venturi
Liquids
Universal Venturi Tube
Liquids
Lo-Loss Tube
Liquids
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Dynamic Compensation Equation
The dynamic compensation flow equation for mass applications is:
Which provides compensation dynamically for discharge coefficient, gas expansion factor, thermal
expansion factor, density, and viscosity.
For details on configuring Flow algorithm refer to the SCT 3000 online User manual, #34-ST-10-08
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 41
5.6 Using the SCT3000 Tool to Configure Local Display Screens on
SMV800
5.6.11 Display Screen Configuration Instructions
1. From Local Display tab, select a screen number and select OK button to read the current
configuration for the selected Screen X. After the current Screen parameters are read, user
can edit the Screen Format and other parameters one by one, and select OK each time to
accept the selection.
Depending on the selection of Screen Format, some displayed parameters may not be available
for configuration and will be disabled."
2. Select a Screen Format.
Page 42
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
3. Press ‘Enter’, or click the OK button. If the Screen Format was chosen as ‘PV & Bar’ or ‘PV
& Trend’, the Display Low Lim and Display High Lim textboxes should become accessible.
If ‘PV & Trend’ was selected, the ‘Trend Hours’ textbox will become accessible, shown
below.
This screen shows PV and Bar selected as the screen format which activates Display High and
Low Limits
When set to PV & Trend, the Display High and Low limits are enabled, as well as the Trend
Hours parameter.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 43
4. Select an option in the PV Selection dropdown.
5. Press ‘Enter’, or click the OK button. This selection will affect the options available in the
PV Scaling and Engineering Units dropdown lists. The available options directly reflect the
available options on the Advanced Display using DE.
6. Select an option from PV Scaling, press enter or click the OK button.
7. Repeat step 7 for Engineering Units and Decimals.
8. If the Screen Format was selected as ‘PV & Bar’ or ‘PV & Trend’, enter a value in Display
Low Lim and the press enter or click ‘OK’. Repeat for Display High Lim.
9. If PV Scaling is selected as Linear, or if the PV Scaling is selected as Square Root with Units
set to Custom, the Scaling Low and Scaling High Limit boxes will be enabled. Enter a value
Page 44
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
for each, one at a time, pressing enter or ‘OK’ in between.
10. Enter a value in Trend Hours if available, click ‘OK’ or press enter.
11. If the PV Scaling is selected as Linear or Square Root (DP only), and if Custom is selected
for Engineering Units, enter a Custom Unit Tag. Click ‘OK’ or press Enter. The box will be
disabled if the prerequisites aren’t met.
12. If desired, change the Custom Screen Tag. If the user wants the default screen tag, clear
anything that appears in the Custom Screen Tag textbox. Even if no change is needed on the
Custom Screen Tag, just hit backspace and reenter the last character.
When you press Enter or click ‘OK’ after editing the Custom Screen Tag, the write to
the Comm/Display will begin. The last item that should be changed is Custom Screen
Tag. If you want to change anything before sending the write request, click Cancel and
start over.
Common Parameter Configuration
There are four common parameters that are currently configurable: Language, Screen Rotate,
Sequence Time, and Contrast.
1. The common parameters can be configured in any order. After making a change to any of the
accessible parameters, confirm that change by clicking ‘OK’. This will write that parameter
down to the device. A screenshot of what the SCT Tool will look like is shown below.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 45
Items in red box are common parameters.
Page 46
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
5.6.12 Display Screen Configuration Parameters:
Table 15 – Display Screen Configuration Parameters
Screen Number
Screen 1 to 8
Screen Format (see below Table 16)
PV selection (see below Table 16)
Screen Units (see below Table 16)
Decimal (see below Table 16)
PV Scaling (see below Table 16)
Display High Limit (Honeywell Float Format)
Display Low Limit (Honeywell Float Format)
Scaling Low Limit (Honeywell Float Format)
Scaling High Limit (Honeywell Float Format)
Trend Hours (see below Table 16)
Custom Tag: 14 Character string to identify the displayed value Screen format (see below Table 16)
Custom Unit: 9 character string to identify the displayed value (see below Table 16)
Language
English-0,
French-1,
German-2,
Spanish-3,
Russian-4,
Chinese-5,
Japanese-6,
Turkish-7,
Italian-8
Sequence Time (3 to 30 Seconds.)
Screen Rotation (1=Enable, 0=Disable)
Password (ASCII – 4 Byte data)
Contrast (1-9)
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 47
5.6.12.1
Display Screen configuration parameters in detail:
Table 16 - Display Screen configuration parameters details
Name
Screen Format
Size
1
Description
View display format:
0 – None
1 – Large PV
2 – Bar Graph (Applicable for only Advance Display)
3 – Horizontal Trend (Applicable for only Advance Display)
1 – Differential Pressure
(InH2O@68F, InHg@0C, InHg@0C, MMH2O@68F, MMHg@0C, PSI,
Bar, Millibar, Gram-force/cm^2, Kilogram-force/cm^2, Pascals,
Kilopascals, Torr, Atm, InH2O@60F, Megapascals, InH2O@39F,
MMH2O@4C, Default InH2O@60F)
2 – Gauge/Absolute Pressure
(InH2O@68F, InHg@0C, InHg@0C, MMH2O@68F, MMHg@0C, PSI,
Bar, Millibar, Gram-force/cm^2, Kilogram-force/cm^2, Pascals,
Kilopascals, Torr, Atm, InH2O@60F, Megapascals, InH2O@39F,
MMH2O@4C, Default InH2O@60F)
3 – Temperature (C,F,R,K)
PV Selection
1
4 – Mass Flow/Volume Flow/No Flow
Mass Flow:
(LbsM per min, LbsM per hour, LbsM per sec, Tons per sec, Tons per min,
Tons per hour, Kg per min, Kg per sec, Kg per hour, T per min, T per hour,
T per sec ,Grams per sec, Grams per min, Grams per hour)
Volume Flow:
(Gallons per min, Gallons per hour, Gallons per day, Liters per min ,
Liters per hour, Barrels per day, M^3 per day, M^3 per hour, M^3 per min,
M^3 per sec, Ft^3 per sec, Ft^3 per min, Ft^3 per hour)
5 – MB Temperature (C,F,R,K)
6 – Sensor 1 (C,F,R,K)
9 – Sensor 1 Resis (Ohm)
10 – Loop Output (milliamp)
12 – Percent Output (Percent)
Screen Units
2
Engineering Units.
Decimals
1
Number of digits to display after the decimal point.
Range: 0 – 3
( 0 - x, 1 - x.x, 2 - x.xx, 3 - x.xxx)
Page 48
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PV Scaling
1
0 - None
1 - Convert Units
2 - Linear
3 – Square Root
None, Convert Units, Linear Not Applicable to
Sensor 1 Resis
Loop Output
None, Linear applicable to
% Output
None, Linear, Convert Units applicable to
Diff Press, Gauge/Absolute Press, Temp, Meter Body Temp, Mass/Volume
Flow, Sensor1
When Convert Units is selected, the selected PV Selection parameter will
show the values in converted Engineering Unit.
Else the values will be shown in default Engineering Unit
Scaling High
Limit
4
Display Scaling Low Limit ()
Applicable when PV Scaling is Linear
Scaling Low
Limit
4
Display Scaling High Limit ()
Applicable when PV Scaling is Linear
Custom Tag
14
Custom Unit
9
Character string to identify the displayed value (14 characters + null) sized to support Unicode characters
Character string to identify the displayed unit value (9)
Display Low
Limit
4
Display Low Limit (Trend, Bar Graph - usually equal to LRV)
Display High
Limit
4
Display High Limit (Trend, Bar Graph - usually equal to URV)
Trend Hours
2
Duration of the trend screen in hours. Valid range 1 – 999
Language
1
Sequence Time
1
Western languages : (English-0, French-1, German-2, Spanish-3, Russian4, Chinese-5, Japanese-6, Turkish-7, Itaian-8)
Eastern languages : (English-0, Chinese-5, Japanese-6)
Screen Rotation Time (3 to 30 Seconds.)
Screen Rotation
1
Screen Rotation Enable/ Disable option (1=Enable, 0=Disable)
Password
(Read only)
Contrast (1-9)
4
Password (ASCII – 4 Byte data)
1
Display Contrast level (1-9)
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 49
5.6.13 Saving, Downloading and Printing a Configuration File
Once you have entered the SMV parameter values into the SCT tab cards, you save the database
configuration file. If you are configuring the SMV on-line, you can save and then download the
configuration values to the transmitter.
Be sure to save a backup copy of the database configuration file on a disk.
You can also print out a summary of the transmitter’s configuration file. The printable document
contains a list of the individual parameters and the associated values for each transmitter’s database
configuration.
Follow the specific instructions in the SCT 3000 help to perform these tasks.
5.6.14 Verifying Flow Configuration
To verify the SMV transmitter’s PV4 calculated flow output for your application, you can use the
SMV to simulate PV input values to the transmitter and read the calculated flow value (PV4). The
flow value can be compared with expected results and then adjustments can be made to the
configuration if necessary.
Page 50
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6 HART Transmitter Configuration
6.1 Overview
Each new SMV800 Transmitter configured for HART protocol is shipped from the factory with a
basic configuration database installed. This basic configuration database must be edited or revised to
meet the requirements of your process system. The process in this section assumes that you will use
the Field Device Communicator (FDC) application for HART configuration tasks. The FDC
application provides the facilities for the online and offline configuration of Transmitters operating
with HART protocol
Online configuration requires that the Transmitter and MCT404 Toolkit are connected and
communication between the two has been established. Online configuration provides a set of
functions with which to perform various operations on a HART communication network through an
active communication link. These operations primarily include configuration, calibration, monitoring,
and diagnostics. Typically, these operations could be realized through various constructs exposed by
the Device Description (DD) file. In addition, the FDC application provides some functions for
convenient execution of these functions.
Offline Configuration refers to configuring a device when the device is not physically present or
communicating with the application. This process enables you to create and save a configuration for a
device, even when the device is not there physically. Later when the device becomes available with
live communication, the same configuration can be downloaded to the device. This feature enables
you to save on device commissioning time and even helps you to replicate the configuration in
multiplicity of devices with lesser efforts. Currently, FDC does not support creating offline
configuration. However, it supports importing of offline configuration from FDM R310 or later
versions. The configurations thus imported can be downloaded to the device from FDC. Please note
that FDC is a Universal HART configurator. SMV800 is supported in FDM R440 and above. But
other SmartLine devices may be supported in earlier versions of FDM based on their launch date.
The following are the tasks that you need to perform for importing offline configuration in FDC
application software and then downloading it to the device.
 Create offline configuration template in FDM
 Save the configuration in FDM in FDM format.
 Import the offline configuration in FDC
 Download the offline configuration to the device
Note: For details on creating and using offline configuration, refer to section Offline configuration in
FDM User’s Guide. Some device specific parameters are not supported in FDM DD offline
configuration.
6.1.1 Personnel Requirements
The information and procedures in this section are based on the assumption that the person
accomplishing configuration tasks is fully qualified and knowledgeable on the use of the MCT404
Toolkit and is intimately familiar with the SMV800 family of Transmitters. Therefore, detailed
procedures are supplied only in so far as necessary to ensure satisfactory configuration. The other
HART configuration Tools are Honeywell Experion in conjunction with FDM, DTMs running on
FDM or Pactware, and Emerson 375/475. The organization of Device Configuration and Parameter
Descriptions is given in section 6.2.10 - Device Configuration and Parameter Descriptions,
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 51
6.2 Overview of FDC Homepage
The FDC homepage consists of links for Online Configuration, Offline Configuration, Manage DDs,
and Settings. See below.
Figure 16 – FDC Homepage
Table 17 lists the items that appear on the FDC homepage and its descriptions.
Table 17 - FDC homepage elements
Items
Description
Screen title.
Tap to quit FDC.
Tap to view the application information.
Tap to navigate to Online Configuration screen.
Tap to navigate to Offline configuration screen.
Tap to navigate to Manage DDs screen.
Tap to navigate to Settings screen.
Tap to select the highlighted menu option.
Tap to quit FDC.
Note: To select a particular option in FDC you can either select the option and then tap Select or you
can directly double-tap the option.
Page 52
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.2 Settings
Use this feature to customize FDC. You can customize FDC for device detection, DD selection, and
other application settings.
6.2.2.1 Device Identification
Use the following options to configure FDC to identify a device.
1.
Using Poll Address
 Use poll address 0 only: Use this to detect a device with the poll address as zero.
 Find first poll address and use: Use this to detect a device with the first available
poll address in the range of poll addresses that are available.
 Use selected poll address: Use this to detect a device with a specific poll address
in the range of zero to 63.
Use From: Use this to detect a device based on a range of poll addresses.
Using Device TAG: Use this to detect a device with a known HART tag.



Using Device LONG TAG: Use this to detect a device with a known HART long tag
(applicable for devices with HART 6 or later Universal revisions).
Note: If you choose the option Using Device TAG or Using Device LONG TAG, FDC prompts you
to enter a device tag/long tag name during device detection.
6.2.2.2 DD selection
Use the following options to configure FDC to select DD files when a DD with matching device
revision is not available.
- Use DD file of previous device revision: Use this option to automatically communicate
using a DD file having device revision lower than that of the device.
- Use generic DD file: Use this option to automatically communicate to the device using an
appropriate generic DD file.
- Always ask user: Use this option to always prompt you with a choice for communicating to
the device either using the previous device revision or using a generic DD file.
- Always Use Generic: Use this option to always communicate to the device using generic DD
files even if a DD file with matching device revision as the device is present.
Note: A generic DD file is a DD file that provides access and interface to the universal data and
features of a HART device.
6.2.2.3 Other settings
Low storage notification: Use this option to set a percentage value and to notify you with a warning
message when the available storage card space is less than the percentage set.
Application diagnostics: Use this option to enable or disable the logging infrastructure for
application diagnostics. With this option enabled, FDC creates necessary log files for troubleshooting
and diagnostics. These files are stored in SD Card\FDC folder.
Note: You must not enable this option unless suggested by Honeywell TAC because this may impact
the application performance.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 53
6.2.3 Manage DDs
Using this feature, you can manage the DD files installed with FDC. A DD file contains descriptive
information about the functionality of a device. By default, a set of DD files are installed with FDC.
However, if you do not have a DD for a given device, you can install it using the “Add DD” feature.
Similarly, you can uninstall a DD file or a set of DD files using “Delete DD” feature. You can also
directly copy the DD files in appropriate hierarchy using a card reader or “Active Sync/Mobile
Device Center” mechanisms. In such a case, you should validate the library view using the “Refresh”
feature.
6.2.3.1 Overview
Using Manage DDs, you can view, add, or delete DD files for devices. A list of already available DD
files is maintained in the DD Library. FDC lists the installed DD files in a hierarchy as below:
Manufacturer
Device Type
DevRev xx, DDRev yy
DevRev pp, DDRev qq
6.2.3.2 Add a DD file
To add a DD file for a device, perform the following steps.
1.
From the FDC homepage, tap Manage DDs > Select.
The Manage DDs dialog box appears.
2.
Tap Options > Add DD.
Or
Tap
.
The ADD DD files dialog box appears.
4.
Browse to the location in which the DD file (.fm8) is located and tap OK.
If the DD file already exists, then the following message appears.
5.
Tap Yes to overwrite the existing DD files.
6.
If the DD file is added successfully, a success message appears.
3.
Page 54
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.3.3 Delete a DD file
Using this option, you can delete a particular version of a DD file. To delete a DD file for a device,
perform the following steps.
From the FDC homepage, tap Manage DDs > Select.
The Manage DDs dialog box appears.
1.
2.
You can choose to delete DD(s) in one of the following ways:
By device manufacturer – Select a device manufacturer to delete all device types
and DDs associated with the manufacturer’s devices.
a)
b) By device type – Select a device type to delete all DDs associated with the device.
c)
3.
By device revision and DD revision – Select the specific entry of device revision, DD
revision to delete the specific DD
Tap Options > Delete DD.
Or
Tap
.
A confirmation message appears.
Tap Yes.
If the DD file is deleted successfully, a success message appears.
4.
5.
Tap OK to return to DD Library page.
6.2.3.4 Validating a manually edited library
Besides using the Add/Delete DD features, advanced users may also manipulate a DD library by
directly editing the contents of the FDC\Library folder. DD files can also be transferred directly to
this location by accessing the SD Card on MCT404/MCT202 through a card reader and/ or by
connecting MCT404/MCT202 to a PC. In such cases, you must perform the following steps to
validate a DD Library, thus edited manually:
From the FDC homepage, tap Manage DDs > Select
The Manage DDs dialog box appears
1.
2.
3.
Tap Options.
Tap Refresh Library.
Or
Tap
.
A confirmation message appears.
4.
Revision 2.0
Tap Yes. The DD library is now validated and refreshed.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 55
6.2.4 Online configuration
Using online configuration, you can configure, calibrate, monitor and diagnose a HART device which
is connected to MCT404 Toolkit. FDC provides the features to perform these functions through the
various constructs offered through the DD file of the device. Besides there are certain other features
available under this link for you to conveniently work with a HART device with live communication.
After making changes to the device you can also save a snapshot of the device data as history to later
transfer it to FDM for record and audit purposes.
6.2.5 Offline configuration
Offline configuration refers to configuring a device offline (without physically connecting to
the device) using a template and then downloading the configuration to the device. Presently,
FDC application software does not support creating offline configuration. However, it
supports importing of offline configuration from FDM (R310 and above).
6.2.6 Online Configuration Overview
Online Configuration option provides you a set of functions with which you can perform various
operations on a device with an active communication link. These operations primarily include
configuration, calibration, monitoring, and diagnostics of a HART device. Typically, these operations
could be realized through various constructs exposed by the DD file of the device. In addition, FDC
also provides some additional application functions for you to perform these functions more
conveniently.
Online configuration includes a set of functions to perform various operations on a Transmitter with
active communication link. These operations primarily include:
 Identifying a Transmitter
 Reading and reviewing Transmitter variable values
 Editing Transmitter variable values
 Downloading the selected/edited variable set to the Transmitter
6.2.6.1 Detecting and loading a device
Tap the Online Configuration button on the FDC Home page.
The device detection and loading process automatically gets started. Depending upon the Device
Detection and DD Selection settings you may have chosen, you may be prompted for certain inputs as
described in the Settings section.
Page 56
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.7 Overview of Device Homepage
Once the device is detected and loaded successfully, you can view the device homepage for the
identified device.
The workspace area on the device homepage consists of 4 tabs on the left hand side. Selecting a tab
displays functions/information associated with that tab on the right hand side.
Figure 17 – Device Homepage
Table 18 lists the device health status and their indications.
Table 18 - Device health status
Device health icons
Indications
Indicates there’s no health or status indicators reported
by the device
Indicates that the device is potentially reporting a status
which needs attention and further investigation. It is
advised that you use Device Status under Functions tab
to further investigate the details.
Indicates that the device has lost communication with MC
Toolkit
6.2.8 Tabs on the Device Home page
The following are the options that are available on the device homepage

Revision 2.0
About tab: Use this option to view the device identity related information. You can view
the manufacturer name, device type, device revision, DD revision, and universal revision
of the HART device.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 57
Page 58

Functions tab: This tab provides various options which you may use for navigating
through the device specific user interface and some standard features offered by FDC
across all devices. For the sake of explanations, the right side options under this tab shall
be referred as “Entry points” throughout the rest of the document.

My Views tab: Quite often, you may be interested only in a set of variables of a device.
But navigating through the menu tree of a device may not be helpful because of time and
further all variables that you want may not be in the same location. Using this unique
feature of FDC, you can now choose what you want to view in a device in your own
views. FDC allows you to create two such views per device revision of a specific device
type. You can always modify them as per your needs.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0

Tools tab: This tab is a placeholder for FDC specific tools for providing certain functionality.
Currently the only option it provides is called as Save History. Using this option you can save the
snapshot of the device variables. This snapshot is saved in a format which can be later imported as
a history record in FDM.
6.2.9 Using FDC for various device operations
Typical operations with a smart field device involve configuration, calibration, monitoring, and
diagnostics. FDC enables you to achieve these operations with a HART device via the various
interfaces/constructs exposed through the DD file of the device.
The “Functions” tab under the device home page provides the entry points for navigating through the
device specific user interface to perform the above mentioned operations. A device may define up to
four entry points in the DD file. All devices shall have at least one entry point, generally referred to
as “Online”. Besides the device specific entry points, FDC provides custom entry points for
navigational aids to specific types of information/features. One such entry point is called Device
Status, which is used for reviewing device health. Another is called Methods List, which is used to
navigate to all the methods available in a device.
All of the device specific entry points represent the device interface, as explained using the online
entry point as an example. All the other device specific entry points have a similar interface except
for the fact that the variables and other DD constructs provided under each may vary as indicated by
the title of each entry point.
For the sake of explanation, the pages that appear on navigating through the device
specific entry points are referred to as “Device Configuration” pages in this document.
However it must be noted that this does not prohibit you from performing other device
operations as explained above.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 59
Online Device Entry Point: When you tap on to open the Online tab, the device configuration screen
appears as shown below.
Alternately you can access the full EDDL features by selecting the “My Device” Tab
Navigate through the Menus to access various functions. See Table 19 to view lists of all the
parameters in the SMV800.
Page 60
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.10 Device Configuration and Parameter Descriptions
Table 20 – Basic Setup
Basic Setup parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Manufacturer
Honeywell
Model
Displays Model or Device Type of SMV800 Transmitter
Dev ID
Displays the HART unique ID of the SMV800 Transmitter
Universal Rev
HART Protocol Universal Revision (HART 7)
Software Rev
HART software revision
Fld dev rev
Displays Field Device Revision of the SMV800 Transmitter
Maint Mode
Displays the Maintenance mode set by Experion PKS. When a
HART device requires maintenance, the engineer or the operator
changes the PV Source value of the corresponding AI channel to
MAN.
As soon as the PV Source value is changed for the channels
connected to the SMV800 transmitters, Experion communicates the
Maint Mode (continued)
channel mode status to the corresponding SMV800 transmitters.
Upon receiving this status, if the value is MAN, the transmitter
displays an M and Available for Maintenance on the local display of
the transmitter. The status display on the transmitter ensures that
the field technician can locate and perform the maintenance work on
the correct transmitter without impacting the integrated devices in
the process loop. The transmitter continues to display the Available
for Maintenance status on its local display until the PV Source status
of the corresponding AI channel is changed to AUTO / SUB or the
transmitter is power cycled. For more information, refer to the
Experion Knowledge Builder
Write Protect
Indicates the current state of the device write protect option as
enabled (yes) or disabled (no)
Config Chng Count
Configuration Change Counter – this counter keeps track of the
number of times any configuration parameter has been changed
Tag
Enter Tag ID name up to 8 characters
Long Tag
Enter Tag ID name up to 32 characters
Date
Gregorian calendar date that is stored in the Field Device. This date
can be used by the user in any way.
Descriptor
Enter any desired or useful descriptor of the transmitter.
Loop Current Mode
Enable: enables loop current mode (analog output will operate as a
4 to 20 mA signal consistent with the transmitter output).
Disable: disables loop current mode (analog output will be fixed to
value set by user)
Tx Install Date
(One time editable) Transmitter installation date in MM/DD/YYYY
format.
Note : If install date is not
TM Install Date
(One time editable) Temperature Module installation date in
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Note : If install date is not
Final asmbly num
Used for identifying electronic components. This number can be
used by the user in any way.
Message
Enter a message up to 32 alphanumeric characters) that will be sent
to the Display. The message will be shown on the Display
interspersed with the configured screens.
Clear Message
Select to clear message from transmitter’s local display.
Model Number
Displays Model number of the SMV800 Pressure Transmitter
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 61
Page 62
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 21 - Standard Flow Setup
Standard Flow Setup Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow default Settings
Allows configuring flow using
default values
Flow Setup Options
Algorithm Type
Allows Full Flow
Configuration. Note that

Equation Model

Fluid Type
based on the selection at

Flow Output Type
each step in the Method,

Flow Calculation Standard
relevant settings are shown

Primary Element Sub Type
in subsequent steps.
(Orifice, Venturi, Nozzle)

Primary Element Type (relevant
list for the selected sub type)

VCone Y Method (VCone only)

VCone Simplified Liquid Switch
(VCone only)

Reverse Flow Calculation

Reynolds Exponent

Fluid Selection (used by DTM
tool for auto calculation of
Viscosity, Density Coefficients)

Polynomial Order (used by DTM
tool for auto calculation of
Viscosity, Density Coefficients)

Bore Material Type

Bore Diameter

Bore Diameter Measuring
Temperature

Bore Thermal Expansion
Coefficient

Pipe Material

Pipe Diameter

Pipe Diameter Measuring
Temperature

Pipe Thermal Expansion
Coefficient

Density Manual Input On/Off

Viscosity Manual Input On/Off

Cd Manual Input On/Off

Y Manual Input On/Off

Fa Manual Input On/Off

Static Pressure Failsafe On/Off

Temp Failsafe On/Off

DP Simulation On/Off

SP Simulation On/Off

PT Simulation On/Off

Flow Simulation On/Off
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 63
Standard Flow Setup – Flow Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow Parameters
Pipe Diameter
Pipe Diameter in inches
Bore Dia_d/APT Probe Width_d
Bore Diameter in inches. In case of
Average Pitot Tube, this parameter is Pitot
Tube Probe Width
Isentr coeff_k
Isentropic Exponent
Reynolds Coefficient1
Reynolds Coefficient R1 (or r1)
Reynolds Coefficient2
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model = Dynamic
Reynolds Coefficient R2 (or r2)
Low limit for Reynolds Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model = Dynamic
High Limit for Reynolds number
High limit for Reynolds Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model = Dynamic
High Limit for Reynolds number
Bore Diam Meas Temp
Bore Ther Exp Coeff
Pipe Dia Meas Temp
Pipe Ther Exp Coeff
Loc Atmos Pressure
Write Pipe Values
Write Bore Values
Write Reynolds Coeff Values
Write Reynolds Limits
Page 64
Pipe Diameter
Pipe Diameter Measure
Temperature
Pipe Material
Pipe Thermal Expansion
Coefficient
Bore Diameter
Bore Diameter Measure
Temperature
Bore Material
Bore Thermal Expansion
Coefficient
Reynolds Coefficient r1
Reynolds Coefficient r2
Low Limit Reynolds Number
 High Limit Reynolds
Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model = Dynamic
Bore Diameter measuring Temperature in
degF
Bore Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Pipe Diameter measuring Temperature in
degF
Pipe Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Local Atmospheric Pressure in psi
Configure Pipe parameters
Applicable when
Equation model is Dynamic.
Configure Bore parameters
Applicable when
Equation model is Dynamic.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Write Isentropic, Atmosphere
Values
Isentropic Exponent
 Local Atmospheric
Pressure
KUser
Units Conversion Factor
Applicable when Algorithm Option is
SMV3000 and Equation model is Standard.
When Equation Model is Dynamic, the
value will be set to 1.0
Configure Units Conversion Factor
Applicable when Algorithm Option is
SMV3000 and Equation model is Standard
Write KUser
Standard Flow Setup – Process Data
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Process Data
Nominal (Default) Values
Nominal Temp
Nominal Temperature
Nominal Abs Pres
Nominal or Default Absolute Pressure
Write Nominal Values
Nominal temperature
Configure Nominal Values

Nominal absolute pressure
Design Values
Design Temperature
Design Temperature
Design Pressure
Design Pressure
Design Density
Write Design Values
Design Temperature
Configure Design Values

Design Pressure
Write Design Density
Design Density
Configure Design Values
Normal (Max) Values
Flow Output Type
No Flow Output

Ideal Gas Actual Volume
Flow

Ideal Gas Mass Flow

Steam Mass Flow

Liquid Mass Flow

Ideal Gas Volume Flow @
Std Condition

Liquid Actual Volume Flow

Liquid Volume Flow @ Std
Condition
Units Mode
K_user/FlowCoeff/Fc
Revision 2.0
Default KUser
This is an internal parameter.
This parameter represents values
based on Algorithm Option and Flow
Calculation Standard.
SMV3000 Algorithm : This parameter
represents KUser value / Unit
Conversion factor.
Equation model = Standard, this is
user editable.
When Equation model = Dynamic,
this value is defaulted to 1.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 65
SMV800 Algorithm: For WEDGE, and
Averaging Pitot Tube and Integral
Orifice, this parameter represents
Flow Coefficient.
For Conditional Orifice, this parameter
represents Calibration Factor Fc.
This is an internal parameter in the
DD hosts. This parameter is
configurable in the DTM tool and is
used for Kuser calculation when
Algorithm is: SMV3000
Equation Model is: Standard
This is an internal parameter in the
DD hosts. This parameter is
configurable in the DTM tool and is
used for Kuser calculation when
Algorithm is: SMV3000 Equation
Model is: Standard
Max Flow Rate
Max Differential Pressure
Fluid Parameters Config
Fluid List
This is an internal parameter in the
DD hosts. User has to manually enter
the Viscosity and Density Coefficients
regardless of the selected fluid.
When using DTM Tool, Viscosity and
Density Coefficients will be
automatically calculated for the
selected fluid.
This is an internal parameter in the
DD hosts. When using the DTM Tool,
Viscosity and Density Coefficients will
be automatically calculated using the
Polynomial of this order.
User can enter any one custom fluid
not in the Fluid List. In DD Hosts this
will provide the same choice of
Viscosity and Density Coefficient
entry options as that of Standard fluid
under Fluid List.
Polynomial order
Custom Fluid
Configure Fluid
Fluid
Polynomial order
When using DTM Tool, Viscosity and
Density Coefficients will be
automatically calculated for the
selected Standard fluid under Fluid
List. But when Custom Fluid is
selected user has to manually enter
the Viscosity and Density
Coefficients.
Fluid: Allows selection of a fluid from
list of 108 fluids or a Custom Fluid.
Polynomial Order: Allows selection of
0 to 4th order Polynomial.
Viscos Polynom Coeff
Page 66
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
coefficient_V1
Viscosity Coefficient x used in
calculating the Viscosity.
coefficient_V2
coefficient_V3
coefficient_V4
coefficient_V5
Lo Temp Limit Viscosity TuMin
Hi Temp Limit Viscosity_TuMax
Write Viscosity 1,2,3
Write Viscosity 4,5
Write Viscosity Polynom Limits
Lo Temp Limit Viscosity TuMin

Hi Temp Limit
Viscosity_TuMax
Density Polynom Coeff
coefficient_d1
Density Coefficient x used in
calculating the Density.
coefficient_d2
coefficient_d3
coefficient_d4
coefficient_d5
Lo Temp Limit Density_TpMin
Hi Temp Limit Density_TpMax
Write Density 1,2,3
Write Density 4,5
Write Density Polynom Limits
Revision 2.0
Applicable when Equation Model is
Dynamic.
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Lower Temperature point for
calculating the Viscosity
Upper Temperature point for
calculating the Viscosity
Write Viscosity Polynomial
Coefficients 1,2, and 3
Write Viscosity Polynomial
Coefficients 4 and 5
Write Temperature low limit and High
Limits for Viscosity coefficients
calculation
Lo Temp Limit Density_TpMin

Hi Temp Limit
Density_TpMax
Applicable when Equation Model is
Dynamic, Fluid Type is Liquid
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Lower Temperature point for
calculating the Density
Upper Temperature point for
calculating the Density
Write Density Polynomial Coefficients
1,2, and 3
Write Density Polynomial Coefficients
4 and
Write Temperature low limit and High
Limits for Density coefficients
calculation
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 67
Standard Flow Setup – Flow Configurations
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow Configurations
VCone Method / WEDGE Flow
When Algorithm / Primary Element is VCone,
Coeff
this parameter value shows whether
VCone Y Method or Simplified Liquid is used.
When Algorithm / Primary Element is
WEDGE, this parameter shows if the user
entered Fixed Flow Coefficient is used, or
default Coefficient is used
Double click on the parameter to see the
current setting
Fluid Type
Config Fluid and VCone Type
Legacy Control / Compensation
Mode
Current Fluid type: Gas, Liquid, SuperHeated
Steam, Saturated Spteam-SP or Saturated
Steam-PT
Allows configuring Fluid Type and VCone
parameters
Shows if the Algorithm is SMV800 type or
SMV3000 type.
When Legacy Cotnrol is ON, Algorithm is
SMV 3000 type. When OFF, it is SMV800
type.
Compensation mode Dynamic or Standard.
When Compensation mode is ON, Equation
Model is Standard. When OFF, it is Dynamic
Double click on the parameter to see the
current setting
Page 68
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Flow Output Type
Config Flow Output Type
No Flow Output
○ Ideal Gas Actual
Volume Flow
○ Ideal Gas Mass
Flow
○ Steam Mass Flow
○ Liquid Mass Flow
○ Ideal Gas Volume
Flow @ Std
Condition
○ Liquid Actual
Volume Flow
○ Liquid Volume
Flow @ Std
Condition
Flow Output Type
○ Algorithm Type
○ Equation Model
Shows the current Flow Output type.
When it is No Flow Output type, Flow Rate
output will be 0. Flow Calculation details
status will be active until the device is power
cycled.
Configures:
Flow Output Type (see the Flow Output Type
parameter for available selections)
Algorithm Type: SMV800 or SMV3000.
SMV800 - Allows selecting newer Flow
Algorithm Standards with predefined list
of Primary Elements.
SMV3000 - Allows selecting legacy SMV3000
algorithms (ASME 1989 standard) and
predefined list of Primary Elements.
Equation Model: Dynamic or Standard
Flow Calc Std / Reynolds
Exponent
Dynamic option allowed on SMV800
Algorithm or SMV3000 Algorithm.
If you need to calculate Standard Flow, Select
SMV3000 Algorithm Option
Shows the Flow Calculation Standard and
Discharge Exponent setting.
When the Reynolds Exponent is ON, the
value is 0.75. When ON, the value is 0.5.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 69
Flow Calc Type
Config Flow Calc Std
Primary Element Type
Page 70
ASME-MFC-3M
● ISO5167
● GOST
● AGA3
● VCONE/WAFER CONE
● ASME-MFC-14M
● WEDGE
● AVERAGE PITOT
TUBE
● INTEGRAL ORIFICE
● CONDITIONAL
ORIFICE
● CONDITIONAL
ORIFICE
● ASME 1989
Flow Calculation Std type
● Reynolds Exponent
When Algorithm Option = SMV800, all
the Flow Calc Types except for ASME
1989 applicable.
Algorithm Option = SMV800:

ASME-MFC-3 O-FTaps

ASME-MFC-3 O-CTaps

ASME-MFC-3 OD&D/2Taps

IS05167 O-FTaps

IS05167 O-CTaps

IS05167 O-D&D/2Taps

Gost 8.586 O-FTaps

Gost 8.586 O-CTaps

Gost 8.586 O-3RadiusTaps,

AGA3 O-FTaps

AGA3 O-CTaps

ASME-MFC-3 ASME
LR Nozzles

ASME-MFC-3 VNozzles

ASME-MFC-3 ISA1932
Nozzles

IS05167 LRNozzles

IS05167 V-Nozzles

IS05167 ISA1932
Nozzles

Gost 8.586 LRNozzles

Gost 8.586 V-Nozzles

Gost 8.586 ISA 1932
Nozzles

ASME-MFC-3 V-AsCast CSec

ASME-MFC-3 VMachined CSec

ASME-MFC-3 V-RW
CSec

IS05167 V-As-Cast
CSec

IS05167 V-M CSec

IS05167 V-RW SheetIron CSec

Gost 8.586 V-CU Cone
Available Primary Element options
are dependent upon the selected
Algorithm Option; SMV800 or
SMV3000
When Algorithm Option = SMV3000,
ASME 1989 is applicable.
Configures Flow Calculation Standard
and Reynolds Exponent or Discharge
Exponent
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Part
Gost 8.586 V-MUCone
Part

Gost 8.586 V-WU
ConePart made of
Sheet Steel

APT

Std Vcone

Wafer Cone

Wedge

Integral Orifice

Small Bore O-FTaps

Small Bore O-CTaps

Cond O-405

Cond O-1595 FTaps

Cond O-1595 CTaps

Cond O-1595
D&D/2Taps
Algorithm Option = SMV3000:

Orifice Flange Taps D
>/= 2.3 inches

Orifice Flange Taps 2
</= D </= 2.3

Orifice Corner Taps

Orifice D and D/2 Taps

Orifice 2.5 and 8D Taps

Venturi Machined Inlet

Venturi Rough Cast
Inlet

Venturi Rough Welded
Sheet-Iron Inlet

Leopold Venturi

Gerand Venturi

Universal Venturi Tube

Low-Loss Venturi Tube

Nozzle Long radius

Nozzle Venturi

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 2 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 2.5 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 3 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 4 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 5 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 6 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 8 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 10 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 12 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch
for 14 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 12 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch

Primary Element Type
(continued)
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 71



























Bore Material
When Flow Calc Standard is
other than GOST
●
●
Page 72
for 14 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 16 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 18 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 20 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 22 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 24 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 26 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 28 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 30 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 32 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 34 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 36 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch
for gt 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 16 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 18 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 20 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 22 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 24 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 26 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 28 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 30 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 32 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 34 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 36 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch
for gt 42 inch Pipe
Other Pitot Tube
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
Available Bore Material is dependent
upon the Flow Calculation Standard
and Algorithm Options. Note that only
SMV800 Algorithm Options Supports
GOST material/Standard
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
●
●
●
●
●
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
When Flow Calc Standard is
GOST
● 35Π
● 45Π
● 20XMΠ
● 12X18H9TΠ
● 15K,20K
● 22K
● 16ГC
● 09Г2C
● 10
● 15
● 20
● 30,35
● 40,45
● 10Г2
● 38XA
● 40X
● 15XM
● 30XM,30XMA
● 12X1MФ
● 25X1MФ
● 25X2MФ
● 15X5M
● 18X2H4MA
● 38XH3MФA
● 08X13
● 12X13
● 30X13
● 10X14Г14H14T
● 08X18H10
● 12X18H9T
● 12X18H10T
● 12X18H12T
● 08X18H10T
● 08X22H6T
● 37X12H8Г8MФБ
● 31X19H9MBБT
● 06XH28MдT
● 20Π
● 25Π
Pipe Material
When Flow Calc Standard is
other than GOST
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Revision 2.0
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
Available Bore Material is dependent
upon the Flow Calculation Standard
and Algorithm Options. Note that only
SMV800 Algorithm Options Supports
GOST material/Standard
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 73
When Flow Calc Standard is
GOST
● 35Π
● 45Π
● 20XMΠ
● 12X18H9TΠ
● 15K,20K
● 22K
● 16ГC
● 09Г2C
● 10
● 15
● 20
● 30,35
● 40,45
● 10Г2
● 38XA
● 40X
● 15XM
● 30XM,30XMA
● 12X1MФ
● 25X1MФ
● 25X2MФ
● 15X5M
● 18X2H4MA
● 38XH3MФA
● 08X13
● 12X13
● 30X13
● 10X14Г14H14T
● 08X18H10
● 12X18H9T
● 12X18H10T
● 12X18H12T
● 08X18H10T
● 08X22H6T
● 37X12H8Г8MФБ
● 31X19H9MBБT
● 06XH28MдT
● 20Π
● 25Π
Page 74
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PV Simulation and Failsafe
Switch
AP Failsafe
Temp Failsafe
Reverse Flow
Simulate DP
Simulate SP
● Simulate Temp
● Simulate Flow
Configures Temperature and Static
Pressure failsafe ON/Off conditions,
Reverse Flow ON/OFF condition and
Simulation ON / OFF conditions for
Device Variables PV, SV, TV, QV
When ON, the indicators will show
Red.
When Simulate DP, Simulate SP,
Simulate Temp, Simulate Flow are set
to ON, corresponding user fields for
entering Simulation values will be
available under “Simulation Values”
Menu. See Simulation Values Table.
Manual Input Switch
Revision 2.0
Density
Viscosity
Cd
Y
Fa
AP Compensation
TEMP Compensation
Configures Manual Input On/OFF for
Density, Viscosity, Fa, Y, Cd, and
Compensation settings for Static
Pressure and Temperature.
Note that only when Algorithm Option
= SMV3000 and Equation Model =
Standard, AP and TEMP
Compensations can be set to ON or
OFF. This setting determines the
usage of alternate values for AP
and/or TEMP for Standard Gas Flow
calculations when Failsafe setting is
OFF.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 75
Standard Flow Setup – Element
Specific Properties
Key: Plain = Read only Bold =
Configurable Bold underline =
Method Bold italic = Table or
graph
Element Specific Properties
VCone
MaxFlowRate_SizingVCone_QMa
x_PipeScheduleFactor_Fs
SizingVCone_QMax
DifferentialPressure_SizingVCon
e_DPMax
Max Differential
Pressure_DPMax
Write VCone Values
Max Flow Rate
SizingVCone_QMax
Max Differential Pressure Sizing
VCone_DPMax
WEDGE
Pipe Diameter_D
Pipe
Roughness_RaGost_BetaFactor_
WEDGE
InitRadius_rGost_SegmentHeight
_Wedge
Write WEDGE Values
Segment Height_H
Pipe Diameter
Beta Factor
Segment Height
Conditional Orifice
MaxFlowRate_SizingVCone_QMa
Page 76
Beta Factor_WEDGE
Pipe Schedule Factor Fs
This Menu will display parameters for
algorithms: WEDGE,
VCone/WaferCone, Conditional
Orifice, Gost Standard.
Selected Algorithm/Primary Element
is VCone
For VCone Algorithm type, this
parameter represents QMax in ft3/sec
for Volume Flow type and lb/sec for
Mass Flow type
For VCone Algorithm type, this
parameter represents DPMax in
inH2O39F
Configures VCone sizing parameters
Selected Algorithm/Primary Element
is WEDGE
Pipe Diameter in inches
For WEDGE Algorithm type, this
parameter represents Beta Factor
For WEDGE Algorithm type, this
parameter represents Segment
Height
Configures WEDGE Pipe Diameter,
Beta factor and Segment Height
For Conditional Orifice Algorithm type,
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
x_PipeScheduleFactor_Fs
Pipe Rougness_Ra
this parameter represents Pipe
Schedule Factor Fs. Applicable only
for Conditional Orifice-405 type
Configures Conditional Orifice Pipe
Scheduling Factor Fs
Selected Algorithm Standard is GOST
Pipe Roughness for GOST Standard
Pipe Roughness Ra
Initial Radius r
Intercontrol Interval H
Inter Control Interval in Years
Configured Pipe Roughness Ra ,
Initial Radius r and Intercontrol
Interval H for GOST Standard
Write Cond Orifice405 Values
Pipe Properties (Gost Std)
Pipe
Roughness_RaGost_BetaFactor_
WEDGE
InterConstrol Interval_Ty
Write Gost Values
Standard Flow Setup – Manual
Input
Key: Plain = Read only Bold =
Configurable Bold underline =
Method Bold italic = Table or
graph
Manual Input
Manual Input Dens
Manual Input Viscos
Manual Input Cd
Manual Input Density Value
Manual Input Viscosity Value
Manual Input Discharge
CoefficientValue (Cd)
Manual Input Expansion Factor value
(Y)
Manual Input Temperature
ExpansionFactor Value (Fa)
Manual Input Exp Factor Y
Manual Input Temp Exp Fact Fa
Write Density, Viscosity, Cd
values
Write Expansion Factors Y and
Fa
Standard Flow Setup –
Simulation Values
Key: Plain = Read only Bold =
Configurable Bold underline =
Method Bold italic = Table or
graph
Simulation Values
Write DP Sim Value
Revision 2.0
Manual input density value
Manual input viscosity value
Manual input Coefficient of
Discharge (Cd) value
Gas expansion factor (Y)
Material Thermal Expansion
factor (Fa)
Simulate DP value when Simulation
setting is ON
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 77
Write SP Sim Value
Simulate SP value when Simulation
setting is ON
Write PT Sim Value
Simulate Process Temp value when
Simulation setting is ON
Write Flow Sim Value
Simulate Flow value when Simulation
setting is ON
Page 78
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 19 lists descriptions of all parameters for a HART Transmitter with the Online tab menu path.
The same parameters may be accessed via the Shortcuts menu under the My Device tab.
Table 19 - HART Transmitter Parameters
Basic Setup
Table 20
Standard Flow Setup (DD Host only)
Table 21
Applicable to DD hosts only
Advanced Flow setup (DTM only)
Refer to section Using DTMs
Applicable to DTM Host only.
SMV800 Main Menu
Device Variable Mapping
Table 22
Differential Pressure Configuration
Table 23
Static Pressure Configuration
Table 24
Process Temperature Configuration
Table 25
Flow Configuration
Table 26
Meter body Temperature Configuration
Table 27
Process Variables
Table 28Table 28
Calibration
Table 29
Device Status
Table 30
Diagnostics
Table 31Table 31
Services
Table 32
Detailed Setup
Table 33
Meter body Details
Table 34
Display Setup
Table 35
Upgrade options
Table 36
Review
Table 37
Table 20 – Basic Setup
Basic Setup parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Manufacturer
Honeywell
Model
Displays Model or Device Type of SMV800 Transmitter
Dev ID
Displays the HART unique ID of the SMV800 Transmitter
Universal Rev
HART Protocol Universal Revision (HART 7)
Software Rev
HART software revision
Fld dev rev
Displays Field Device Revision of the SMV800
Transmitter
Maint Mode
Displays the Maintenance mode set by Experion PKS.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 79
Maint Mode (continued)
Write Protect
Config Chng Count
Tag
Long Tag
Date
Descriptor
Loop Current Mode
Tx Install Date
TM Install Date
Final asmbly num
Message
Clear Message
Model Number
Page 80
When a HART device requires maintenance, the
engineer or the operator changes the PV Source value of
the corresponding AI channel to MAN.
As soon as the PV Source value is changed for the
channels connected to the SMV800 transmitters,
Experion communicates the channel mode status to the
corresponding SMV800 transmitters. Upon receiving this
status, if the value is MAN, the transmitter displays an M
and Available for Maintenance on the local display of the
transmitter. The status display on the transmitter ensures
that the field technician can locate and perform the
maintenance work on the correct transmitter without
impacting the integrated devices in the process loop. The
transmitter continues to display the Available for
Maintenance status on its local display until the PV
Source status of the corresponding AI channel is
changed to AUTO / SUB or the transmitter is power
cycled. For more information, refer to the Experion
Knowledge Builder
Indicates the current state of the device write protect option
as enabled (yes) or disabled (no)
Configuration Change Counter – this counter keeps track
of the number of times any configuration parameter has
been changed
Enter Tag ID name up to 8 characters
Enter Tag ID name up to 32 characters
Gregorian calendar date that is stored in the Field
Device. This date can be used by the user in any way.
Enter any desired or useful descriptor of the transmitter.
Enable: enables loop current mode (analog output will
operate as a 4 to 20 mA signal consistent with the
transmitter output).
Disable: disables loop current mode (analog output will
be fixed to value set by user)
(One time editable) Transmitter installation date in
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Note : If install date is not
(One time editable) Temperature Module installation date
in MM/DD/YYYY format.
Note : If install date is not
Used for identifying electronic components. This number
can be used by the user in any way.
Enter a message up to 32 alphanumeric characters) that
will be sent to the Display. The message will be shown
on the Display interspersed with the configured screens.
Select to clear message from transmitter’s local display.
Displays Model number of the SMV800 Pressure
Transmitter
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 21 - Standard Flow Setup
Standard Flow Setup Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow default Settings
Allows configuring flow using
default values
Flow Setup Options
































Revision 2.0
Algorithm Type
Equation Model
Fluid Type
Flow Output Type
Flow Calculation Standard
Primary Element Sub Type (Orifice,
Venturi, Nozzle)
Primary Element Type (relevant list
for the selected sub type)
VCone Y Method (VCone only)
VCone Simplified Liquid Switch
(VCone only)
Reverse Flow Calculation
Reynolds Exponent
Fluid Selection (used by DTM tool
for auto calculation of Viscosity,
Density Coefficients)
Polynomial Order (used by DTM tool
for auto calculation of Viscosity,
Density Coefficients)
Bore Material Type
Bore Diameter
Bore Diameter Measuring
Temperature
Bore Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Pipe Material
Pipe Diameter
Pipe Diameter Measuring
Temperature
Pipe Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Density Manual Input On/Off
Viscosity Manual Input On/Off
Cd Manual Input On/Off
Y Manual Input On/Off
Fa Manual Input On/Off
Static Pressure Failsafe On/Off
Temp Failsafe On/Off
DP Simulation On/Off
SP Simulation On/Off
PT Simulation On/Off
Flow Simulation On/Off
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Allows Full Flow
Configuration. Note that
based on the selection at
each step in the Method,
relevant settings are shown in
subsequent steps.
Page 81
Standard Flow Setup – Flow Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow Parameters
Pipe Diameter
Pipe Diameter in inches
Bore Dia_d/APT Probe
Bore Diameter in inches. In case of
Width_d
Average Pitot Tube, this parameter is
Pitot Tube Probe Width
Isentr coeff_k
Isentropic Exponent
Reynolds Coefficient1
Reynolds Coefficient R1 (or r1)
Reynolds Coefficient2
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model =
Dynamic
Reynolds Coefficient R2 (or r2)
Low limit for Reynolds Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model =
Dynamic
High Limit for Reynolds number
High limit for Reynolds Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model =
Dynamic
High Limit for Reynolds number
Bore Diam Meas Temp
Bore Ther Exp Coeff
Pipe Dia Meas Temp
Pipe Ther Exp Coeff
Loc Atmos Pressure
Write Pipe Values
Write Bore Values
Write Reynolds Coeff Values
Write Reynolds Limits
Page 82
 Pipe Diameter
 Pipe Diameter Measure
Temperature
 Pipe Material
 Pipe Thermal Expansion
Coefficient
 Bore Diameter
 Bore Diameter Measure
Temperature
 Bore Material
 Bore Thermal Expansion
Coefficient
 Reynolds Coefficient r1
 Reynolds Coefficient r2
 Low Limit Reynolds Number
 High Limit Reynolds Number
Applicable when Algorithm Options =
SMV3000 and Equation Model =
Dynamic
Bore Diameter measuring Temperature
in degF
Bore Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Pipe Diameter measuring Temperature in
degF
Pipe Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Local Atmospheric Pressure in psi
Configure Pipe parameters
Applicable when
Equation model is Dynamic.
Configure Bore parameters
Applicable when
Equation model is Dynamic.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Write Isentropic, Atmosphere
Values
KUser
 Isentropic Exponent
 Local Atmospheric Pressure
Units Conversion Factor
Applicable when Algorithm Option is
SMV3000 and Equation model is
Standard.
When Equation Model is Dynamic, the
value will be set to 1.0
Configure Units Conversion Factor
Applicable when Algorithm Option is
SMV3000 and Equation model is
Standard
Write KUser
Standard Flow Setup – Process Data
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Process Data
Nominal (Default) Values
Nominal Temp
Nominal Temperature
Nominal Abs Pres
Nominal or Default Absolute Pressure
Write Nominal Values
Design Values


Nominal temperature
Nominal absolute pressure
Configure Nominal Values
Design Temperature
Design Temperature
Design Pressure
Design Pressure
Design Density
Write Design Values
Write Design Density



Design Temperature
Design Pressure
Design Density


No Flow Output
Ideal Gas Actual Volume
Flow
Ideal Gas Mass Flow
Steam Mass Flow
Liquid Mass Flow
Ideal Gas Volume Flow @
Std Condition
Liquid Actual Volume Flow
Liquid Volume Flow @ Std
Condition
Configure Design Values
Configure Design Values
Normal (Max) Values
Flow Output Type






Units Mode
K_user/FlowCoeff/Fc
Revision 2.0
Default KUser
This is an internal parameter.
This parameter represents values based
on Algorithm Option and Flow Calculation
Standard.
SMV3000 Algorithm : This parameter
represents KUser value / Unit Conversion
factor.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 83
Equation model = Standard, this is user
editable.
When Equation model = Dynamic, this
value is defaulted to 1.
SMV800 Algorithm: For WEDGE, and
Averaging Pitot Tube and Integral Orifice,
this parameter represents Flow
Coefficient.
For Conditional Orifice, this parameter
represents Calibration Factor Fc.
This is an internal parameter in the DD
hosts. This parameter is configurable in
the DTM tool and is used for Kuser
calculation when
Algorithm is: SMV3000
Equation Model is: Standard
This is an internal parameter in the DD
hosts. This parameter is configurable in
the DTM tool and is used for Kuser
calculation when
Algorithm is: SMV3000 Equation Model is:
Standard
Max Flow Rate
Max Differential Pressure
Fluid Parameters Config
Fluid List
This is an internal parameter in the DD
hosts. User has to manually enter the
Viscosity and Density Coefficients
regardless of the selected fluid.
When using DTM Tool, Viscosity and
Density Coefficients will be automatically
calculated for the selected fluid.
This is an internal parameter in the DD
hosts. When using the DTM Tool,
Viscosity and Density Coefficients will be
automatically calculated using the
Polynomial of this order.
User can enter any one custom fluid not in
the Fluid List. In DD Hosts this will provide
the same choice of Viscosity and Density
Coefficient entry options as that of
Standard fluid under Fluid List.
Polynomial order
Custom Fluid
Configure Fluid
Page 84
Fluid
Polynomial order
When using DTM Tool, Viscosity and
Density Coefficients will be automatically
calculated for the selected Standard fluid
under Fluid List. But when Custom Fluid is
selected user has to manually enter the
Viscosity and Density Coefficients.
Fluid: Allows selection of a fluid from list of
108 fluids or a Custom Fluid.
Polynomial Order: Allows selection of 0 to
4th order Polynomial.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Viscos Polynom Coeff
coefficient_V1
Viscosity Coefficient x used in calculating
the Viscosity.
coefficient_V2
coefficient_V3
coefficient_V4
coefficient_V5
Lo Temp Limit Viscosity TuMin
Hi Temp Limit
Viscosity_TuMax
Write Viscosity 1,2,3
Write Viscosity 4,5
Write Viscosity Polynom
Limits
Lo Temp Limit Viscosity
TuMin
Hi Temp Limit
Viscosity_TuMax


Density Polynom Coeff
coefficient_d1
Density Coefficient x used in calculating
the Density.
coefficient_d2
coefficient_d3
coefficient_d4
coefficient_d5
Lo Temp Limit Density_TpMin
Hi Temp Limit Density_TpMax
Write Density 1,2,3
Write Density 4,5
Write Density Polynom
Limits


Revision 2.0
Applicable when Equation Model is
Dynamic.
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Lower Temperature point for calculating
the Viscosity
Upper Temperature point for calculating
the Viscosity
Write Viscosity Polynomial Coefficients
1,2, and 3
Write Viscosity Polynomial Coefficients 4
and 5
Write Temperature low limit and High
Limits for Viscosity coefficients calculation
Lo Temp Limit
Density_TpMin
Hi Temp Limit
Density_TpMax
Applicable when Equation Model is
Dynamic, Fluid Type is Liquid
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Same as above
Lower Temperature point for calculating
the Density
Upper Temperature point for calculating
the Density
Write Density Polynomial Coefficients 1,2,
and 3
Write Density Polynomial Coefficients 4
and
Write Temperature low limit and High
Limits for Density coefficients calculation
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 85
Standard Flow Setup – Flow Configurations
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow Configurations
VCone Method / WEDGE
Flow Coeff
When Algorithm / Primary Element is VCone,
this parameter value shows whether
VCone Y Method or Simplified Liquid is used.
When Algorithm / Primary Element is WEDGE,
this parameter shows if the user entered Fixed
Flow Coefficient is used, or default Coefficient is
used
Double click on the parameter to see the current
setting
Fluid Type
Config Fluid and VCone
Type
Legacy Control /
Compensation Mode
Current Fluid type: Gas, Liquid, SuperHeated
Steam, Saturated Spteam-SP or Saturated
Steam-PT
Allows configuring Fluid Type and VCone
parameters
Shows if the Algorithm is SMV800 type or
SMV3000 type.
When Legacy Cotnrol is ON, Algorithm is SMV
3000 type. When OFF, it is SMV800 type.
Compensation mode Dynamic or Standard.
When Compensation mode is ON, Equation
Model is Standard. When OFF, it is Dynamic
Double click on the parameter to see the current
setting
Page 86
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Flow Output Type
Config Flow Output Type
○ No Flow Output
○ Ideal Gas Actual
Volume Flow
○ Ideal Gas Mass Flow
○ Steam Mass Flow
○ Liquid Mass Flow
○ Ideal Gas Volume Flow
@ Std Condition
○ Liquid Actual Volume
Flow
○ Liquid Volume Flow @
Std Condition
Shows the current Flow Output type.
○ Flow Output Type
○ Algorithm Type
○ Equation Model
Configures:
Flow Output Type (see the Flow Output Type
parameter for available selections)
When it is No Flow Output type, Flow Rate
output will be 0. Flow Calculation details status
will be active until the device is power cycled.
Algorithm Type: SMV800 or SMV3000.
SMV800 - Allows selecting newer Flow
Algorithm Standards with predefined list of
Primary Elements.
SMV3000 - Allows selecting legacy SMV3000
algorithms (ASME 1989 standard) and
predefined list of Primary Elements.
Equation Model: Dynamic or Standard
Flow Calc Std / Reynolds
Exponent
Dynamic option allowed on SMV800 Algorithm
or SMV3000 Algorithm.
If you need to calculate Standard Flow, Select
SMV3000 Algorithm Option
Shows the Flow Calculation Standard and
Discharge Exponent setting.
When the Reynolds Exponent is ON, the value
is 0.75. When ON, the value is 0.5.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 87
Flow Calc Type
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Config Flow Calc Std
●
●
●
Primary Element Type
Page 88
ASME-MFC-3M
ISO5167
GOST
AGA3
VCONE/WAFER
CONE
ASME-MFC-14M
WEDGE
AVERAGE PITOT
TUBE
INTEGRAL
ORIFICE
CONDITIONAL
ORIFICE
CONDITIONAL
ORIFICE
ASME 1989
Flow Calculation Std
type
Reynolds Exponent
When Algorithm Option = SMV800, all the Flow
Calc Types except for ASME 1989 applicable.
When Algorithm Option = SMV3000, ASME
1989 is applicable.
Configures Flow Calculation Standard and
Reynolds Exponent or Discharge Exponent
Algorithm Option = SMV800:

ASME-MFC-3 O-FTaps

ASME-MFC-3 O-CTaps

ASME-MFC-3 O-D&D/2Taps

IS05167 O-FTaps

IS05167 O-CTaps

IS05167 O-D&D/2Taps

Gost 8.586 O-FTaps

Gost 8.586 O-CTaps

Gost 8.586 O-3-RadiusTaps,

AGA3 O-FTaps

AGA3 O-CTaps

ASME-MFC-3 ASME LR Nozzles

ASME-MFC-3 V-Nozzles

ASME-MFC-3 ISA1932 Nozzles

IS05167 LRNozzles

IS05167 V-Nozzles

IS05167 ISA1932 Nozzles

Gost 8.586 LRNozzles

Gost 8.586 V-Nozzles

Gost 8.586 ISA 1932 Nozzles

ASME-MFC-3 V-As-Cast CSec

ASME-MFC-3 V-Machined CSec

ASME-MFC-3 V-RW CSec

IS05167 V-As-Cast CSec

IS05167 V-M CSec

IS05167 V-RW Sheet-Iron CSec

Gost 8.586 V-CU Cone Part

Gost 8.586 V-MUCone Part

Gost 8.586 V-WU ConePart made of Sheet
Steel

APT

Std Vcone

Wafer Cone

Wedge

Integral Orifice

Small Bore O-FTaps

Small Bore O-CTaps
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Available Primary
Element options are
dependent upon the
selected Algorithm
Option; SMV800 or
SMV3000
Revision 2.0
Primary Element Type
(continued)
Revision 2.0

Cond O-405

Cond O-1595 FTaps

Cond O-1595 CTaps

Cond O-1595 D&D/2Taps
Algorithm Option = SMV3000:

Orifice Flange Taps D >/= 2.3 inches

Orifice Flange Taps 2 </= D </= 2.3

Orifice Corner Taps

Orifice D and D/2 Taps

Orifice 2.5 and 8D Taps

Venturi Machined Inlet

Venturi Rough Cast Inlet

Venturi Rough Welded Sheet-Iron Inlet

Leopold Venturi

Gerand Venturi

Universal Venturi Tube

Low-Loss Venturi Tube

Nozzle Long radius

Nozzle Venturi

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 2 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 2.5 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 3 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 4 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 5 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 6 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 8 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 10 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 12 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 14 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 12 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 14 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 16 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 18 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 20 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 22 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 24 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 26 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 28 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 30 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 32 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 34 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 36 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 42 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for gt 42 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 16 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 18 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 20 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 22 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 24 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 26 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 28 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 30 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 32 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 34 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 36 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 42 inch Pipe

Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for gt 42 inch Pipe

Other Pitot Tube
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 89
Bore Material
When Flow Calc Standard is other than GOST
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
Available Bore Material is
dependent upon the Flow
Calculation Standard and
Algorithm Options. Note
that only SMV800
Algorithm Options
Supports GOST
material/Standard
When Flow Calc Standard is GOST
● 35Π
● 45Π
● 20XMΠ
● 12X18H9TΠ
● 15K,20K
● 22K
● 16ГC
● 09Г2C
● 10
● 15
● 20
● 30,35
● 40,45
● 10Г2
● 38XA
● 40X
● 15XM
● 30XM,30XMA
● 12X1MФ
● 25X1MФ
● 25X2MФ
● 15X5M
● 18X2H4MA
● 38XH3MФA
● 08X13
● 12X13
● 30X13
● 10X14Г14H14T
● 08X18H10
● 12X18H9T
● 12X18H10T
● 12X18H12T
● 08X18H10T
● 08X22H6T
● 37X12H8Г8MФБ
● 31X19H9MBБT
● 06XH28MдT
● 20Π
● 25Π
Page 90
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Pipe Material
When Flow Calc Standard is other than GOST
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
Available Bore Material is
dependent upon the Flow
Calculation Standard and
Algorithm Options. Note
that only SMV800 Algorithm
Options Supports GOST
material/Standard
When Flow Calc Standard is GOST
● 35Π
● 45Π
● 20XMΠ
● 12X18H9TΠ
● 15K,20K
● 22K
● 16ГC
● 09Г2C
● 10
● 15
● 20
● 30,35
● 40,45
● 10Г2
● 38XA
● 40X
● 15XM
● 30XM,30XMA
● 12X1MФ
● 25X1MФ
● 25X2MФ
● 15X5M
● 18X2H4MA
● 38XH3MФA
● 08X13
● 12X13
● 30X13
● 10X14Г14H14T
● 08X18H10
● 12X18H9T
● 12X18H10T
● 12X18H12T
● 08X18H10T
● 08X22H6T
● 37X12H8Г8MФБ
● 31X19H9MBБT
● 06XH28MдT
● 20Π
● 25Π
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 91
PV Simulation and Failsafe
Switch
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
AP Failsafe
Temp Failsafe
Reverse Flow
Simulate DP
Simulate SP
Simulate Temp
Simulate Flow
Configures Temperature and Static Pressure
failsafe ON/Off conditions, Reverse Flow
ON/OFF condition and Simulation ON / OFF
conditions for Device Variables PV, SV, TV, QV
When ON, the indicators will show Red.
When Simulate DP, Simulate SP, Simulate
Temp, Simulate Flow are set to ON,
corresponding user fields for entering Simulation
values will be available under “Simulation
Values” Menu. See Simulation Values Table.
Manual Input Switch
Page 92
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Density
Viscosity
Cd
Y
Fa
AP Compensation
TEMP
Compensation
Configures Manual Input On/OFF for Density,
Viscosity, Fa, Y, Cd, and Compensation settings
for Static Pressure and Temperature.
Note that only when Algorithm Option =
SMV3000 and Equation Model = Standard, AP
and TEMP Compensations can be set to ON or
OFF. This setting determines the usage of
alternate values for AP and/or TEMP for
Standard Gas Flow calculations when Failsafe
setting is OFF.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Standard Flow Setup – Element Specific Properties
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Element Specific Properties
This Menu will display parameters
for algorithms: WEDGE,
VCone/WaferCone, Conditional
Orifice, Gost Standard.
VCone
Selected Algorithm/Primary Element
is VCone
MaxFlowRate_SizingVCone_Q SizingVCone_QMax
For VCone Algorithm type, this
Max_PipeScheduleFactor_Fs
parameter represents QMax in
ft3/sec for Volume Flow type and
lb/sec for Mass Flow type
DifferentialPressure_SizingVC
Max Differential Pressure_DPMax
For VCone Algorithm type, this
one_DPMax
parameter represents DPMax in
inH2O39F
Write VCone Values
Configures VCone sizing parameters

Max Flow Rate
SizingVCone_QMax

Max Differential Pressure
Sizing VCone_DPMax
WEDGE
Selected Algorithm/Primary Element
is WEDGE
Pipe Diameter_D
Pipe Diameter in inches
Pipe
Beta Factor_WEDGE
For WEDGE Algorithm type, this
Roughness_RaGost_BetaFact
parameter represents Beta Factor
or_WEDGE
InitRadius_rGost_SegmentHei
Segment Height_H
For WEDGE Algorithm type, this
ght_Wedge
parameter represents Segment
Height
Write WEDGE Values
Configures WEDGE Pipe Diameter,

Pipe Diameter
Beta factor and Segment Height

Beta Factor

Segment Height
Conditional Orifice
MaxFlowRate_SizingVCone_Q Pipe Schedule Factor Fs
For Conditional Orifice Algorithm
Max_PipeScheduleFactor_Fs
type, this parameter represents Pipe
Schedule Factor Fs. Applicable only
for Conditional Orifice-405 type
Write Cond Orifice405 Values
Configures Conditional Orifice Pipe
Scheduling Factor Fs
Pipe Properties (Gost Std)
Selected Algorithm Standard is
GOST
Pipe
Pipe Roughness for GOST Standard

Pipe Rougness_Ra
Roughness_RaGost_BetaFact
or_WEDGE
InterConstrol Interval_Ty
Inter Control Interval in Years
Write Gost Values
Configured Pipe Roughness Ra ,

Pipe Roughness Ra
Initial Radius r and Intercontrol

Initial Radius r
Interval H for GOST Standard

Intercontrol Interval H
Standard Flow Setup – Manual Input
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Manual Input
Manual Input Dens
Manual Input Density Value
Manual Input Viscos
Manual Input Viscosity Value
Manual Input Cd
Manual Input Discharge
CoefficientValue (Cd)
Manual Input Exp Factor Y
Manual Input Expansion Factor
value (Y)
Manual Input Temp Exp Fact Fa
Manual Input Temperature
ExpansionFactor Value (Fa)
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 93
Write Density, Viscosity, Cd
values



Write Expansion Factors Y
and Fa


Manual input density value
Manual input viscosity value
Manual input Coefficient of
Discharge (Cd) value
Gas expansion factor (Y)
Material Thermal Expansion
factor (Fa)
Standard Flow Setup – Simulation Values
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Simulation Values
Write DP Sim Value
Simulate DP value when Simulation setting is ON
Write SP Sim Value
Simulate SP value when Simulation setting is ON
Write PT Sim Value
Simulate Process Temp value when Simulation setting is
ON
Write Flow Sim Value
Simulate Flow value when Simulation setting is ON
Page 94
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 22 – Device Variable Mapping
Device Variable Mapping parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Primary Variable
● Differential Pressure
Configure the Primary Variable /
● Static Pressure
Analog Output to be any of the
● Process Temperature
● Flow
listed Device Variables
Secondary Variable
Tertiary Variable
Quaternary Variable
Differential Pressure Unit
Static Pressure Unit
Revision 2.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Differential Pressure
Static Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Meter body Temperature
Differential Pressure
Static Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Meter body Temperature
Differential Pressure
Static Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Meter body Temperature
inH2O (68 OF)
inHg (0OC)
ftH2O (68OF)
mmH2O (68OF)
mmHg (0OC)
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
Torr
Atm
inH2O@60OF
MPa
inH2O@4OC (39.2 OF
mmH2O@4OC (39.2OF)
Configure the Secondary Variable
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
inH2O (68OF)
inHg (0oC)
ftH2O (68OF)
mmH2O (68OF)
mmHg (0OC)
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
Torr
Atm
inH2O@60oF
MPa
inH2O@4oC (39.2 OF
mmH2O@4oC (39.2OF)
Self-Explanatory
to be any of the listed Device
Variables
Configure the Tertiary Variable to
be any of the listed Device
Variables
Configure the Quaternary Variable
to be any of the listed Device
Variables
Self-Explanatory
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 95
Temperature Unit
Flow Unit
● degC
● degF
● degR
● Kelvin
When Flow Output Type is Mass
Flow:
● g/sec
● g/min
● g/h
● kg/sec
● kg/min
● kg/h
● t/min [Metric tons]
● t/h [Metric tons]
● lb/sec
● lb/min
● lb/h
Self-Explanatory
Self-Explanatory
When Flow Output Type is Volume
Flow:
● m3/h
● m3/min
● m3/sec
● m3/day
● gal/min
● gal/h
● gal/day
● l/min
● l/h
● ft3/min
● ft3/sec
● ft3/h
● bbl/day
Table 23 – Differential Pressure Configuration
Differential Pressure parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Diff. Pressure Config
DP Value
The current value of the Differential
Pressure input
DP Unit
The user selected engineering unit
for the Differential Pressure input
DP LRV
The Lower Range Value for the
Differential Pressure input (which
represents 0% output) in user
selected engineering units. This
value may be configured to any
value within the range DP LTL to
DP UTL.
DP URV
The Upper Range Value for the
Differential Pressure input (which
represents 100% output) in user
selected engineering units. This
value may be configured to any
value within the range DP LTL to
DP UTL.
Page 96
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
DP Damp
DP URL
DP LRL
DP UTL
DP LTL
Write DP Range Values


DP LRV
DP URV
Damping value for the Differential
Pressure output. Entries may be any
value from 0.00 to 32.00 seconds.
The Upper Range Limit for the
Differential Pressure input
The Lower Range Limit for the
Differential Pressure input
The Upper Transducer Limit for the
Differential Pressure input
The Lower Transducer Limit for the
Differential Pressure input
Write a new Lower Range Value and
Upper Range Value for the Differential
Pressure
Table 24 – Static Pressure Configuration
Static Pressure Configuration parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Static Pressure Config
SP Value
The current value of the Static Pressure
input
SP Unit
The user selected engineering unit for
the Static Pressure input
SP LRV
The Lower Range Value for the Static
Pressure input (which represents 0%
output) in user selected engineering
units. This value may be configured to
any value within the range SP LTL to SP
UTL.
SP URV
The Upper Range Value for the Static
Pressure input (which represents 100%
output) in user selected engineering
units. This value may be configured to
any value within the range SP LTL to SP
UTL.
SP Damp
Damping value for the Static Pressure
output. Entries may be any value from
0.00 to 32.00 seconds.
SP URL
The Upper Range Limit for the Static
Pressure input
SP LRL
The Lower Range Limit for the Static
Pressure input
SP UTL
The Upper Transducer Limit for the Static
Pressure input
SP LTL
The Lower Transducer Limit for the Static
Pressure input
Write SP Range Values
Write a new Lower Range Value and

SP LRV
Upper Range Value for the Static

SP URV
Pressure
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 97
Table 25 – Process Temperature Configuration
Process Temperature Configuration parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Process Temp.Config
Sensor Type
The type of sensor (RTD or TC) selected for
measuring the Process Temperature.
Sensor Id
The specific type of RTD or TC selected for
measuring the Process Temperature
Change Sensor Type/Id
Enter a new selection for the temperature

Enter Sensor Type
sensor

Enter Sensor ID
CJ Compensation Type*
Select fixed or internal cold junction
compensation for the Process Temperature
measurement.
CJ Selection*
The selected value for Cold Junction
compensation type.
Fixed CJ Compensation
When fixed CJ compensation is selected, this
Value*
value represents the fixed cold junction
temperature to be used for the Process
Temperature measurement. (This parameter is
applicable when temp sensor is configured only
as a thermocouple). Fixed CJ Value range is -50
to +90'C.
Sensor Scratch Pad
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters for customer
use
Break Detect
Allows user to enable or disable sensor break
detection capability for the Process Temperature
input
Latching Alarm
Allows user to enable or disable critical status
latching when a break is detected in the
temperature sensor
Acknowledge Latch
When break detection is set to enabled, the
Acknowledge Latch permits the user to clear the
Input Open critical status after repairing a break
in the sensor without resetting the device.
PT Value
The current value of the Process Temperature
input
PT Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the
Process Temperature input
PT LRV
The Lower Range Value for the Process
Temperature input (which represents 0%
output) in user selected engineering units. This
value may be configured to any value within the
range PT LTL to PT UTL.
PT URV
The Upper Range Value for the Process
Temperature input (which represents 100%
output) in user selected engineering units. This
value may be configured to any value within the
range PT LTL to PT UTL.
PT Damp
Damping value for the Process Temperature
output. The upper limit for temp damping is 102.
Entries may be any value from 0.00 to 32.00
seconds.
PT URL
The Upper Range Limit for the Process
Temperature input
PT LRL
The Lower Range Limit for the Process
Temperature input
PT UTL
The Upper Transducer Limit for the Process
Temperature input
PT LTL
The Lower Transducer Limit for the Process
Temperature input
Page 98
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Write PT Range Values
o
o
PT Config Params
Write RTD Type**
RTD Type**
Temperature Sensor Install
Date
Lower Calib Point
Upper Calib Point
Sensor Bias
* for T/C sensor configurations only
** for RTD sensor configurations only
PT LRV
PT URV
Write a new Lower Range Value and
Upper Range Value for the Process
Temperature input
Select 2-wire, 3-wire or 4-wire RTD
sensor type to be used for measuring the
Process Temperature
The currently selected 2-wire, 3-wire or
4-wire RTD type
The customer-entered Temperature
Sensor Install Date. Editable
The Lower Calibration Point value to be
used for calibrating the Process
Temperature Lower Calibration range.
The Upper Calibration Point value to be
used for calibrating the Process
Temperature Upper Calibration range.
The RTD sensor bias in ohms if required
for Process Temperature measurement.
Table 26 – Flow Configuration
Flow Configuration parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Flow Config
Flow Value
The current value of the calculated Flow
Flow Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the Flow
value
Flow LRV
The Lower Range Value for the Flow input
(which represents 0% output) in user selected
engineering units. This value may be
configured to any value within the range Flow
LTL to Flow UTL.
Flow URV
The Upper Range Value for the Flow input
(which represents 100% output) in user selected
engineering units. This value may be
configured to any value within the range Flow
LTL to Flow UTL.
Flow Damp
Damping value for the Flow output. Entries may
be any value from 0.00 to 32.00 seconds. Thu
upper limit for Flow damping is 100.
Flow URL
The Upper Range Limit for the Flow input
(editable)
Flow LRL
The Lower Range Limit for the Flow input
Write Flow Range values
Write a new Lower Range Value and Upper

Flow LRV
Range Value for the Flow input

Flow URV
Flow Cutoff Lo
The lower value for Low Flow cutoff. When the
flow drops below this value, the flow output will
be forced to 0%.
Flow Cutoff Hi
The upper value for Low Flow cutoff. The flow
will not exit the low flow cutoff state (0% flow)
until the flow exceeds this value.
Write Flow Cutoff Values
Allows the user to configure new values for the

Flow Cutoff Lo
low and high cutoff limits for the Low Flow

Flow Cutoff Hi
Cutoff option
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 99
Table 27 – Meter body Temperature Configuration
Meter Body Temperature Configuration parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Meter body Temp. Config
MBT Value
The current value of the measured Meter body
Temperature
MBT Unit
The engineering unit for the Meter body
Temperature value
MBT LRV
The Lower Range Value for the Meter body
Temperature input
MBT URV
The Upper Range Value for the Meter body
Temperature input
MBT Damp
Damping value for the Meter body Temperature
measurement. Entries may be any value from
0.00 to 32.00 seconds.
MBT URL
The Upper Range Limit for the Meter body
Temperature value
MBT LRL
The Lower Range Limit for the Meter body
Temperature value
Page 100
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 28 – Process Variables
Process Variable parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
PV is
The process variable currently selected as the
Primary Variable. Options are:

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature
 Flow
PV Value
The current value of the Primary Variable
PV Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the Primary
Variable
SV is
The process variable currently selected as the
Secondary Variable. Options are:

Meter Body Temperature

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature
 Flow
SV Value
The current value of the Secondary Variable
SV Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the
Secondary Variable
TV is
The process variable currently selected as the
Tertiary Variable. Options are:

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature
 Flow
TV Value
The current value of the Tertiary Variable
TV Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the Tertiary
Variable
QV is
The process variable currently selected as the
Quaternary Variable. Options are:

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature
 Flow
QV Value
The current value of the Quaternary Variable
QV Unit
The user selected engineering unit for the
Quaternary Variable
MBT Value
The current measured value of the Meter body
Temperature
ET
The current measured value of the
Communications board Electronics Temperature
PV Loop current
The current value of the analog loop current as a
reflection of the Primary Variable input with
respect to configured range
PV % range
The current percentage value of the device output
as a reflection of the Primary Variable input with
respect to configured range
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 101
Table 29 - Calibration
Calibration parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Calibration
Factory Calib Sel
DP Factory Calib Sel
Factory Cal Available DP
Lists the available custom Differential
Pressure calibrations available for the
device (three custom calibrations A,B,C
are available when the device is
purchased)
SP Factory Calib Sel
Factory Cal Available SP
Lists the available custom Differential
Pressure calibrations available for the
device (three custom calibrations A,B,C
are available when the device is
purchased)
Filter Performance Selection
Filter Performance
Configuration option for Standard or Fast

Standard SOR
Speed of Response

Fast SOR
Apply Values
Performs a Set LRV and/or Set URV to

Set 4 ma value
configure the LRV/URV to applied inputs.

Set 20 ma value
Prompts the user to supply a Primary
Variable input equivalent to the desired
Lower Range Value (LRV) associated with
the 4ma output. A Set LRV is performed to
the applied input.
The user is then prompted to supply a
Primary Variable input equivalent to the
desired Upper Range Value (URV)
associated with the 20ma output. A Set
URV is performed to the applied input.
Note: When Flow is mapped to PV, this
Method is not applicable
Perform an analog output calibration at
4.00 and 20.00 mA (0% and 100%
output).
Prompts the user to connect a reference
meter to calibrate the DAC 4-20 ma
output. The output is first set to 4ma and
the user enters the actual current
measured to calibrate the DAC zero. The
output is then set to 20 ma and the user
follows the same procedure to calibrate
the DAC span.
D/A Trim
PT Calibration
PT URV Correct
PT LRV Correct
PT Reset Corrects
PT Correct URV Records
Page 102
PT Prev URV Correct
URV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured Hi Cal level
LRV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured LoCal level
Clear all user calibration adjustments
Displays the Date and Time of previous
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PT Last URV Correct
PT Curr URV Correct
PT Prev LRV Correct
PT Correct LRV Records
PT Last LRV Correct
PT Curr LRV Correct
PT Reset Corrects Records
PT Prev Corrects Rec
PT Last Corrects Rec
PT Curr Corrects Rec
DP Calibration
DP URV Correct
DP LRV Correct
DP Reset Corrects
DP Zero Trim
DP Zero Trim Records
DP Prev Zero Correct
DP Last Zero Correct
DP Curr Zero Correct
DP Correct URV Records
DP Prev URV Correct
DP Last URV Correct
DP Curr URV Correct
DP Correct LRV Records
DP Prev LRV Correct
DP Last LRV Correct
DP Curr LRV Correct
Revision 2.0
Displays the Date and Time of last URV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of previous
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last LRV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last Reset
corrects done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
URV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured URV level
LRV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured LRV level
Clear all user calibration adjustments
perform an input calibration correction by
applying process input at zero
Displays the Date and Time of previous
zero trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last zero
trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of current
zero trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of previous
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last URV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of previous
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last LRV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 103
DP Reset Corrects Records
DP Prev Corrects Rec
DP Last Corrects Rec
DP Curr Corrects Rec
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last Reset
corrects done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
SP Calibration
SP URV Correct
SP LRV Correct
SP Reset Corrects
SP Zero Trim
SP Prev Zero Correct
SP Zero Trim Records
SP Last Zero Correct
SP Curr Zero Correct
SP Correct URV Records
SP Prev URV Correct
SP Last URV Correct
SP Curr URV Correct
SP Correct LRV Records
SP Prev LRV Correct
SP Last LRV Correct
SP Curr LRV Correct
SP Reset Corrects Records
SP Prev Corrects Rec
SP Last Corrects Rec
SP Curr Corrects Rec
Req Calib Sel DP
Page 104
URV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured URV level
LRV Correct: perform an input calibration
correction by applying process input at the
configured LRV level
Clear all user calibration adjustments
perform an input calibration correction by
applying process input at zero
Displays the Date and Time of previous
zero trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last zero
trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of current
zero trim field calibration displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of previous
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last URV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
URV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of previous
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last LRV
correct done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
LRV correct done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Displays the Date and Time of last Reset
corrects done displayed in mm/dd/yyyy
format
Displays the Date and Time of current
Reset corrects done displayed in
mm/dd/yyyy format
Allows selection of one of the available
custom factory calibrations for Differential
Pressure
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Active Calibration DP
CAL A URV
CAL A LRV
CAL B URV
CAL B LRV
CAL C URV
CAL C LRV
Req Calib Sel SP
Active Calibration SP
CAL A URV
CAL A LRV
CAL B URV
CAL B LRV
CAL C URV
CAL C LRV
Revision 2.0
The currently selected custom factory
calibration (A,B, C) for Differential
Pressure
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom St Differential Pressure calibration
for range A
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Differential Pressure calibration for
range A
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom Differential Pressure calibration for
range B (listed only if available)
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Differential Pressure calibration for
range B (listed only if available)
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom Differential Pressure calibration for
range C (listed only if available)
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Differential Pressure calibration for
range C (listed only if available)
Allows selection of one of the available
custom factory calibrations for Static
Pressure
The currently selected custom factory
calibration (A,B, C) for Static Pressure
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range A
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range A
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range B (listed only if available)
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range B (listed only if available)
The Upper Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range C (listed only if available)
The Lower Range Value used for the
custom Static Pressure calibration for
range C (listed only if available)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 105
Table 30 – Device Status
Device Status Indication
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
DAC Failure
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
Config Data Corrupt
Diagnostic messages
Critical
SIL Diagn Failure
Sensor Critical Failure
Comm Vcc Failure
Help-Electronic Module DAC Failure View on-line HELP text on these
Diagnostic messages
Help-Config Data Corrupt
Help Critical Diagnostics
Help-SIL Diagn Failure
Help-Sensor Critical Failure
Help-Comm VCC Fault
Local Display Failure
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
Comm Section Non Critical Failure
Diagnostic messages
Sensing Section Non Critical Failure
Non Critical 1
CJ Out Of Limit
Fixed Current Mode
PV Out of Range
No Factory Calibration
No DAC Compensation
Help-Local Display
View on-line HELP text on these
Diagnostic messages
Help-Comm Section Non Critical
Failure
Help-Sensing Section Non Critical
Failure
Help Non Critical Diagnostics
Help-CJ Out Of Limit
Help-Fixed Current Mode
Help-PV Out OF Range
Help_No Factory Calibration
Help- No DAC Compensation
Non Critical 2
LRV Set Err. Zero Config button
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
LRV Set Err. Span Config button
Diagnostic messages
AO Out of Range
Loop Current Noise
Sensor Unreliable Comm
Tamper Alarm
No DAC Calibration
Low Supply Voltage
Help-LRV Set Err. Zero Config
View on-line HELP text on these
button
Diagnostic messages
Help-LRV Set Err. Span Config
button
Help-AO Out of Range
Help Non Critical Diagnostics
Help-Loop Current Noise
Help-Sensor Unreliable Comm
Help-Tamper Alarm
Help-No DAC Calibration
Help-Low Supply Voltage
Non Critical 3
Sensor Over Temperature
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
Sensor Input Open
Diagnostic messages
Sensor in Low Power Mode
Sensor Input Out of Range
DP/SP/PT/Flow Simulation Mode
Flow Calculation Details
Page 106
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Help Non Critical Diagnostics
Ext Dev Status
Help-Ext dev Status
Additional Status
DAC Failure
Communication
Display
Sensors
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Revision 2.0
Help-Sensor Over Temperature
Help-Sensor Input Open
Help-Sensor in Low Power Mode
Help-Sensor Input Out of Range
Help-Simulation Mode Status
Help-Flow Calculation Details
Maintenance Required
Device Variable Alert
Critical Power Failure
Help-Maintenance Required
Help-Device Variable Alert
Temp Above 100C
Temp Above 140C
DAC Under Current Status
DAC Over Current Status
DAC Packet Error
DAC SPI Failure
RAM Failure
ROM Failure
Program Flow Failure
Brownout Status
DAC Write Failure
Low Transmitter Supply
Display Communication Failure
Display NVM Corrupt
Pressure Sensing Failure
Pressure NVM Corrupt
Pressure Sensor Comm Timeout
Temperature Sensing Failure
Temperature Calibration Corrupt
Temperature Sensor Comm Timeout
CJ CT Delta Warning
Temp ADC0 Range Fault
Temp ADC1 Range Fault
Temp ADC Reference Fault
Temp Unreliable Comm
Temp No Factory Calibration
Temperature sensor over
View on-line HELP text on these
Diagnostic messages
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
Diagnostic messages
View on-line HELP text on these
Diagnostic messages
Refer to Section 10: Troubleshooting
and Maintenance for details on
Additional Status messages
temperature
Low Sensor Supply
Sensor NVM Corrupt
Sensor Characterization CRC Fault
Sensor/CJ Bad
Suspect Input
RAM Failure In Sensor
ROM Failure In Sensor
Program Flow Failure In Sensor
Excess Cal Correction
Characterization Calc Error
Sensor Bad
CJ Bad
Sensor1 Input Fault
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 107
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Comm NVM
Display NVM
Flow
Page 108
Low Sensor Supply
Meter body Failure
Sensor Characterization Corrupt
DP/MBT/SP/PT/Flow Bad
Suspect Input
Sensor RAM Corrupt
Sensor Code Corrupt
Sensor Flow Failure
Excess Zero Correction
Excess Span Correction
Char Calc Error
Sensor Overload
Sensor RAM DB Fault
Pressure No Factory Calibration
Pressure Unreliable Comm
Pressure Over Temperature
Bad DP
Bad MBT
Bad SP
Bad PT
BAD FLOW
Common DB Corrupt
Vital Config DB Corrupt
General Config DB Corrupt
Config Change DB Corrupt
Adv Diag DB Corrupt
Display View Config DB Corrupt
Display Common Config DB Corrupt
Display View 1 Corrupt
Display View 2 Corrupt
Display View 3 Corrupt
Display View 4 Corrupt
Display View 5 Corrupt
Display View 6 Corrupt
Display View 7 Corrupt
Display View 8 Corrupt
Divided By Zero
Square Root Of Negative
Reverse Flow
PV4 Bad SP/PT Compensation
DP Simulation Mode
SP Simulation Mode
PT Simulation Mode
Flow Simulation Mode
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 31 – Diagnostics
Diagnostics – Config History
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Displays the parameters updated during the last five
Config History
configuration changes
Diagnostics – Error Log
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Error Log Flag
Allows selection to Enable or Disable the Error Log
Show Error Log
Displays the last 10 error messages recorded and the
Error Log
elapsed time since the error occurred
Reset Error Log
Allows resetting of the Error Log
Diagnostics – Advanced Diagnostics – Write Install Dates
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
One-time writable installation date for the Meter Body.
Write Install Dates MB Install Date
One-time writable installation date for the Temperature
TM Install Date
Module.
Diagnostics – Advanced Diagnostics – Modules – Comm Module
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Comm Module
Comm Stress Life
Comm Service Life
Current O/P Voltage
Min. O/P Voltage
Operating Voltage
TimeStamp @Low
Voltage
Reset Voltage &
TimeStamp
Power Up
Diagnostics
Revision 2.0
Power Cycles
Power Cycle TimeStamp
Percent of Communication Module service life spent in
stressful conditions. Indicates the % of service life where
one or more of processor core temperature, or electronics
temperature are within 10% of respective range limits.
Percent of the expected Service Life that the
Communications Module has been in service. Value is
based on electronics temperature. Service life accumulates
faster at higher temperatures with an exponential
relationship.
Operating voltage currently measured at device terminals.
No accuracy is specified for this measurement!
This value is intended to be used for informational
purposes only and should not be used for control.
Minimum operating voltage experienced by device at
terminals since last reset of operating voltage parameters.
Displays time since the operating voltage was last measured
at the recorded minimum value (in hours and minutes).
Resets all of the Operating Voltage diagnostics parameters Causes “Min Op Voltage” to be set to 32 volts and “Time
Since Last Event” to be reset to zero. Within a short period
of time “Min Op Voltage” will assume operating voltage
value.
The total number of times the device has been reset by
power cycle
Displays time since last power cycle (in minutes)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 109
Max ET Limit
Max ET Value
ET Up Cnt
Min ET Limit
Min ET Value
ET Dn Cnt
ET Tracking
ET Upper Limit
ET Up Time
ET Lower Limit
ET Dn Time
Communications board Electronics Temperature (ET) highest
operating limit from specification.
Communications board Electronics Temperature (ET) highest
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Communications board
Electronics Temperature (ET) has exceeded the upper stress
limit (ET Upper Limit)
Communications board Electronics Temperature (ET) lowest
operating limit from specification.
Communications board Electronics Temperature (ET) lowest
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Communications board
Electronics Temperature (ET) has been below the lower
stress limit (ET Lower Limit)
High Electronics Temperature stress limit – if the
Communications board ET exceeds this limit, the ET Up Cnt
and ET Up Time will be updated. Value is equal to “Max ET
Limit” minus 10% of limits range.
Displays time since the Communications board Electronics
Temperature was last measured as exceeding the ET Upper
Limit (in minutes)
Low Electronics Temperature stress limit – if the
Communications board ET exceeds this limit, the ET Dn Cnt
and ET Dn Time will be updated. Value is equal to “Min ET
Limit” plus 10% of limits range.
Displays time since the Communications board Electronics
Temperature was last measured below the ET Lower Limit (in
minutes)
Diagnostics – Advanced Diagnostics – Modules – Temperature Module
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Temperature
Module
The Temperature Module Installation Date
TM Install Date
Sensor Install
One-time writable installation date for the thermocouple or
Date
RTD sensor for measuring the temperature input
Percent of the expected Service Life that the Temperature
Module has been in service. Value is based on electronics
Sensor Service Life
temperature. Service life accumulates faster at higher
temperatures with an exponential relationship.
Percent of Temperature Sensor service life spent in stressful
conditions. Indicates the % of service life where one or more
Sensor Stress Life
of Process Temperature, processor core temperature, or
electronics temperature are within 10% of respective range
limits.
Module Time in
Total time that the Temperature Module has been in service.
Service
Time based on the Temperature Module Install Date.
Sensor Time in
Total time that the Temperature Sensor has been in service
Service
Based on the Sensor Install Date
Page 110
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Max ET Value
ET Up Cnt
Min ET Value
ET Tracking
ET Dn Cnt
ET Dn Time
ET Up Time
CT-CJ Delta Max
Value
CT-CJ Delta Value
CT-CJ Delta Up Count
Delta Tracking
CT-CJ Delta Min Value
CT-CJ Delta Down
Count
CT-CJ Down
TimeStamp
CT-CJ Up TimeStamp
PT Low Alarm Limit
PT Low Alarm Counter
PT High Alarm Limit
PT High Alarm Counter
PT Tracking
PT Low Value &
TimeStamp
PT High Value &
TimeStamp
Change PT Alarm
Limits
Reset PT Tracking
Values
Max AVDD Value
Min AVDD Value
AVDD
AVDD Up TimeStamp
AVDD Down
TimeStamp
Revision 2.0
Temperature Module Electronics Temperature (ET) highest
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Temperature Module
Electronics Temperature (ET) has exceeded the upper stress limit
Temperature Module Electronics Temperature (ET) lowest
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Temperature Module
Electronics Temperature (ET) has been below the lower stress limit
Displays time elapsed since the Temperature Module Electronics
Temperature was last measured below the ET lower stress limit (in
minutes)
Displays time elapsed since the Temperature Module Electronics
Temperature last measured as exceeding the ET upper stress limit
(in minutes)
Maximum measured difference between the Temperature
Processor Core temperature (CT) and the Cold Junction
temperature (CJ)
Currently measured difference between the Temperature
Processor Core Temperature (CT) and the Cold Junction
temperature (CJ)
The total number of minutes that the Temperature Processor Core
temperature (CT) has been higher than the Cold Junction
temperature (CJ)
The total number of minutes that the Temperature Processor Core
temperature (CT) has been less than the Cold Junction
temperature (CJ)
The total number of minutes that the Temperature Processor Core
temperature (CT) has been lower than the Cold Junction
temperature (CJ)
Displays time elapsed since the Temperature Processor Core
temperature (CT) was last measured as less than the Cold
Junction temperature
Displays time elapsed since the Temperature Processor Core
temperature (CT) was last measured as higher than the Cold
Junction temperature
The configured Low Alarm Limit for the Process Temperature input
The total number of minutes that the Process Temperature input
has been below the PT Low Alarm Limit
The configured High Alarm Limit for the Process Temperature input
The total number of minutes that the Process Temperature input
has exceeded the PT High Alarm Limit
Displays the lowest recorded value of Process Temperature and
the time elapsed since the Process Temperature last dropped
below the PT High Alarm Limit
Displays the highest recorded value of Process Temperature and
the time elapsed since the Process Temperature last exceeded the
PT High Alarm Limit
Allows configuration of a new PT Low Alarm Limit and PT High
Alarm Limit
Resets all of the Process Temperature Tracking parameters to
default
Displays the highest recorded value of the Temperature Sensor
Supply Voltage (AVDD)
Displays the lowest recorded value of the Temperature Sensor
Supply Voltage (AVDD)
Displays the time elapsed since the Temperature Sensor Supply
Voltage last exceeded the Max AVDD Value
Displays the time elapsed since the Temperature Sensor Supply
Voltage last dropped below the Min AVDD Value
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 111
Diagnostics – Advanced Diagnostics – Modules – Pressure Module
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Pressure Module
The Pressure Module Installation Date
TX Install Date
Percent of Pressure Sensor module service life spent in
stressful conditions. Indicates the % of service life where
MB stress life
one or more of Differential Pressure, Static Pressure,
processor core temperature, or electronics temperature are
within 10% of respective range limits.
Percent of the expected Service Life that the Pressure
Module has been in service. Value is based on electronics
MB service life
temperature. Service life accumulates faster at higher
temperatures with an exponential relationship.
The highest measured value of the Differential Pressure
DP Max
input
The total number of minutes that the Differential Pressure
DP Up Count
input has exceeded the upper stress limit
The lowest measured value of the Differential Pressure input
DP Min
The total number of minutes that the Differential Pressure
DP Down Count
input has been below the lower stress limit
High Differential Pressure stress limit – if the Differential
Pressure input exceeds this limit, the DP Up Count and DP
DP Up Limit
DP Tracking
Up Timestamp will be updated. Value is equal to “Max DP
Limit” minus 10% of limits range.
Displays time elapsed since the Differential Pressure was
DP Up TimeStamp
last measured as exceeding the DP Up Limit
Low Differential Pressure stress limit – if the Differential
Pressure input drops below this limit, the DP Down Count
DP Down Limit
and DP Down Timestamp will be updated. Value is equal to
“Min DP Limit” plus 10% of limits range.
Displays time elapsed since the Differential Pressure was
DP Down TimeStamp
last measured as lower than the DP Down Limit
The highest measured value of the Static Pressure input
SP Max
The total number of minutes that the Static Pressure input
SP Up Count
has exceeded the upper stress limit
High Static Pressure stress limit – if the Static Pressure input
SP Tracking
exceeds this limit, the SP Up Count and SP Up Timestamp
SP Up Limit
will be updated. Value is equal to “Max SP Limit” minus 10%
of limits range.
Displays time elapsed since the Static Pressure was last
SP Up TimeStamp
measured as exceeding the SP Up Limit
Pressure Module Electronics Temperature (ET) highest
Max ET Value
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Pressure Module
ET Up Count
Electronics Temperature (ET) has exceeded the upper stress
limit
Pressure Module Electronics Temperature (ET) lowest
Min ET Value
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Pressure Module
ET Tracking
ET Down Count
Electronics Temperature (ET) has been below the lower
stress limit
Displays time elapsed since the Pressure Module Electronics
ET Down TimeStamp
Temperature was last measured below the ET lower stress
limit
Displays time elapsed since the Pressure Module Electronics
ET Up TimeStamp
Temperature last measured as exceeding the ET upper
stress limit
Page 112
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Meter Body Temperature (MBT) highest measured value
Max MBT Value
MBT Up Count
Min MBT Value
MBT Down Count
MBT Tracking
MBT Up Limit
MBT Up TimeStamp
MBT Down Limit
MBT Down TimeStamp
Max AVDD Value
AVDD
Min AVDD Value
AVDD Down TimeStamp
AVDD Up TimeStamp
The total number of minutes that the Meter Body
Temperature (MBT) has exceeded the upper stress limit
Pressure Module Meter BodyTemperature (MBT) lowest
measured value
The total number of minutes that the Meter Body
Temperature (MBT) has been below the lower stress limit
High Meter Body Temperature stress limit – if the Meter
Body Temperature exceeds this limit, the MBT Up Count and
MBT Up Timestamp will be updated. Value is equal to “Max
MBT Limit” minus 10% of limits range.
Displays time elapsed since the Meter Body Temperature
last measured as exceeding the MBT upper stress limit
Low Meter Body Temperature stress limit – if the Meter Body
Temperature drops below this limit, the MBT Down Count
and MBT Down Timestamp will be updated. Value is equal to
“Min MBT Limit” plus 10% of limits range.
Displays time elapsed since the Meter Body Temperature
was last measured below the MBT lower stress limit
Displays the highest recorded value of the Pressure Sensor
Supply Voltage (AVDD)
Displays the lowest recorded value of the Pressure Sensor
Supply Voltage (AVDD)
Displays the time elapsed since the Pressure Sensor Supply
Voltage last exceeded the Max AVDD Value
Displays the time elapsed since the Pressure Sensor Supply
Voltage last dropped below the Min AVDD Value
Table 32 – Services
Services Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Services
Write Protect
Displays the current configuration of the write protect
option. Write Protect is “Enabled” (Yes) if either the write
protect jumper on the electronics board is in the “ON”
position or the firmware write protect has been enabled.
Write Protect
Allows the configuration of the firmware write-protect
On/Off
option. Write-protect may always be enabled (ON), but a
password in required to disable this option.
Change
Password
Tamper Mode
Displays the current configuration (enabled or disabled) of
the Tamper detection feature (outside attempts to change
device configuration when Write Protect is enabled).
Tamper Attempt
Displays the number of times a tamper attempt
Counter
(configuration write)has occurred in the last Latency period
Tamper Latency
Displays the current setting of the Tamper Latency in
minutes. If no repeated tamper attempt has been made
after this time period, the Tamper Counter will be reset to
zero.
Max Allowable
Displays the current setting for the Tamper Maximum
Attempts
Attempts configuration. This is the maximum number of
tamper attempts to be permitted during one Latency period
before setting the Tamper Alarm status.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 113
Configure
Tamper Alarm
Configure all of the settings controlling the Tamper
Detection option. Selections include:
Select Tamper Mode: enable or disable tampering
detection (outside attempts to change device
configuration when Write Protect is enabled). When
enabled, the “Tamper Counter” will keep track of the
number of times an attempt is made. After the
configured “Max Attempts”, an alarm status is
generated.
Tamper Latency:
Configure the desired latency (in minutes) for the
Tamper detection. If no repeated tamper attempt
has been made after this time period, the Tamper
Counter will be reset to zero.
Maximum Attempts:
Configure the maximum number of tamper attempts
to be permitted during one Latency period before
setting the Tamper Alarm status.
Reset Tamper
Counter
Master Reset
Loop Test
Lock Dev Status
Lock/Unlock
device
Page 114
Reset the Tamper Counter to zero
Performs a device Master Reset
This function enables the user to test the Analog Output
measurement at any value over the full operational range.
Select a current value to apply to the output and verify the
measured current on the loop with a calibrated meter.
Note that this function is only available when “Loop mA”
(Loop Current mode) is Enabled.
Displays the current configuration of the HART Lock
Device option.
Lock Temporary: the lock is temporary and may be
unlocked by device reset.
Lock Permanent: the lock is permanent and will not be
unlocked by device reset. To unlock, the locking master
must send the “unlock” command.
Unlocked: the device is not locked.
Select the Lock state for access by HART configuration
tools.
If “Yes” is selected to lock the device, also select “Yes” or
“No” to choose whether or not the lock is “permanent.” If
the lock is not permanent, it will be cleared on power cycle
or Master Reset of the device.
If “Yes” is selected to unlock the device, the lock state will
be cleared.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 33 – Detailed setup
Detailed Setup – Namur Option Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Namur Option
Namur Selection
Select to enable or disable the Namur
option for the output. (Refer to the PV
Ranges/Limits chart) for effect on output
signal.
Detailed Setup – Signal Condition Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Signal Condition
PV is
PV Damp
PV URV
PV LRV
PV URL
PV LRL
PV % rnge
PV Loop Current
Displays the device variable currently
selected to be mapped as the Primary
Variable (PV). May be one of:

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature

Flow
Damping value for the Primary Variable
output.
The Upper Range Value for the Primary
Variable output range (which represents
100% output) in user selected
engineering units.
The Lower Range Value for the Primary
Variable output range input (which
represents 0% output) in user selected
engineering units.
The Upper Range Limit value for the
Primary Variable in user selected
engineering units.
The Lower Range Limit value for the
Primary Variable in user selected
engineering units.
The percentage value representation of
the device output based on the
configured Process Variable range (LRV
to URV)
Displays the current value of the analog
output current in millamperes
Detailed Setup – Output Condition Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Output Condition
Poll addr
Poll Address: Select HART short address
0 to 63.
Num Req Preams
Displays the number of required request
preambles for the SMV800 HART
communications
PV Loop current
Displays the current value of the analog
output current in millamperes.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 115
AO Alarm Type
Displays the current position of the failsafe
jumper on the electronics board: upscale
(hi) or downscale (low) burnout option.
Select the Loop Current Mode
configuration:
“Enable”: enables loop current mode
(analog output will operate as a 4 to 20
mA signal consistent with the transmitter
output)
“Disable”: disables loop current mode
(analog output will be fixed at 4 mA)
This function enables the user to test the
Analog Output measurement at any value
over the full operational range. Select a
current value to apply to the output and
verify the measured current on the loop
with a calibrated meter.
Note that this function is only available
when “Loop mA” (Loop Current mode) is
Enabled.
Perform an analog output calibration at
4.00 and 20.00 mA (0% and 100% output).
Prompts the user to connect a reference
meter to calibrate the DAC 4-20 ma
output. The output is first set to 4ma and
the user enters the actual current
measured to calibrate the DAC zero. The
output is then set to 20 ma and the user
follows the same procedure to calibrate
the DAC span.
Loop current mode
Loop Test
D/A trim
Table 34 – Meter body details
Meter Body Details Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
MB Type
The Meter Body model type
MB ID
Key Number
Table I Info
Table II Info
Table III Info
Input Type
Temp Sensor Input
Temp Sensor Type
Digital Output
Material Details
Page 116
Process Head Material
The serial number of the Meter Body
The Key Number portion of the device
model number (representing the
Differential and Static Pressure
measurement ranges for this device)
The Table I portion of the device model
number (represents the temperature
sensor input type available for this device)
The Table II portion of the device model
number (indicates availability of Digital
Output for this device)
The Table III portion of the device model
number (indicates various materials of
construction for this device)
Identifies the availability of single or dual
temperature sensor input
Identifies the availability of the type of
sensor input (RTD-only input or Universal)
Identifies the availability of Digital Output
Material of construction for the Meter Body
process heads
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Diaphragm Material
Fill Fluid
Process Connection
Bolt/Nut Material
Vent Head Type
Vent/Drain Location
Vent Material
Gasket Material
Connection Orientation
Agency Approvals
Tx Electronics Selections
Electronic Housing Material
Connection Type
Lightning Protection
Analog Output
Digital Protocol
Customer Interface Indicator
Ext Zero, Span & Config
Buttons
Languages
Configuration Selections
Diagnostics
Write Protect
Failsafe
Hi & Lo Output Limits
General Configuration
Revision 2.0
Material of construction for the Meter Body
diaphragm
Fill fluid used in the Meter Body
Size and type of the Meter Body process
piping connection ports
Material of construction for the nuts and
bolts used in Meter Body
Identifies the installation of single or dual
vent connection ports for the Meter Body
Location details of the vent/drain ports in
the Meter Body
Material of construction for the Meter Body
vent ports
Material of construction for the Meter Body
gaskets
The rotation orientation of the Meter Body
process heads and piping connection
ports
A list of official agency approvals for the
transmitter
Material of construction for the electronics
housing
Size/type of wiring conduit ports on the
housing
Identifies if lightning protection is installed
Identifies the availability of Analog Output
Identifies the device Digital
Communications Protocol (HART, DE, FF)
Identifies the type of Display available
(None or Advanced)
Identifies the selection of external
calibration buttons available
Identifies the selection of languages
available via the Display and
communications hosts
Standard Diagnostics is the only selection
available
Identifies the hardware write protect
configuration ordered with the device (On
or Off)
Identifies the analog failsafe configuration
ordered with the device (High or Low
burnout)
Identifies the configured high and low
analog output range (Standard or Namur)
Identifies the configuration ordered with
the device (standard configuration or
custom)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 117
Accuracy & Calibration
Accuracy
Calibrated Range
Calibration Type
Accessory Selections
Mounting Bracket Type
Mounting Bracket Material
Customer Tag
Unassembled Conduit Plugs
& Adapters
Certifications & Warranty
Factory Identification
Only Standard Accuracy is available
Identifies the factory calibration selection
ordered for this device (Standard factory
calibration or custom range) for the three
process inputs (Differential Pressure,
Static Pressure, Process Temperature)
Identifies the number of custom factory
calibrations ordered for this device (single,
dual, or triple custom calibrations are
available for Differential and Static
Pressure inputs)
Identifies the shape (angle or flat) of the
device mounting bracket ordered with the
device
Identifies the material of construction of
the device mounting bracket ordered with
the device
Identifies the number of identification tags
ordered for this device (none, one or two)
Identifies the size, quantity and material of
any unassembled conduit plugs and
adapters ordered with this device
Lists all special certifications and
warranties ordered with this device
Identifies the location of the factory for
manufacturing this device
Table 35 – Display setup
Display Setup Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Display Connected
Identifies whether or not a Display is connected
to the device
Display Type
Identifies the type of Display connected to the
device (only Advanced Display is available for
SMV devices)
Screen Configuration
Configure Screens
Select the screen to be configured:

Screen 1 to 8
Select the screen format:

None

PV

PV & bargraph

PV & trend
Enter high and low limits for trend or bargraph, if
PV & trend or PV & bargraph were selected for
screen format
Enter trend duration from 1 to 24 hours if PV &
trend was selected for screen format
Enter the PV selected for this screen:

Differential Pressure

Static Pressure

Process Temperature

Flow

Meter Body Temperature
Page 118
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0

Sensor Resistance

Loop Output

Percent Output
Enter the selection for PV scaling
(note: available selections are dependent on PV
selection):

None

Convert Units

Linear (for custom units)

Square Root (DP only)
Enter the high and low scaling values if Linear or
Square Root PV scaling was selected.
Select the new engineering unit if Convert Units
PV Scaling was selected.
Select number of decimal places desired for the
PV selected (1,2, or 3 decimal places)
Common Setup
Language
Rotation Time
Screen Rotation
Contrast Level
Read Screen Info
Select Display Screen
Screen Number
Custom Tag
Disp High Limit
Disp Low Limit
Scaling High
Scaling Low
Screen Format
PV Selection
Display Units
Decimals
PV Scaling
Trend Duration
Custom Units
Revision 2.0
Enter a custom tag for the display screen up to
14 characters if desired. If no custom tag is
entered, a default tag consistent with the PV
selection will be used.
Select the desired language to be used for the
Display
Select the desired time delay for switching
between configured screens (3 to 30 seconds)
Select to enable or disable screen rotation
Select the level of contrast for the Display
(default = 5, or select levels 1(low) to 9 (high))
Select a Display screen from 1 to 8. The
configuration information for the selected screen
will then be updated in the menu.
Screen Number selected in the method above.
All other parameters shown in this menu pertain
to the selected screen.
The custom tag configured for this Screen
Number
The value configured as the Display High Limit
for trending or bargraph
The value configured as the Display Low Limit
for trending or bargraph
The value configured as the Scaling High Limit
for PV Scaling selections of linear or square root
The value configured as the Scaling Low Limit
for PV Scaling selections of linear or square root
The configured selection for the PV Screen
Format
The PV Selection for this screen
The PV units selected for this screen
The selection for number of decimal places for
the PV displayed by this screen
The PV Scaling selection for this screen
The trend duration selected for this screen if PV
& trend was configured for screen format.
The text configured to be displayed for custom
units
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 119
Table 36 – Upgrade Options
Upgrade Options Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Available Option
Displays any purchased Upgrade
Options
Device Id
The Device ID portion of the device
serial number or HART Address (this ID
is needed when ordering upgrade
options)
Enter License key
When an upgrade option is purchased,
a License Key will be provided. Enter
the License Key here to enable the
option
Table 37 – Review
Review Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Manufacturer
Honeywell
Model
See Table 17
MB Type
See Table 31
Dev id
See Table 17
PV is
See Table 25
PV value
See Table 25
PV Unit
See Table 25
PV Damp
See Table 25
PV % rnge
See Table 25
SV is
See Table 25
SV value
See Table 25
SV Unit
See Table 25
TV is
See Table 25
TV value
See Table 25
TV Unit
See Table 25
QV is
See Table 25
QV value
See Table 25
QV Unit
See Table 25
DP LRV
See Table 20
DP URV
See Table 20
SPLRV
See Table 21
SPURV
See Table 21
PT LRV
See Table 22
PT URV
See Table 22
FLOW LRV
See Table 26
FLOW URV
See Table 26
MBT LRV
See Table 27
MBT URV
See Table 27
Filter Performance
See Table 29
MB Stress Life
See Table 27
MB Service Life
See Table 27
Loop current mode
See Table 29
PV Loop current
See Table 28
Sensor Stress Life
See Table 29
Page 120
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
DP URL
DP LRL
DP UTL
DP LTL
SP URL
SP LRL
SP UTL
SP LTL
PT URL
PT LRL
PT UTL
PT LTL
Flow URL
Flow LRL
MBT URL
MBT LRL
DP Value
SP Value
PT Value
Flow Value
MBT Value
CJT Value
DP Damp
SP Damp
PT Damp
Flow Damp
MBT Damp
VCone Method/ WEDGE Coeff
Fluid Type
Legacy Control/Compensation Mode
Flow Output Type
Primary Element Type
Bore Material
Pipe Material
PV Sim Fail Safe sw
Manual I/P SW
KUser/Flow Coeff/Fc
MB ID
Tx Type
Sensor Scratch Pad
Tag
Long Tag
Date
Descriptor
Message
Write Protect
Final asmbly num
Universal rev
Fld dev rev
Software Rev
Display SW Rev
Temp Sensor SW Rev
Revision 2.0
See Table 20
See Table 20
See Table 20
See Table 20
See Table 21
See Table 21
See Table 21
See Table 21
See Table 22
See Table 22
See Table 22
See Table 22
See Table 23
See Table 23
See Table 24
See Table 24
See Table 20
See Table 21
See Table 22
See Table 23
See Table 24
See Table 22
See Table 20
See Table 21
See Table 22
See Table 23
See Table 24
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 18
See Table 31
SMV
See Table 22
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 29
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 17
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 121
Dev SW Rev
MB SW Rev
Poll addr
Cnfg chng count
Num Req Preams
TM Install Date
Sensor Install Date
Tx Install Date
Power Cycles
Comm Stress Life
Comm Service Life
Factory Cal Available DP
Factory Cal Available SP
See Table 17
See Table 17
See Table 30
See Table 30
See Table 30
See Table 28
See Table 28
See Table 28
See Table 28
See Table 28
See Table 28
See Table 26
See Table 26
Table 38 – Tamper Reporting Logic Implementation with Write Protect
Write Protect
Jumper Status
ON
OFF (or missing)
OFF (or missing)
ON
OFF
Tamper Reporting
Status
Write Protect
Software Status
ON or OFF
ON
OFF
Configuration
Change
Allowed?
NO
NO
YES
Tamper Alerted Posted?
YES
NO
Note that Tamper Reporting is independent of Write Protect status.
The sections below give some examples as to how to edit the configuration parameters and execute
Methods.
Page 122
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.11 Procedure to Enter the Transmitter Tag
1. From the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Basic Setup > Device Information > Tag.
2. Click Edit. The Tag screen will be displayed.
3. Key in the tag name (for example: SMV800) which can be a maximum of eight characters.
4. Click OK. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
5. Select the Tag check box.
6. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter, or Click Return to continue making
changes.
6.2.12 Selecting Variable units of measurement
Process Variable (PV), Secondary Variable (SV), Tertiary Variable (TV), Quaternary Variable
units of measurement
See Table 22 – Device Variable Mapping for the allowed mapping of device variables.
Engineering units affect the values of the LRV, URV and the LRL and the URL.
After changing the PV engineering units to the Transmitter, verify changes to the units
parameter, the LRV, and the URV.
6.2.13 Selecting Pressure Units
If Differential Pressure or Static Pressure is mapped to PV, the pressure measurement can be
displayed in one of the pre-programmed engineering units.
1. From My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Device Variable Mapping > PV Units
2. Click Edit. You will be warned that if you change the value of the variable it will change the
loop current, which may upset the control process.
3. Click Yes to continue. The PV Unit screen will be displayed with a list of measurement units,
as follows:
psi
Pa
inH2O@4oC
inH2O
inHg
ftH2O
mmH2O
mmHg
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
kPa
Torr
Atm
MPa
mmH2O@4oC
–
–
4. Select the desired PV Unit, and click OK. A Post Edit action message will be displayed,
indicating if you select this value, the variables that use it as the units code will start in the
previous units until this value is sent to the Transmitter.
5. Click OK to continue or Abort to discard the change.
6. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
7. Select the PV Unit check box.
8. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter or Return to continue making
changes.
Similarly if Differential Pressure or Static Pressure is mapped to SV, TV, QV follow the
same procedure by accessing the relevant variable unit.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 123
6.2.14 Selecting Temperature Units
If Temperature is mapped to PV, the Temperature measurement can be displayed in one of the preprogrammed engineering units.
1. From My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Dev Var Mapping > Temperature Unit
2. Click Edit. You will be warned that if you change the value of the variable it will change the
loop current, which may upset the control process.
3.
Click Yes to continue. The PV Unit screen will be displayed with a list of measurement units,
as follows:
Deg C
Deg F
Deg R
Kelvin
4. Select the desired PV Unit, and click OK. A Post Edit action message will be displayed,
indicating if you select this value, the variables that use it as the units code will start in the
previous units until this value is sent to the Transmitter.
5. Click OK to continue or Abort to discard the change.
6. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
7. Select the PV Unit check box.
8. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter or Return to continue making
changes.
Similarly if Temperature is mapped to SV, TV, QV, follow the same procedure by accessing
the relevant variable unit.
6.2.15 Selecting Flow Units
If Flow is mapped to PV, the Flow measurement can be displayed in one of the pre-programmed
engineering units.
1. From My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Dev Var Mapping > Flow Unit
2. Click Edit. You will be warned that if you change the value of the variable it will change the
loop current, which may upset the control process.
3.
Click Yes to continue. The PV Unit screen will be displayed with a list of measurement units,
as follows:
When Flow Output Type is Mass Flow:
● g/sec
● g/min
● g/h
● kg/sec
● kg/min
● kg/h
● t/min [Metric tons]
● t/h [Metric tons]
Page 124
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
●
●
●
lb/sec
lb/min
lb/h
When Flow Output Type is Volume Flow:
● m3/h
● m3/min
● m3/sec
● m3/day
● gal/min
● gal/h
● gal/day
● l/min
● l/h
● ft3/min
● ft3/sec
● ft3/h
● bbl/day
4. Select the desired PV Unit, and click OK. A Post Edit action message will be displayed,
indicating if you select this value, the variables that use it as the units code will start in the
previous units until this value is sent to the Transmitter.
5. Click OK to continue or Abort to discard the change.
6. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
7. Select the PV Unit check box.
8. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter or Return to continue making
changes.
Similarly if Flow is mapped to SV, TV or QV follow the same procedure by accessing the
relevant variable unit .
6.2.16 Setting PV URV, and LRV Range Values (for Differential Pressure
values)
SMV800 Transmitters are calibrated at the factory with ranges using inH2O at 39.2oF
(4oC). For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value
as the URV.
When setting the range using applied pressure, the URV changes automatically to
compensate for any changes in the LRV. When using the Tookit keyboard, the URV does not
change automatically. To use the applied pressure method and change both the LRV and
URV, change the LRV first.
The LRV and URV values can be entered with the Toolkit keypad or by applying the corresponding
pressure values directly to the Transmitter. Use the following procedure to key in the range values.
The procedure uses an example of 5 to 45 referenced to inH2O.

Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Diff. Pressure Config > Write DP Range Values

To edit the LRV and URV values directly select “Write DP Range values”
see Table 23, and follow these steps:
1. Prompt to enter URV value
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 125
2. Enter URV value and click on OK
3. Prompt to enter LRV value
4. Enter LRV value and click on OK
On clicking the OK button the method is complete and LRV and URV values are updated with new
values
6.2.17 Setting Range Values for Applied Pressure for DP
When setting the range values using applied pressure, the URV changes automatically to
compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span (URV – LRV).
When entering the LRV using the Tookit keypad, the URV does not change automatically.
If you use the applied pressure method, and need to change the LRV and URV, change the
LRV first. You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the Transmitter to set the
LRV and URV values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Calibration > Apply Values
2. Click Execute. You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing
so, press OK to continue.
3. Select 4mA from the list, and then click OK. A message will prompt you to apply a new
4 mA input.
4. Click OK; otherwise, click Abort.
5. When the Current applied process value: is displayed, choose Select as 4mA value, and
click OK.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input pressure for 20 mA output.
7. Click Return to go back to the Calibration menu.
8. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
9. Select the Apply Values check-box.
10. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter, or click Return to continue making
changes.
Page 126
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.18 Setting URV, and LRV Range Values (for Static Pressure Values)
SMV800 Transmitters are calibrated at the factory with ranges for PV, SV, TV, QV
The LRV and URV values can be entered with the Toolkit keypad or by applying the corresponding
Range values directly to the Transmitter. Use the following procedure to key in the range values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
> Device Setup > Static Pressure Config > Write SP Range values Method
2. Enter the URV value in the field next to “Enter SP URV Value” (for changing URV for
Static Pressure Config)
3. Enter the LRV value in the field next to “Enter SP LRV Value” (for changing LRV for
Static Pressure Config)
4. Method will complete with the message “SP URV LRV values written successfully”
6.2.19 Setting Range Values for Applied Static Pressure
When setting the range values using applied static pressure, the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV using the Tookit keypad, the URV does not change
automatically.
If you use the applied pressure method, and need to change the LRV and URV, change the
LRV first. You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the Transmitter to set the
LRV and URV values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
Device Setup > Calibration > Apply Values
2. Click Execute. You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing
so, press OK to continue.
3. Select 4mA from the list, and then click OK. A message will prompt you to apply a new
4 mA input.
4. Click OK; otherwise, click Abort.
5. When the Current applied process value: is displayed, choose Select as 4mA value, and
click OK.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input pressure for 20 mA output.
7. Click Return to go back to the Calibration menu.
8. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
9. Select the Apply Values check-box.
10. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter, or click Return to continue making
changes.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 127
6.2.20 Setting URV, and LRV Range Values (for Temperature Values)
SMV800 Transmitters are calibrated at the factory with ranges for PV, SV, TV, QV
The LRV and URV values can be entered with the Toolkit keypad or by applying the corresponding
Range values directly to the Transmitter. Use the following procedure to key in the range values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
> Device Setup > Process Temp. Config > Write PT Range values Method
2. Enter the URV value in the field next to “Enter Temp URV Value” (for changing URV for
Temperature Config)
3. Enter the LRV value in the field next to “Enter Temp LRV Value” (for changing LRV for
Temperature Config)
4. Method will complete with the message “Temp URV LRV values written successfully”
6.2.21 Setting Range Values for Applied Temperature
When setting the range values using applied Temperature, the URV changes
automatically to compensate for any changes in the LRV and to maintain the present span
(URV – LRV). When entering the LRV using the Tookit keypad, the URV does not change
automatically. Same procedure can be followed for setting range values using Applied
Pressure
If you use the applied temperature method, and need to change the LRV and URV, change
the LRV first. You can also use the local zero and span adjustments on the Transmitter to set
the LRV and URV values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
> Device setup > Calibration > Apply values.
2. Click Execute. You will be warned to remove the loop from automatic control. After doing
so, press OK to continue.
3. Select 4mA from the list, and then click OK. A message will prompt you to apply a new
4 mA input.
4. Click OK; otherwise, click Abort.
5. When the Current applied process value: is displayed, choose Select as 4mA value, and
click OK.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set the URV to the applied input Temperature for 20 mA output.
7. Click Return to go back to the Calibration menu.
8. Click Send. The Send to Device screen will be displayed.
9. Select the Apply Values check-box.
10. Click Send to download the change to the Transmitter, or click Return to continue making
changes.
Page 128
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.22 Entering URV, and LRV Range Values (for Flow Values)
SMV800 Transmitters are calibrated at the factory with ranges for PV, SV, TV, QV
The LRV and URV values can be entered with the Toolkit keypad or by applying the corresponding
Range values directly to the Transmitter. Use the following procedure to key in the range values.
1. Starting at the My Device menu, make the following menu selections:
> Device Setup > Flow Config > Write Flow Range values Method
2. Enter the URV value in the field next to “Enter Flow URV Value” (for changing URV for
Flow Config)
3. Enter the LRV value in the field next to “Enter Flow LRV Value” (for changing LRV for
Flow Config)
4. Method will complete with the message “Flow URV LRV values written successfully”
6.2.23 Saving device history
FDC provides you a feature wherein you can save the device configuration snapshot as history. This
history record may then be transferred to a central asset management database such as FDM.
Using this feature you can save the device configuration snapshot as device history of a connected
device at any given time in a predefined location. The following are the features of save device
history option.


Two formats of history are supported: FDM and DocuMint.
Only one snapshot per device instance is allowed to be saved and you can save the
snapshot of a device any number of times overwriting the existing one.
To save device history, perform the following steps.
On Device Home page, tap Tools.
2. Select Save History and tap Select
The Save History page appears.
1.
3.
4.
Revision 2.0
Enter the History Record Name using the keypad and tap OK. History Name field
accepts alphanumeric characters, underscore, and no other special characters.
Enter the Device Tag using the keypad and tap OK. Device Tag field accepts
alphanumeric characters, underscore, and no other special characters.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 129
Note: The device can be identified with History Record Name and Device Tag in FDM,
once the record is imported in FDM, provided the device is not already present in the FDM
network.
5.
Select the Format. The following are the available formats:
 FDM
 DocuMint
6.
Tap Save to save device history record.
7.
If a history record for this device already exists, the following warning message
appears.
8.
Tap Yes to overwrite the existing name. A overwrite success message appears.
9.
Tap OK to return to Device Home page.
6.2.24 Exporting device history records to FDM
The history snapshot saved in FDC can be imported into FDM for record and audit purposes. This is
enabled by the standard Import/Export wizard in FDM. This way FDM allows synchronizing the
device configuration data through the MCT404 Toolkit handheld.
To export device history from FDC and import it in FDM, perform the following steps.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect your MCT404 Toolkit handheld to your computer as described earlier.
Browse to the folder on your computer, SD Card > FDC > Resources > History.
The FDC history records are named as per the following convention for the primary
name:
DeviceTag_ManufacturerIDDeviceTypeDeviceRevisionDDRevision_DeviceID
Copy the desired Device History Record files (with .fdm extension) from the above
mentioned location to a temporary location on FDM Client computer.
Use FDM Import/Export wizard to import the history records into FDM. After you
import successfully:

The snapshot would get imported into FDM database and appear as a history
record for the corresponding device in FDM.

The Audit Trail entry for such a record identifies it as being imported through the
MCT404 Toolkit handheld.

If the device is not part of any of the FDM configured networks, it would appear
under ‘Disconnected Devices’ in FDM network view.

All operations allowed on Device History Record in FDM will be allowed for the
record imported through the MCT404 Toolkit handheld.
Note: For more details on using FDM Import/Export feature, refer to section Importing and
Exporting Device History in FDM User’s Guide.
Page 130
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.25 Exporting device history records to DocuMint
To export device history from FDC and import it in FDM, perform the following steps.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect your MCT404 Toolkit handheld to your computer as described earlier.
Browse to the folder on your computer, SD Card > FDC > Resources > History.
The FDC history records are named as per the following convention for the primary
name:
DeviceTag_ManufacturerIDDeviceTypeDeviceRevisionDDRevision_DeviceID
Copy the desired Device History Record files (with .xml extension) from the above
mentioned location to a temporary location on the DocuMint system.
For Importing in DocuMint: Select Procedures > Import or the Import option in the
tool bar.
Note: For more details on using DocuMint Import feature, refer to section importing from
XML File in Document Help.
6.2.26 Custom Views
FDC provides you a unique feature wherein you can choose what you want to view in a device and
thus creating your own custom views. This is a very convenient utility when you are interested in
select few variables in a device and saves you the time for navigating through the menus.
You can create two views per device type with maximum of 10 variables selected for each custom
view.
To create/modify the custom views, perform the following.
1.
On Device Home page, tap My Views.
2.
Tap Configure and tap Select.
The Configure My Views dialog box appears.
3. To customize View1 and View2, select the variables by checking the box against desired
variables.
4.
Tap
or
to navigate to previous and next set of variables.
5.
Once done, tap Options to select Save My Views.
Two custom views are ready with selected variables.
Note: Since a custom view can contain only up to 10 variables each, a warning is displayed if
you have selected more than 10 variables.
To rename the views, perform the following.
Tap Options > Rename View1.
A dialog box appears informing you to enter the name.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Revision 2.0
Tap Ok.
Tap Option>Save to persist the change
Tap Return to return to My Views page. You would see two options with the names you
gave to the newly created views.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 131
Note: To view the custom views, tap My View 1 > Select.
The My View 1 page appears.
Edit the parameters that are Read / Write and select Send.
For more details on any of the FDC features, refer the “MC Toolkit User Manual, document # 34-ST25-50 (MCT404).”
Page 132
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6.2.27 Offline Configuration
6.2.27.1
Overview
Offline Configuration refers to configuring a device when the device is not physically present or
communicating with the application. This process enables you to create and save a configuration for a
device, even when the device is not there physically. Later when the device becomes available with
live communication, the same configuration can be downloaded to the device. This feature enables
you to save on device commissioning time and even helps you to replicate the configuration in
multiplicity of devices with lesser efforts. Currently, FDC does not support creating offline
configuration. However, it supports importing of offline configuration from FDM R310 or later
versions. The configurations thus imported can be downloaded to the device from FDC. The
configurations thus imported can be downloaded to the device from FDC.
Please note that FDC is a Universal HART configurator. SMV800 is supported in FDM R440 and
above. But other SmartLine devices may be supported in earlier versions of FDM based on their
launch date.
The following are the tasks that you need to perform for importing offline configuration in FDC
application software and then downloading it to the device.

Create offline configuration template in FDM
Save the configuration in FDM in FDM format.

Import the offline configuration in FDC

Download the offline configuration to the device

Note: For details on creating and using offline configuration, refer to section Offline configuration in
FDM User’s Guide.
6.2.27.2
Importing offline configuration
Using this feature you can import offline configuration template. The offline configuration template
has to be created in FDM and saved in FDM format. Copy the .fdm files into the storage location of
the FDC.
To import an offline configuration, perform the following steps.
On the FDC homepage, tap Offline Configuration > Select.
The Offline Configurations page appears.
1.
Tap Options > Import.
The Select a File dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Navigate to the location where the offline configuration template is stored.
4.
Select the required offline configuration template from the list.
5.
Double-tap and the offline configuration template is imported.
A success message appears.
Note: In case if the offline configuration template is already imported, an overwrite message
appears.
6. Tap OK to return to the Offline Configurations page. The device details appear on the
bottom of the page.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 133
6.2.27.3
Deleting offline configuration
Using this feature you can delete an offline configuration template.
To delete an offline configuration, perform the following steps.
On the FDC homepage, tap Offline Configuration > Select.
The Offline Configurations page appears.
1.
2.
Select the required offline configuration template from the list.
3.
Tap Options > Delete. A warning message appears.
4.
Tap Yes to delete the offline configuration template.
6.2.27.4
Downloading an offline configuration
Using this feature, you can download the offline configuration when the device is online.
To download an offline configuration, perform the following steps.
1.
On the FDC homepage, tap Offline Configuration > Select.
The Offline Configurations page appears.
2.
3.
Select the required offline configuration template from the list.
Tap Options > Download.
The Offline – Select Variables page appears with the all the variables.
Note: By default, all the variables selected in FDM will appear as selected and non-editable
variables appear in grey color.
4. Select the required variable. In case you select a dependent variable, then variables on
which it is dependent on will also be selected and the following warning appears.
5.
6.
Tap OK to return to the offline wizard.
Tap Next.
The Offline – Review and Send page appears with the list of selected variables.
Page 134
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
7.
Tap Send and the process to send the variables to the device starts. Once the
downloading is complete, the following page appears.
Note: If the variables are downloaded successfully, status appears as SUCCESS in green
color; and if failed, status appears as FAILED in red color.
8.
Revision 2.0
Tap Finish to return to FDC Homepage.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 135
7 DE Calibration
7.1 Overview
The SMV800 SmartLine Transmitter does not require periodic calibration to maintain accuracy.
Typically, calibration of a process-connected Transmitter may degrade, rather than augment its
capability. For this reason, it is recommended that a Transmitter be removed from service before
calibration. Moreover, calibration will be accomplished in a controlled, laboratory-type environment,
using certified precision equipment.
7.2 Calibration Recommendations
If the Transmitter is digitally integrated with a Honeywell Total Plant Solution (TPS) system, you can
initiate range calibration and associated reset functions through displays at the Universal Station,
Global User Station (GUS), and Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). However, a
range calibration using the SCT3000 application with the Transmitter removed from service is
recommended. Refer to SCT3000 SmartLine Configuration Tool Guide.
Calibration with the Transmitter removed from service needs to be accomplished in a controlled
environment. Details for performing a calibration reset through the Universal Station are provided in
the PM/APM SmartLine Transmitter Integration Manual, PM12-410, which is part of the TDC 3000X
system book set.
7.3 Test Equipment Required for Calibration
Depending upon the type of calibration you choose, you may need any of the following test
equipment to accurately calibrate the transmitter:




Digital Voltmeter or millimeter with 0.01% accuracy or better
Honeywell Configuration Tools: Use the SCT3000 application to calibrate the SMV800 DE
model.
Calibration-standard input source with a 0.01% accuracy
250 ohm resistor with 0.01% tolerance or better.
Page 136
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
7.4 DE Output Calibration
7.4.1 Output Calibration Preparation
This procedure applies to DE Transmitters operating in analog (current) mode only. First, verify the
integrity of the electrical components in the output current loop. Make the connections shown in
Figure 18, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
Connect the SCT3000 as indicated, and establish communication with the transmitter.
Figure 18 – Output Calibration Test Connections
The purpose of Analog output calibration is to verify the integrity of electrical components in the
output current loop. For Output calibration, establish the test set up shown in Figure 18. Values of
components in the current loop are not critical if they support reliable communication between the
Transmitter and the Toolkit.
For a DE Transmitter operating in analog mode, calibrate the analog output current to the Process
Variable (PV) input range such that 4 mA corresponds to the LRV of 0% and 20 mA corresponds to
the URV of 100%. Figure 19 shows the PV scale and representative process system connections.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 137
Figure 19 – DE Analog Mode Scaling and Test Connections
7.4.2 Output Calibration using SCT3000
1. Start the SCT3000 application such that the DE MAIN MENU is displayed.
2. Select the Output Calibration tab for DP OutCal, AP OutCal, Temp Outcal or Flow OutCal.
3. Trim output current as follows:
a. Select Set Output To 0% or 100%. You will be prompted to confirm that you want
to place the Transmitter in output mode.
Page 138
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
b. Verify that the loop is in manual control. In output mode, output current is fixed at
the 0% or 100% level as selected in the TRIM DAC CURRENT box in the previous
step.
c. Select Yes, and observe the loop current level. A meter reading of 4 mA corresponds
to 1 volt as measured across the precision 250 ohm loop resistor.
d. Use the Toolkit to adjust the loop current to the Zero Percent level (4mA). If the
current is low, tap the Increment button; if the current is high, tap the Decrement
button. Note that the value on the meter changes accordingly. If the error is large,
accelerate the adjustment rate by changing the Step Size to 10 or 100.
e. After establishing the zero current level (4 mA), select Set Output To 100%. A
meter reading of 20 mA corresponds to 5 volts as measured across the precision 250
ohm resistor.
f. Use the Increment or Decrement button, as necessary to adjust the output current to
20 mA. When the current reaches the 20 mA level, select Clear Output; the button
will change to half-intensity.
4. Change the display in output mode as follows:
a. Selecting the Back button before selecting the Clear Output button, you will be
prompted to confirm that you want to clear the output.
b. If you want to stay in output mode while viewing other displays, select Yes;
otherwise, select No and the Clear Output button.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 139
7.5 Calibrating Range Using a Configuration Tool
The range calibration involves two procedures, one to calibrate the input, the other to calibrate the
output. This section provides both procedures.
7.5.3 Conditions for Input Calibration
Calibrate Transmitter input only when necessary, and under conditions that will ensure accuracy:



Take Transmitter out of service, and move it to an area with favorable environmental
conditions, for example, clean, dry, and temperature-controlled
The source for the input Temperature must be precise, and certified for correct operation.
Qualified personnel are required for the input calibration procedure.
To optimize accuracy, the PROM includes storage for calibration constants: Correct LRV, and
Correct URV. These constants provide for optimum accuracy in that they enable fine-tuning of the
input calculations by first correcting at zero input, then by bounding the input calculations at the
selected operating range. Corrections are applied at the Lower Range Value (LRV) and the Upper
Range Value (URV).
Factory calibration can be specified when you order your Transmitter. Also, if precision equipment,
suitable environment, and required skill are available at your site, input calibration can be done
locally.
The procedure needs a precision Temperature source with an accuracy of 0.04% or better to do a
range calibration. Factory calibration of the SMV800 Transmitter is accomplished with inches-ofwater ranges referenced to a temperature of 39.2 °F (4°C).
7.5.4 Input Calibration Procedures Description
The input calibration process consists of the following three parts:


Correcting the input LRV.
Correcting the input URV.
For the input calibration procedure, current loop component tolerances and values are
not critical if they support reliable communication between the Transmitter and the SCT3000,
refer to the SMV800 SmartLine Multivariable Transmitter User’s Manual, 34-SM-25-03.
For the input calibration procedures, connect the test setup illustrated in Figure 20. Either voltage
mode (Voltmeter across the resistor) or current mode (Ammeter in series with the resistor) is
satisfactory.
Page 140
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Figure 20 – Input Calibration Connections
7.6 DE Input Calibration Procedure
Start the SCT3000 application such that the DE MAIN MENU is displayed.
Select the Input Calibration tab for DP InCal, AP InCal, Temp Incal or Flow InCal.
7.6.5 DP Input Cal
Select the Input Calibration tab for DP InCal.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 141
7.6.6 Correct DP Input at the Lower Range Value (LRV)
1. After the LRV and URV have been entered, select the Correct LRV button on the
CALIBRATION display. (See Step 4 in the previous procedure to bring the CALIBRATION
screen to the display.)
2. Select the LRV button. This message appears:
3. Adjust the PV input Temperature to the exact value of the LRV entered in the DE
CONFIGURE display.
4. Select the Correct button; this message appears:
5. Observe the input pressure at the applied value; when it is stable, select the OK button.
Page 142
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
6. When the Transmitter has completed the LRV correction, this message appears:
7. Select Yes to acknowledge.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 143
7.6.7 Correct DP Input at URV
1. Select the URV button. This message appears.
2. Adjust the PV input pressure to the exact value of the URV entered in the DE CONFIGURE
display.
3. Select the Correct button; this message appears:
3. Select the OK button.
Page 144
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
4. When the transmitter has completed the URV correction, this message appears.
5. Select Yes to acknowledge.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 145
7.6.8 AP Input Calibration
Select tab AP InCal
7.6.9 AP Input Cal LRV (Lower Range Value) Correct_
Page 146
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
7.6.10 AP Input Cal URV (Upper Range Value) Correct
Screens will show URV.
7.6.11 Reset Corrects
Resets all Corrects to factory defaults. Select Ok to confirm reset.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 147
7.6.12 Temperature Input Calibration
Select tab Temp InCal
7.6.13 Process Temperature LRV (Lower Range Value) Correct_
Page 148
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
7.6.14 Process Temperature URV (Upper Range Value) Correct
Screens will show URV.
7.6.15 Reset Corrects
Resets all Corrects to factory defaults. Select Ok to confirm reset.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 149
8 HART Calibration
8.1 About This Section
This section provides information about calibrating a Transmitter’s analog output and measurement
range. It also covers the procedure to reset calibration to the default values as a quick alternative to
measurement range calibration.
This section includes the following topics:



How to calibrate a Transmitter’s analog output circuit using the Communicator
How to perform a two-point calibration of a Transmitter
How to perform a correct reset to return a Transmitter calibration to its default values.
8.1.1 About Calibration
The SMV800 SmartLine Transmitter does not require calibration at periodic intervals to maintain
accuracy. If a recalibration is required, we recommend that perform a bench calibration with the
Transmitter removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best
accuracy.
Before you recalibrate a Transmitter’s measurement range, you must calibrate its analog output
signal. See section 8.2 Analog Output Signal Calibration for the procedure.
You can also use the FDC application to reset the calibration data to default values, if they are
corrupted, until the Transmitter can be recalibrated. See Section 0 for details.
All procedures in this manual assume the Transmitter is configured for Loop Current
Mode enabled).
8.1.2 Equipment Required
Depending on the selected calibration, you may need any of the following test equipment items to
accurately calibrate the Transmitter:
 Digital Voltmeter or millimeter with 0.02% accuracy or better
 MCT404 Toolkit
 Calibration standard pressure source with a 0.02% accuracy
 250 ohm resistor with 0.01% tolerance or better.
Revision 2
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 150
8.2 Analog Output Signal Calibration
With a Transmitter in its constant current source mode, its analog output circuit can be calibrated at
its 0 (zero) % and 100% levels. It is not necessary to remove the Transmitter from service.
The following procedure is used for analog output signal calibration.
You can calculate milliamperes of current from a voltage measurement as follows:
Dc milliamps = 1000 X voltage/resistance
IMPORTANT: Be sure that the accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or better for current
measurements made by voltage drop.
1. Connect the MCT404 Toolkit across loop wiring, and turn it on. See Figure 21 for a sample
test equipment hookup.
2. Launch the FDC application.
3. On the Home page, select Online and establish a connection with the device as follows;
4. Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following menus:
a. Device setup \ Calibration \ D/A trim
5. You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control; after removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
6. When a prompt appears, connect a precision millimeter or voltmeter (0.03% accuracy or
better) in the loop to check readings, and press OK. The following prompts will be displayed:
 Setting field device to output to 4mA. Press OK
 Enter meter value. Key in the meter value, and press ENTER.
 Field device output 4.000 mA equal to reference meter?
1 Yes
2 No
If the reference meter is not equal to the field device output then select No and press Enter
Key in the new meter value
Return back to the ”Enter Meter Value” prompt until the field device output equals the reference
meter.
Select Yes and press Enter
7. The following display prompts will appear:
 Setting field device output to 20mA. Press OK
 Enter meter value. Key in the meter value, and press ENTER.
 Field device output 20.000 mA equal to reference meter?
 1 Yes
 2 No
o If the reference meter is not equal to the field device output then select No
and press Enter
o Key in the new meter value
o Return back to the ”Enter Meter Value” prompt until the field device output
equals the reference meter
o Select Yes and press Enter
8. The prompt notifies you that the field device will be returned to its original output
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 151
8.3 Calibrating Range
The SMV800 Transmitter supports two-point calibration. This means that when two points in a range
are calibrated, all points in that range adjust to the calibration.
The procedures in this section are used to calibrate differential pressure (DP) of SMV800 Transmitter
to a range of 0 to 200 inH2O for example purposes. This procedure assumes that the Transmitter has
been removed from the process and is located in a controlled environment.
IMPORTANT! You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.02% or
better to do a range calibration. Note that the factory calibrates SMV800 Transmitters using
inches of water pressure reference to a temperature of 39.2oF (4oC).
Note: Similar procedures as in section 8.3.3 to 8.3.5 can be used to calibrate Static Pressure.
8.3.3 Correcting the Lower Range Value (LRV) for Differential pressure
1. Connect a power supply and the MCT404 Toolkit to the signal terminals of the Transmitter’s
terminal block.
2. Connect the precision pressure source to the high pressure side of the DP-type Transmitter.
3. Turn on the power supply, and allow the Transmitter to become stable.
4. Turn the MCT404 Toolkit on, start the FDC application.
5. On the FDC Home page, select Online, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
6. Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following selections:
a. Device Setup \ Calibration \ DP Calibration \ LRV Correct
7. You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
8. When prompted, adjust the pressure source to apply pressure equal to the LRV (0%), and
press OK.
9. When the pressure stabilizes, press OK.
10. When prompted, remove pressure.
11. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH, for example
“12,” and press Enter.
12. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field),” enter the
Minutes field MM (example 23), and press ENTER.
13. When prompted to return the loop to automatic control, press ENTER
8.3.4 Correcting the Upper Range Value (URV) for Differential Pressure
1. See Figure 21 for typical test connections. Connect the power supply and communicator to
the signal terminals of the Transmitter terminal block.
2. Connect the precision pressure source to the high pressure side of the DP-type Transmitter.
3. Turn on the power supply, and allow the Transmitter to become stable.
4. Turn on the MCT404 Toolkit, and start the FDC application into operation.
5. On the FDC Home page, select Online, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
6. Select the My Device menu, and choose one of the following options:
a) Device Setup \ Calibration \ DP Calibration\URV Correct
7. You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. Press OK
Page 152
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
8. When prompted, adjust the pressure source to apply pressure equal to the URV (100%), and
press OK.
9. When pressure stabilizes, press OK.
10. When prompted, remove the pressure.
11. On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date in MM/DD/YYYY format, for example
“05/27/2009,” and press Enter.
12. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time in 24 Hr Clock format (Hour
field)”, enter the hour portion of the calibration time in the 24 Hr format HH, for example
“12,” and press Enter.
13. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field),” enter the
Minutes field MM (example 23), and press Enter.
14. When prompted, return the loop to automatic control, and press Enter.
Figure 21 - Setup to manually set the PV LRV and URV
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 153
8.3.5 Resetting Calibration for Differential Pressure
SmartLine HART Transmitter can erase incorrect calibration data by resetting the device back to
final factory calibration, which is performed per the ordered range. The Corrects Reset command
returns the zero and span calibration factors to the original precise factory calibration.
The following procedure is used to reset calibration data to factory calibrated range using the
communicator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Connect the MCT404 Toolkit as per Figure 7 across the loop wiring and turn on.
Turn the MCT404 Toolkit on, start the FDC application.
On the FDC Home page, select Online, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following selections:
a. Device Setup \ Calibration \DP Calibration\DP Reset Corrects
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
You will be notified that a Reset Corrects is about to occur. Press OK
When the message “Reset Corrects OK” appears, press OK. The previous calibration
“Corrects” are removed and calibration is reset to the factory values.
When prompted to return the loop to automatic control, press OK
Note: Similar procedures as in section 8.3.3 to 8.3.5 can be used to calibrate Static Pressure.
8.3.6 Correcting the Lower Range Value (LRV) for Temperature
1. Check that the Write Protect Jumper is in the “OFF” position.
2. See Figure 7 for typical test connections. Connect the power supply and communicator to the
signal terminals of the Transmitter terminal block.
3. Connect the precision calibrator source to the sensor (to be corrected) inputs of the
transmitter.
4. Turn on the power supply, and allow the Transmitter to become stable.
5. Turn the MC Toolkit on, start the FDC application.
6. On the FDC Home page, select Online, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
7. Check that the device is not in the Write Protect mode.
8. The Lower Calibration Point and Upper Calibration Point values have to be entered in the
respective sensor config parameters in the Sensors menu. These calibration points are used in
the LRV Correct and URV Correct methods (not LRV and URV).
9. Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following selections:
a. Device Setup \ Calibration \ PT Calibration \ PT LRV Correct
10. You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
11. When prompted, adjust the temperature source to apply value equal to the Lower Calibration
Point, and press OK.
12. When the temperature stabilizes, wait for 5 seconds, then press OK.
13. When prompted, remove temperature.
14. On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Enter the
Calibration date (for example “05/27/2009”) and press Enter.
Page 154
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
15. On the next prompt - "Please enter the current calibration time in 24 Hr format (Hours
Field)", enter the Hours field HH (for example, "12"), and press ENTER
16. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field),” enter the
Minutes field MM (for example “23”), and press ENTER.
17. When prompted to return the loop to automatic control, press ENTER
NOTE: If you are calibrating LRV and URV at the same time do not power down and start up
again after the LRV steps, just go to step 1 of the URV procedure below.
8.3.7 Correcting the Lower Range Value (URV) for Temperature
Assuming that you have just finished the LRV correct, then select the My Device menu, and choose
one of the following options:
1. Select the My Device menu, and choose one of the following options:
a) Device Setup \ Calibration \ PT Calibration \ PT URV Correct
2. You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
3. When prompted, adjust the temperature source to apply value equal to the Upper Calibration
Point, and press OK.
4. When the temperature stabilizes, wait for 5 seconds, then press OK.
5. When prompted, remove temperature.
6. On the next prompt – “Please enter Calibration Date in MM/DD/YYYY format. Enter the
Calibration date (for example “05/27/2009”) and press Enter.
7. On the next prompt - "Please enter the current calibration time in 24 Hr format (Hours
Field)", enter the Hours field HH (for example, "12"), and press ENTER
8. On the next prompt – “Please enter current Calibration Time (Minute field),” enter the
Minutes field MM (example “23”), and press ENTER.
9. When prompted to return the loop to automatic control, press ENTER
Note: When working with a Dual Input transmitter which has been configured for Differential
Input mode: Apply the Lower Calibration Point input and Upper Calibration Point input to both
inputs at the same time while performing the LRV and URV Corrects. Corrects will occur on
individual sensor readings when in Differential mode.
8.3.8 Resetting Calibration for Temperature
SMV800 SmartLine HART Temperature Transmitter can erase incorrect calibration data by
resetting the device back to final factory calibration, which is performed per the ordered range.
The Corrects Reset command returns the zero and span calibration factors to the original precise
factory calibration.
The following procedure is used to reset calibration data to factory calibrated range using the
communicator.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 155
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Connect the MC Toolkit per figure 6 across the loop wiring and turn on.
Turn the MC Toolkit on, start the FDC application.
On the FDC Home page, select Online, and establish communication with the Transmitter.
Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following selections:
a) Device Setup \ Calibration \ PT Calibration \PT Reset Corrects
You will be prompted to remove the loop from automatic control. After removing the loop
from automatic control, press OK.
You will be notified that a Reset Corrects is about to occur. Press OK
When the message “Reset Corrects OK” appears, press OK. The previous calibration
“Corrects” are removed and calibration is reset to the factory values.
When prompted to return the loop to automatic control, press OK
8.3.9 Calibration Records
A history of the date and time of the last three Calibration procedures is available for the HART
device. Run the Methods and follow the screen prompts to read the Calibration Records.
Under the calibration folder is:
 DP Calibration
 SP Calibration
 PT Calibration
Select “My Device\Device Setup\Calibration” to select the following calibration records
 Correct URV Records
 Correct LRV Records
 Zero Trim Records
 Reset Corrects Records
All 4 of these records is available for each of the above.
See Table 39 and Table 40
Table 39 – DP/SP Calibration Records
DP / SP Calibration Records
Description
Trim Records
Curr Zero Trim
Date and Time of current zero trim field
calibration displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last Zero Trim
Date and Time of last zero trim field calibration
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev Zero Trim
Date and Time of previous zero trim field
calibration displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Correct LRV Records
Curr LRV Correct
Page 156
Date and Time of current LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Last LRV Correct
Date and Time of last LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev LRV Correct
Date and Time of previous LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Correct URV Records
Curr URV Correct
Date and Time of current URV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last URV Correct
Date and Time of last UTV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev URV Correct
Date and Time of previous URV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Reset Correct Records
Curr Corrects Rec
Date and Time of current Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last Corrects Rec
Date and Time of last Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev Corrects Rec
Date and Time of current Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Table 40- Temperature Calibration records
Temperature Calibration Records
Description
Correct LRV Records
Curr LRV Correct
Date and Time of current LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last LRV Correct
Date and Time of last LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev LRV Correct
Date and Time of previous LRV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Correct URV Records
Curr URV Correct
Date and Time of current URV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last URV Correct
Date and Time of last UTV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev URV Correct
Date and Time of previous URV correct done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Reset Correct Records
Curr Corrects Rec
Date and Time of current Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Last Corrects Rec
Date and Time of last Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Prev Corrects Rec
Date and Time of current Reset corrects done
displayed in mm/dd/yyyy format
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 157
8.3.10 Dual / Triple Calibration
The transmitter will have the required calibration set as selected by the user when the transmitter
is purchased; either single, dual or triple calibration for Differential Pressure and Static Pressure.

Calibration A (Cal A) standard

Calibration B (Cal B)

Calibration C (Cal C)
Each factory calibration set (A, B or C) includes a calibration performed at LRV pressure and one
performed at URV pressure.
Once the transmitter is in the field the user will be able to select one of the 3 factory calibration
sets. The user can select one of the calibrations directly or select automatic mode which will pick
the set that most closely matches the currently programmed URV and LRV values. The
calibration selection is re-evaluated whenever a new range is written (new URV and LRV values)
or the selection is changed.
If all three calibrations have not been performed at the factory then set A is selected and the
default values have no effect on the PV value.
Using SMV800 DD file in MCTOOL KIT, Calibration options can be accessed.
1) Select the My Device menu, and choose from the following selections:
a)
Device Setup \ Calibration \ Factory Calib Sel->DP Factory Calib Sel->
Factory Cal Available DP
b)
Device Setup \ Calibration \ Factory Calib Sel->SP Factory Calib Sel->
Factory Cal Available SP
Page 158
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
9 HART Advanced Diagnostics
9.1 About This Section
This section provides information about the Advanced Diagnostic features in the SMV800
Transmitter.
9.2 Advanced Diagnostics
Table 41 – Viewing Advanced Diagnostics
What you want to view













Install dates for the Meter Body / Device and for the
Temperature module
Differential Pressure Tracking Diagnostics
Static Pressure Tracking Diagnostics
Pressure Module ET Tracking Diagnostics
Meter Body Temperature Tracking
AVDD (Pressure Sensor Supply Voltage) Tracking
Diagnostics
Operating Voltage Tracking Diagnostics
Power Up Diagnostics
Communication Module ET Tracking
Temperature Module ET Tracking
Delta Temperature Tracking
Process Temperature Tracking
AVDD (Temperature Sensor Supply Voltage)
Tracking Diagnostics
What to do
Select Start/FDC to Launch the
FDC application on the MCT404
Toolkit.
On the Home page, select Online
and establish connection with the
device.
Select My Device\Device
Setup\Diagnostics\Adv
Diagnostics.
Please refer Table 31 for the details of each of the diagnostics listed in the above Table.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 159
10 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
10.1 Troubleshooting Using the SCT
Using the SCT in the on-line mode you can check the transmitter status, identify diagnostic messages
and access troubleshooting information so you can clear fault conditions.
The SMV diagnostic messages fall into any one of the following general categories:
 Status (Informational)
 Noncritical Status
 Critical Status
 Communications
Follow the steps in Table 42 to access diagnostic messages generated by the SMV 3000 and
procedures for clearing transmitter fault conditions.
Table 42 - Accessing SMV 3000 Diagnostic Information using the SCT
Step
Action
1
Connect the SCT to the SMV and establish communications. (See
Section 4.1.5 Establishing Communications for the procedure, if
necessary.)
2
Select the Status Tab Card (if not selected already) to display a
listing of the Gross Status and Detailed Status messages.
3
Refer to the SCT on-line user manual for descriptions of the status
messages and corrective actions to clear faults.
ATTENTION
When critical status forces PV output into failsafe condition, record the messages before you cycle
transmitter power OFF/ON to clear failsafe condition.
For more information on trouble shooting the SCT refer to the SCT manual, #34-ST-10-08
Revision 2
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 160
This page has been intentionally left blank
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 161
11 Using DTMs
11.1 Introduction
The SMV800 HART model supports DTMs running on Pactware or FDM / Experion. To set up the
DTM network on the FDM/Experion, refer to the FDM/Experion User Guide. In this manual, the
procedure is given to run the SMV800 HART DTM on Pactware (Version 4.1 or above).
11.2 Components
In order to be able to use the HART DTM you need the following:





PACTware or some other Container application.
Microsoft .NET Framework
Latest HART Communication DTM: Free version of HART Communication DTM available
for download from CodeWrights website.
Honeywell HART DTM Library
Viator modem from MacTek: RS-232 interface for HART Networks
11.3 Downloads
-
Download 1: Pactware 4.x and .NET 2.0
Download from www.pactware.com
Download 2: HART Communication DTM\
Download from http://www.codewrights.biz/
Download 3: Honeywell HART DTM Library
Download from HPS web site
11.4 Procedure to Install and Run the DTM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Install the Download 1, 2, or 3 above.
Connect the Transmitter to the 30 V DC power supply with a 250 ohm loop resistor.
Connect the Viator modem terminals to the Transmitter power terminals.
Connect the Viator modem DB9 connector to the PC COM port.
Run Pactware. Select Update Device Catalog before adding Device (before adding HART
Comm DTM).
Add Device – Add HART Comm DTM.
Right click on HART DTM, select Connect.
Right Click on HART Comm DTM and select Add device.
Add the Device DTM from for your device from the list (for example: SMV800 DevRev 1).
Right Click on Device DTM, and select Connect.
Right click on Device DTM, and select Parameter/online parameterization. You should see
Status “Connected” to be able to do configuration, calibration etc.
Browse through the menus to access various parameters/functions
The following sections provide a high level overview of SMV800 DTM screens. The Menu structure
is similar to the MCT404 Toolkit FDC application and behavior of the parameters / methods is the
same as the MCT404 Toolkit FDC application. Refer to
Table 19 for a complete listing of all the parameters and details. In the following sections, emphasis is
given to show the various DTM screens.
Page 162
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.5 SMV800 Online Parameterization
On selecting Parameter/Online Parameterization, the DTM home page is displayed as shown below.
The home page has three shortcuts: Device Setup, Basic Setup, and Calibration.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 163
11.5.1 Device Health:
Shows Overall Device Status
Normal, Warning or Failure depending upon the health of the device:
11.5.2 Process Variables:
Shows Process variables with their Ranges and Units
11.5.3 Device Setup:
Provides entry points for the below Screens:
Page 164

Basic Setup

Advanced Flow Setup

Device Variable Mapping

Differential Pressure Configuration

Static Pressure Configuration

Process Temperature Configuration

Flow Configuration

Meter Body Temperature Configuration

Process variables

Calibration

Device Status

Diagnostics

Services

Detailed Setup

Meter Body Details

Display Setup

Upgrade Options

Review
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.1 Basic Setup Page
Provides Device Identity, Tag and other details
“Maintenance Mode” and “Transmitter
Messaging”
Refer to Table 20 the for more details
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 165
11.2 Advanced Flow Setup (for DTM only)
Advanced Flow Setup allows the user to configure the Flow setup in an easy and intuitive way.
11.2.4 Unit Configuration
Provides option to select U.S Units, S.I. Units or predefined Custom units for Differential Pressure,
Static Pressure, Temperature, Flow, Viscosity, Density and Length parameters.
Page 166
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 43 – Unit Configuration
Unit Configuration Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Parameters
Differential
Pressure
Static
Pressure
U.S.
Units
U.S. Units:
Pounds per
Square Inch (psi)
S.I.
Units
S.I. Units
Kilopascals
(kPa)
Pounds per
Square Inch (psi)
Kilopascals
(kPa)
Units Selection
Custom Units

































Temperature
Revision 2.0
Degrees
Fahrenheit (°F)
Degrees
Celsius (°C)




inH2O (68oF)
inHg (0oC
)ftH2O (68oF)
mmH2O (68oF)
mmHg (0oC)
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
Torr
Atm
inH2O@60oF
MPa
inH2O@4oC (39.2 oF
mmH2O@4oC (39.2oF)
Pound per Square Inch (psi)
inH2O (68oF)
inHg (0oC)
ftH2O (68oF)
mmH2O (68oF)
mmHg (0oC)
psi
bar
mbar
g/cm2
kg/cm2
Pa
kPa
Torr
Atm
 inH2O@60oF
 MPa
 inH2O@4oC (39.2 oF
 mmH2O@4oC (39.2oF)
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Degrees Celsius (°C)
Kelvin
Degrees Rankine (°K)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 167
Flow
lb/sec when Flow
output type is
Mass Flow
ft3/sec when
Flow output type
is Volume Flow
g/sec when
Flow output
type is Mass
Flow
When Flow Output Type is Mass Flow:
g/sec
g/min
g/h
m3/sec when
Flow output
type is Volume
Flow
kg/sec
kg/min
kg/h
t/min [Metric tons]
t/h [Metric tons]
lb/sec
lb/min
lb/h
When Flow Output Type is Volume
Flow:
m3/h
m3/min
m3/sec
m3/day
gal/min
gal/h
gal/day
l/min
l/h
ft3/min
ft3/sec
ft3/h
Length
Inches (in)
Density
Pounds per
Cubic Foot (lb/ft3)
Viscosity
Centipoise (cP)
Page 168
Millimeters
(mm)
Kilograms per
Cubic Meter
(kg/m3)
Centipoise (cP)
bbl/day
 Inches (in)
 Millimeters (mm)

Pounds per Cubic Foot (lb/ft3)
 Kilograms per Cubic Meter (kg/m3)



Centipoise (cP)
Pascal Seconds (Pa.s)
Pounds per Foot Seconds (lb/ft.s)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.2.5 Advanced Flow Setup
Configure Flow Setup parameters
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 169
Table 44 – Configure Advanced Flow Setup
Advanced Flow Setup Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Fluid Type
Flow Output Type
Algorithm Options
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Gas
Liquid
Superheated Steam
Saturated Steam (DP,SP)
Saturated Steam (DP,PT)




No Flow Output
Ideal Gas Actual Volume Flow
Ideal Gas Mass Flow
Ideal Gas Volume Flow @ Std
Condition
No Flow Output
Liquid Mass Flow
Liquid Actual Volume Flow
Liquid Volume Flow @ Std Condition
No Flow Output
Steam Mass Flow






SMV800
SMV3000
Equation Model
Dynamic
Standard
Fluid list
0,1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE,
1,1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE,
2,1,2,4-TRICHLOROBENZENE,
3,1,2-BUTADIENE,
4,1,3,5-TRICHLOROBENZENE,
5,1,4-DIOXANE,
6,1,4-HEXADIENE,
7,1-BUTANAL,
8,1-BUTANOL,
9,1-BUTENE,
10,1-DECANAL,
11,1-DECANOL,
12,1-DECENE,
13,1-DODECANOL,
14,1-DODECENE,
15,1-HEPTANOL,
16,1-HEPTENE,
Page 170
1,2,3 – applicable when:
Algorithm Options = SMV
800 or SMV 3000.
4,5 – applicable when
Algorithm Options = SMV 800
When Fluid type = Gas
When Fluid type = Liquid
When Fluid type =
Superheated Steam or
Saturated Steam (DP,SP) or
Saturated Steam (DP,PT)
SMV800: Allows Flow
calculation using newer
Standards using predefined
list of Primary Elements.
SMV3000: Allows selecting
legacy SMV3000 algorithms
and Primary Elements
Dynamic option allowed on
SMV800 Algorithm or
SMV3000 Algorithm. Select
SMV3000 Algorithm Option if
you need to calculate
Standard Flow
List of Fluids for which the
Viscosity and Density
coefficients will be calculated
automatically.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
17,1-HEXADECANOL,
18,1-HEXENE,
19,1-NONANAL,
20,1-NONANOL,
21,1-OCTANOL,
22,1-OCTENE,
23,1-PENTADECANOL,
24,1-PENTANOL,
25,1-PENTENE,
26,1-UNDECANOL,
27,2,2-DIMETHYLBUTANE,
28,2-METHYL-1-PENTENE,
29,ACETIC ACID,
30,ACETONE,
31,ACETONITRILE,
32,ACETYLENE,
33,ACRYLONITRILE,
34,AIR,
35,ALLYL ALCOHOL,
36,AMMONIA,
37,ARGON,
38,BENZALDEHYDE,
39,BENZENE,
40,BENZYL ALCOHOL,
41,BIPHENYL,
42,CARBON DIOXIDE,
43,CARBON MONOXIDE,
44,CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
45,CHLORINE,
46,CHLOROPRENE,
47,CHLOROTRIFLUOROETHYLENE,
48,CYCLOHEPTANE,
49,CYCLOHEXANE,
50,CYCLOPENTENE,
51,CYCLOPROPANE,
52,ETHANE,
53,ETHANOL,
54,ETHYLAMINE,
55,ETHYLBENZENE,
56,ETHYLENE OXIDE,
57,ETHYLENE,
58,FLUORENE,
59,FURAN,
60,HELIUM-4,
61,HYDROGEN CHLORIDE,
62,HYDROGEN CYANIDE,
63,HYDROGEN PEROXIDE,
64,HYDROGEN SULFIDE,
65,HYDROGEN,
66,ISOBUTANE,
67,ISOPRENE,
68,ISOPROPANOL,
69,m-CHLORONITROBENZENE,
70,m-DICHLOROBENZENE,
71,METHANE,
72,METHANOL,
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 171
73,METHYL ACRYLATE,
74,METHYL ETHYL KETONE,
75,METHYL VINYL ETHER,
76,n-BUTANE,
77,n-BUTYRONITRILE,
78,n-DECANE,
79,n-DODECANE,
80,n-HEPTADECANE,
81,n-HEPTANE,
82,n-HEXANE,
83,n-OCTANE,
84,n-PENTANE,
85,NATURAL GAS,
86,NEON,
87,NEOPENTANE,
88,NITRIC ACID,
89,NITRIC OXIDE,
90,NITROBENZENE,
91,NITROETHANE,
92,NITROGEN,
93,NITROMETHANE,
94,NITROUS OXIDE,
95,OXYGE},
96,PENTAFLUOROETHANE,
97,PHENOL,
98,PROPADIENE,
99,PROPANE,
100,PROPYLENE,
101,PYRENE,
102,STYRENE,
103,SULFUR DIOXIDE,
104,TOLUENE,
105,TRICHLOROETHYLENE,
106,VINYL CHLORID,
107,WATER,
108,Custom Fluid
Polynomial Order
0,1,2,3,4
Custom Fluid
Enter any custom fluid name if the one user
wants to use is NOT in the Fluid List
Primary Element
Type
Orifice
Nozzle
Venturi
Pitot Tube
VCone
Wedge
Orifice
Nozzle
Venturi
Pitot Tube
Page 172
Order of polynomial for
automatic calculation of
Viscosity and Density
Coefficients.
Enter any name for Custom
Fluid and then user can
manually enter the Viscosity
and Density coefficients on
Process Data page
When Algorithm Options =
SMV800
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 3000
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 Flange Pressure
Taps
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 Corner Pressure
Taps
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 D and D/2
Pressure Taps
Orifice ISO5167-2003 Flange Pressure Taps
Orifice ISO5167-2003 Corner Pressure Taps
Orifice ISO5167-2003 D and D/2 Pressure
Taps
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Flange Pressure
Taps
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Corner Pressure
Taps
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Three-Radius
Pressure Taps
Orifice AGA3-2003 Flange Pressure Taps
Orifice AGA3-2003 Corner Pressure Taps
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 ASME Long
Radius Nozzles
Primary Element
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 Venturi Nozzles
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 ISA 1932
Nozzles
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 Long Radius Nozzles
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 Venturi Nozzles
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 ISA 1932 Nozzles
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 Long Radius
Nozzles
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 800
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 Venturi Nozzles
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 ISA 1932 Nozzles
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 “As-Cast”
Convergent Section
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 Machined
Convergent Section
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 Rough-Welded
Convergent
Section
Venturi ISO5167-2003 “As-Cast” Convergent
Section
Venturi ISO5167-2003 Machined Convergent
Section
Venturi ISO5167-2003 Rough-Welded SheetIron Convergent Section
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Cast Upstream
Cone Part
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Machined
Upstream Cone Part
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Welded Upstream
Cone Part
made of Sheet Steel
Averaging Pitot Tube
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 173
Standard V-Cone with Macrometer method
Standard V-Cone with ASME method
Wafer Cone with Macrometer method
Wafer Cone with ASME method
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 800
Wedge
Primary Element
Flow Calc Standard
Pipe Material
Page 174
Integral Orifice
Orifice Flange Taps D >/= 2.3 inches
Orifice Flange Taps 2 </= D </= 2.3
Orifice Corner Taps
Orifice D and D/2 Taps
Orifice 2.5 and 8D Taps
Venturi Machined Inlet
Venturi Rough Cast Inlet
Venturi Rough Welded Sheet-Iron Inlet
Leopold Venturi
Gerand Venturi
Universal Venturi Tube
Low-Loss Venturi Tube
Nozzle Long radius
Nozzle Venturi
Preso Elipse Ave. Pitot Tube
Other (Std compensation mode) Pitot Tube
ASME-MFC-3M
ISO5167
GOST
AGA3
VCONE/WAFER CONE
ASME-MFC-14M
WEDGE
AVERAGE PITOT TUBE
INTEGRAL ORIFICE
CONDITIONAL ORIFICE
CONDITIONAL ORIFICE
ASME 1989
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
35Π
45Π
20XMΠ
12X18H9TΠ
15K,20K
22K
16ГC
09Г2C
10
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 3000
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 800
Automatically set based on
Primary Element type and
Primary Element
When Algorithm Options =
SMV 3000
When Flow Calc Standard
is other than GOST
When Flow Calc Standard
is GOST
Revision 2.0
Pipe Material
Pipe Thermal Exp
Coefficient_alpha_D
Bore Material
Revision 2.0
15
20
30,35
40,45
10Г2
38XA
40X
15XM
30XM,30XMA
12X1MФ
25X1MФ
25X2MФ
15X5M
18X2H4MA
38XH3MФA
08X13
12X13
30X13
10X14Г14H14T
08X18H10
12X18H9T
12X18H10T
12X18H12T
08X18H10T
08X22H6T
37X12H8Г8MФБ
31X19H9MBБT
06XH28MдT
20Π
25Π
304 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
304/316 Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
Hastelloy
Monel 400
Other
35Π
45Π
20XMΠ
12X18H9TΠ
15K,20K
22K
16ГC
09Г2C
10
15
20
30,35
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
When Flow Calc Standard
is GOST
Value is set based on the
Pipe Material selected
When Flow Calc Standard
is other than GOST
When Flow Calc Standard
is GOST
Page 175
Bore Material
Bore Thermal Exp
Coefficient_alpha_d
40,45
10Г2
38XA
40X
15XM
30XM,30XMA
12X1MФ
25X1MФ
25X2MФ
15X5M
18X2H4MA
38XH3MФA
08X13
12X13
30X13
10X14Г14H14T
08X18H10
12X18H9T
12X18H10T
12X18H12T
08X18H10T
08X22H6T
37X12H8Г8MФБ
31X19H9MBБT
06XH28MдT
20Π
25Π
When Flow Calc Standard
is GOST.
RULE: When Algorithm =
SMV3000, for Pitot Tube
Element, Bore Material =
Pipe Material.
Value is set based on the
Bore Material selected.
RULE: When Algorithm =
SMV3000, for Pitot Tube
Element, Bore Thermal
Expansion Coefficient =
Pipe Thermal Expansion
Coefficient
Page 176
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.2.6 Flow Configurations Screen
Configure Discharge coefficients, compensation and failsafe settings and Simulation values
Table 45 - Flow Configuration
Flow Configuration Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Manual Input
Manual Input
(for Coefficient of Discharge_Cd)
Coefficient of Discharge_Cd
ON
OFF
Manual Input
(for Expansion Factor_y)
Expansion Factor_Y
ON
OFF
Manual Input
(for Temp Expansion Factor_Fa)
ON
OFF
Revision 2.0
(entry field when Manual Input is
ON)
(entry field When Manual Input is
ON)
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 177
Temp Expansion Factor_Fa
Reverse Flow
ON
OFF
(entry field When Manual Input is
ON)
With Reverse flow OFF, flow value
will be zero flow when Flow is
negative (when Differential Pressure
is < 0).
When Reverse flow is ON, PV4 is
calculated considering the absolute
value of DP (when Differential
Pressure is < 0)
Example When Reverse Flow OFF:
DP = -100 inH20
SP = 14.45 psi.
PV4 (Flow) = 0
Example When Reverse Flow ON:
DP = -100 inH20 (-3.612 psi)
SP = 14.45 psi.
PV4 calculation will consider 100in
H20 in calculation.
SP value, SP=SP-DP.
SP = 14.45-(-3.612)=18.062 psi will
be used in the flow algorithm
calculation for SMV800 Algorithms
Compensation Switch
Absolute Pressure Comp
Switch
Note that, for some Primary
Elements and Algorithm Standards,
Reverse Flow may not be applicable.
In this case, flow value will be zero
regardless of the Reverse Flow
Calculation option.
ON
OFF
Applicable when Equation Model is
Standard, Algorithm Option is
SMV3000
When ON, use Design Pressure for
Flow Calculation when PV2 (Static
Pressure) goes bad and PV2
Failsafe is OFF.
When OFF, PV2 has no effect on
Flow Calculation
When Equation model is Dynamic,
Algorithm Option is SMV800 or SMV
3000, this switch is always ON
Page 178
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Temperature Comp Switch
ON
OFF
Applicable when Equation Model is
Standard, Algorithm Option is
SMV3000
When ON, use Design Temperature
for Flow Calculation when PV3
(Process Temperature) goes bad
and PV3 Failsafe is OFF
When OFF, PV3 has no effect on
Flow Calculation
Failsafe Switch
Absolute Pressure Failsafe
(PV2)
When Equation model is Dynamic,
Algorithm Option is SMV800 or SMV
3000, this switch is always ON
ON
OFF
Case1: If flow output is required to
go to failsafe when there is a
pressure failure, selecting Absolute
Pressure (PV2) failsafe will assure
this.
If failsafe for the flow output is not
needed when a pressure sensor
fails, the nominal or design values
for pressure is used in the flow
calculation and the flow rate
continues to be reported. Some use
cases are listed below
PV2 Process Input: If the PV2 input
becomes good, device needs a
power cycle to return to normal.
PV2 Sim Input: If the PV2 input
becomes good, device returns to
normal without a power cycle.
Case 2: This Switch ON: When PV4
is mapped to output, bad PV2
(Process input or Sim value) makes
PV4 bad, device goes to burnout.
PV4 calculated: If the PV2 input
becomes good (Process input or Sim
value), device needs a power cycle
to return to normal.
PV4 Simulated: PV2 input good or
bad (Process input or Sim value),
PV4 is not dependent on PV2. If PV4
sim input is Bad, device goes to
Burnout. If PV4 Sim input becomes
good, device returns to normal
without power cycle.
Case3: This switch OFF: If PV4 is
mapped to output, PV4 is still good
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 179
on bad PV2. PV4 calculation uses
Design Pressure or Nominal /
Default Pressure as below:
SMV3000, Standard:
Fluid = Gas: Flow equation Uses
Design Pressure.
Fluid = Liquid: Flow equation Uses
Default / Nominal Pressure.
Fluid = Steam: Flow equation Uses
Design Density. Design Pressure = 1
Temperature Failsafe (PV3)
ON
OFF
SMV3000 or SMV800 Dynamic:
Fluid = Gas, Liquid Steam: Flow
equation uses Nominal/Default
Pressure
If the flow output is required to go to
failsafe when there is a temperature
failure, selecting Temperature
Failsafe (PV2 Failsafe) will assure
this.
If failsafe for the flow output is not
needed when a temperature sensor
fails, the nominal or design values
for temperature are used in the flow
calculation and the flow rate
continues to be reported. Some use
cases are listed below.
Case1: This switch On or OFF:
When PV3 is mapped to Output, and
when PV3 goes bad, device always
goes to burnout.
PV3 Process Input: If the PV3 input
becomes good, device needs a
power cycle to return to normal if
Critical Status Latching is ON.
PV3 Process Input: If the PV3 input
becomes good, device returns to
normal without power cycle if Critical
Status Latching is OFF.
PV3 Sim Input: If the PV3 input
becomes good, device returns to
normal without a power cycle
whether Latching is ON or OFF.
Case 2: This Switch ON: When PV4
is mapped to output, bad PV3 makes
PV4 bad and device goes to burnout.
PV4 calculated: If the PV3 input
becomes good (Process input or Sim
value), device needs a power cycle
to return to normal.
Page 180
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
PV4 Simulated: PV3 input good or
bad (Process input or Sim value),
PV4 is not dependent on PV3. If PV4
sim input is Bad, device goes to
Burnout. If PV4 Sim input becomes
good, device returns to normal
without power cycle.
Case3: This switch OFF: If PV4 is
mapped to output, PV4 is still good
on bad PV3. PV4 calculation uses
Design Temperature or Nominal /
Default Temperature as below:
SMV3000, Standard:
Fluid = Gas: Flow equation Uses
Design Temperature.
Fluid = Liquid: Flow equation Uses
Default / Nominal Temperature.
Fluid = Steam: Flow equation Uses
Design Density.
Design Temperature = 1.
Simulation
Simulate Differential Pressure
Simulate Static Pressure
Simulate Temperature
Simulate Mass Flow
Revision 2.0
SMV3000 or SMV800 Dynamic:
Fluid = Gas, Liquid, Steam:
Flow equation uses Nominal/Default
Temperature
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
User enters the values as selected in
Unit Configuration screen
User enters the values as selected in
Unit Configuration screen
User enters the values as selected in
Unit Configuration screen
User enters the values as selected in
Unit Configuration screen
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 181
11.2.7 Process Data Screen
Configure Viscosity and Density Coefficients, Design Temperature, Pressure, Nominal Temperature,
Pressure values, Max values, and KUser factor
Table 46 – Process Data
Process Data Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Viscosity
Manual Input Viscosity
Viscosity Coefficient_V#
Lower TempLimit Viscosity TuMin
Page 182
ON
OFF
V1 to V5
Applicable When Algorithm Option = SMV800
See Table 48 to see when V1 to V5 are
applicable based on Algorithm option,
Equation Model and Fluid Type
Minimum Temperature to select the initial
Temperature vs Viscosity value in the
polynomial equation for auto calculation of
Viscosity. Enter the temperature value in the
units selected in the Unit Configuration screen.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Upper TempLimit Viscosity
TuMax
Density
Manual Input Density
Density Coefficient_d#
Maximum Temperature to select the end point
Temperature vs Viscosity value in the
polynomial equation for auto calculation of
Viscosity. Enter the temperature value in the
units selected in the Unit Configuration screen.
ON
OFF
Design Values
Design Absolute Pressure
Design Temperature
Design Density
Base Density
Nominal (Default) Values
Nominal Absolute Pressure
Nominal Temperature
Nominal Differential Pressure
Algorithm Option = SMV3000
Enter the temperature value in the units
selected in the Unit Configuration screen.
ON/OFF
Density Coefficient_d#
#.#
Lower TempLimit Density TpMin
Upper TempLimit Density TpMax
Normal (Max) Volume
Max Flow Rate
Revision 2.0
See Table 49 to see when d1 to d5 are
applicable based on Algorithm option,
Equation Model and Fluid Type
Enter the temperature value in the units
selected in the Unit Configuration screen.
Density
Manual Input Density
Max Differential Pressure
Flow Coefficient (KUser)
Manual Input
KUser Value
Applicable When Algorithm Option = SMV800
ON/OFF
#.#
When Algorithm Option = SMV800.
Fluid Type = Liquid
When Algorithm Option = SMV3000.
Fluid Type = Liquid
Equation Model = Dynamic or Standard
Minimum Temperature to select the initial
Temperature vs Density value in the
polynomial equation for auto calculation of
Density. Enter the temperature value in the
selected unit in the Unit Configuration screen.
Maximum Temperature to select the end point
Temperature vs Density value in the
polynomial equation for auto calculation of
Density. Enter the temperature value in the
selected unit in the Unit Configuration screen.
When Algorithm Option = SMV3000, Equation
Model = Standard.
Enter the value in the units selected in the Unit
Configuration screen.
Same as above
Same as Above
Same as Above
When Manual Input is ON, user enters the
KUser value for SMV3000 Standard Algorithm.
When Manual Input is OFF, KUser value is
auto calculated. When Algorithm is Dynamic,
Manual Input ON/OF is not applicable and this
value is set to 1
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 183
Table 47 - Viscosity Coefficients: Dependency to Algorithm option
Equation Model and Fluid Type
SMV3000
Std / Gas
Std / liquid
Std/SHS
Std / Sat S
SMV3000
Dynamic / Gas
Dynamic / liquid
Dynamic/SHS
Dynamic / Sat S
SMV800
Dynamic / Gas
Dynamic / liquid
Dynamic/SHS
Manual
input V1
to V5
(Fluid =
Custom)
Visc
Temp
Low/High
limits
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
n/a
y
n/a
y
N/A
Water by
default
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
Water by
default
water by
default
N/A
y
N/A
y
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Fluid
Selection
N/A
y
Dynamic / Sat S
Page 184
Viscosity
Custom
Auto
Fluid
calculation
selection V1 to V5
(Fluid !=
Custom
Fluid)
Manual
input
viscosity
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Table 48 - Density Coefficients: Dependency to Algorithm option
Equation Model and Fluid Type
Density
SMV3000
Std / Gas
Std / liquid
Std/SHS
Std / Sat S
SMV3000
Dynamic / Gas
Dynamic / liquid
Dynamic/SHS
Dynamic / Sat S
SMV800
Dynamic / Gas
Dynamic / liquid
Dynamic/SHS
Dynamic / Sat S
Revision 2.0
Manual
input
density
Fluid
Selection
Custom
Fluid
selection
Auto
calculation
d1 to d5
(Fluid !=
Custom)
Manual
entry d1
to d5
(Fluid =
Custom)
Density
Temp
Low/High
limits
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
water
n/a
y
n/a
y
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
y
y
y
y
y
N/A
water
N/A
y
N/A
y
y
water by
default
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 185
11.2.8 Element Specific Properties screen
Configure properties specific to selected Primary Element or Standard: Gost, WEDGE, VCone, and
Conditional Orifice
VCone
Page 186
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Wedge
Conditional Orifice
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 187
Table 49 - Element Specific Properties
Element Specific Properties Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
WEDGE
Beta Factor
Calculated based on Segment Height
H and Pipe Diameter D
Segment Height H < D
H and D > 0
Segment Height_H
Wedge Pipe Diameter_D
Use Fixed Flow
VCone / Wafer Cone
Max Flowrate Sizing
VCone_Qmax
ON/OFF
Max Diff Pressure Sizing
VCone_DPmax
VCone Y Method
McCrometer/ASME
VCone Simplified Liquid
ON/OFF
Pipe Properties (GOST std)
Pipe roughness_Ra
Initial Corner Radius_r
Inter Corner Interval_Ty
Conditional Orifice
Pipe Sched Factor_Fs
Calibration Factor_Fc
Page 188
year
Enter the value in the unit selected in
the Unit Configuration screen
Enter Maximum Differential
Pressure on Sizing VCone in the units
selected in the Units Configuration
screen
Enter the value in the unit selected in
the Unit Configuration screen
Select the method for calculating the
Gas Expansion factor (Y) used in Flow
calculation
Enter interior wall roughness of the
pipe in the selected unit in the Units
Configuration screen
Enter the value in the unit selected in
the Unit Configuration screen
Enter Initial orifice corner radius in the
units selected in the Units
configuration screen
Inspection Period (Orifice/Probe) Sets,
in years
Pipe schedule factor Fs
Calibration factor Fc
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.2.9 Flow Parameters
Configure Flow Parameters
Table 50 – Flow Parameters
Flow Parameters
Key: Plain = Read only Bold = Configurable Bold underline = Method Bold italic = Table or graph
Pipe diameter_D
Bore Diameter_d
Discharge Exponent
in
in
0.75
0.5
Reynolds Coefficient_r1
Reynolds Coefficient_r2
Upper Limit Reynolds
Num_RnMax
Lower Limit Reynolds
Num_RnMax
Isentropic Coefficient_k
Pipe Diameter Measuring
Temp_TDMeas
Based on the selected Fluid, this is auto calculated
Upper limit for Reynolds number
Lower limit for Reynolds number
Bore Diameter Measuring
Temp_TDMeas
Local Atmospheric Absolute
Pressure
Flow Coefficient
Revision 2.0
Applicable when Algorithm Options = SMV3000
Equation Model = Dynamic..Based on the selected
Fluid, this is auto calculated
Based on the selected Fluid, this is auto calculated
PSIA
Isentropic Coefficient of Expansion
Pipe diameter measuring Temperature
Enter the value in the unit selected in the Unit
Configuration screen
Bore diameter measuring Temperature
Enter the value in the unit selected in the Unit
Configuration screen
Local Atmospheric pressure in units as per Units
configuration screen
Flow Coefficient used when Algorithm options is
SMV800, and Primary Element is any of the types:
Averaging Pitot Tube, Wedge or Integral Orifice
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 189
Note: Next Screen summarizes all the Flow configurations under Summary page. User can review the
parameters and edit if needed by going back to the Flow Configuration Screen/s before selecting the
"Finish" button. Once the "Finish" button is selected, all the Flow Configurations will be written to
the device. Sample Summary page is shown below. User can export the summary page into a pdf file
by selecting "Export to PDF".
Page 190
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.3 DevVar Mapping
Allows mapping Device variables to Dynamic variables. Refer Table 22 for parameter details.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 191
11.4 Diff. Pressure Config
Allows Range and Units configuration for Pressure.
Refer Table 23 for Parameter Details
Page 192
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.5 Static Pressure Config
Allows Range and Units configuration for Static Pressure.
Refer Table 24 for Parameter Details
11.6 Process Temp. Config
Allows Range, Units, Sensor Type configuration for Process Temperature
Refer Table 25 for Parameter Details
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 193
11.7 Flow Config
Allows Range and Units configuration for Flow.
Refer Table 26 for Parameter Details
PV4 (Flow) Upper Range Limit (URL) and Range Values (LRV and URV)
Set the URL, LRV, and URV for calculated flow rate PV4 output by typing in the desired values on
the FlowConf tab card.
• URL = Type in the maximum range limit that is applicable for your process conditions.
(100,000 = default)
• LRV = Type in the desired value (default = 0.0)
• URV = Type in the desired value (default = URL)
Be sure that you set the PV4 Upper Range Limit (URL) to desired value before you set
PV4 range values. We suggest that you set the PV4 URL to equal two times the maximum
flow rate (2 x URV).
About URL and LRL
The Lower Range Limit (LRL) and Upper Range Limit (URL) identify the minimum and maximum
flow rates for the given PV4 calculation. The LRL is fixed at zero to represent a no flow condition.
The URL, like the URV, depends on the calculated rate of flow that includes a scaling factor as well
as pressure and/or temperature compensation. It is expressed as the maximum flow rate in the
selected volumetric or mass flow engineering units.
About LRV and URV
The LRV and URV set the desired zero and span points for your calculated measurement range as
shown in the example in Figure 22.
Page 194
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Figure 22 - Typical Volumetric Flow Range Setting Values
The default engineering units for volumetric flow rate is cubic meters per hour and tonnes
per hour is the default engineering units for mass flow rate. The URV changes automatically to
compensate for any changes in the LRV and maintain the present span (URV – LRV). If you
must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV first.
Damping
Adjust the damping time constant for flow measurement (PV4) to reduce the output noise. We
suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for the process.
The damping values (in seconds) for PV4 are: 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 10.0, 50.0 and 100.0
Low Flow Cutoff for PV4
For calculated flow rate (PV4), set low and high cutoff limits between 0 and 30% of Upper Range
Limit for PV4 in engineering units.
• Low Flow Cutoff: Low (0.0 = default) High (0.0 = default)
Background
You can set low and high low flow cutoff limits for the transmitter output based on the calculated
variable PV4. The transmitter will clamp the current output at zero percent flow when the flow rate
goes below the configured low limit and will keep the output at zero percent until the flow rate rises
to the configured high limit. This helps avoid errors caused by flow pulsations in range values close
to zero. Note that you configure limit values in selected engineering units between 0 to 30% of the
upper range limit for PV4.
When the flow rate goes below LRV, the output will be at Saturation and will read 3.8mA. When the
Flow rate rises, and when reaches the Low Limit, the output will be at 4mA or 0% until the flow rate
rises to the configured High limit.
Figure 23 gives a graphic representation of the low flow cutoff action for sample low and high limits
in engineering units of liters per minute.
If the flow LRV is not zero, the low flow cutoff output value will be calculated on the LRV
and will not be 0 %.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 195
Figure 23 – Low Flow cutoff action
The low flow cutoff action also applies for reverse flow in the negative direction. For the
sample shown in Figure 23, this would result in a low limit of –55 GPM and a high limit of –165
GPM.
11.8 Meter Body Temp. Config
Allows configuration for Meter Body Temperature
Refer Table 27 for Parameter Details
Page 196
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.9 Process Variables
All the Process Variables are graphically represented in this screen. To see the Trend Charts, select
Trend Chart button on the screen.
Refer Table 28 for more details
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 197
11.10 Calibration
The Calibration Page provides access to all of the calibration methods and records.
Allows Calibration of Differential Pressure, Static Pressure, Process Temperature, and DAC.
Also allows selecting one of the Available Factory Calibration options.
Refer Table 29 for more details
Page 198
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.11 Device Status
Shows Critical and Non-Critical status and context-sensitive help when gliding the mouse over an
individual status.
Refer Table 30 for more details
Refer “Troubleshooting and Maintenance” for more details on individual status details
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 199
11.12 Diagnostics:
Provides access to the Advanced Diagnostics and Configuration History functions:
Access the relevant sub function button to read the Diagnostic parameters or run the Diagnostics
Methods
Refer ”HART Advanced Diagnostics” section for more details.
Page 200
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
Refer Table 31 for complete details.
11.13 Services
This allows configuration of Tamper Alarm and Write Protect mode.
Refer Table 32 for more details
Write protect ON/OFF
Revision 2.0
Configuration of Tamper Alarm
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 201
11.14 Detailed Setup
Shows Sensor Limits, Output Condition, Signal Condition and Burnout level selections.
Refer Table 33 for more details
11.15 Meter body Details
Select the Meter Body Selections to see the Material of Construction details
Refer Table 34 for more details
Page 202
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.16 Display Setup
Allows configuring the Display from the Host.
Refer Table 35 for more details
11.17 Upgrade Options
This screen allows enabling an optional feature in the device.
Refer Table 36 for more details
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 203
11.18 Review
Summary screen showing all the parameters.
Refer Table 37 for more details
Page 204
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.19 Saving the current Online Configuration as Offline dataset
While in Offline parameterization select Load from Device from the Menu. All the current
online parameter values will be set to the Offline dataset. User can export the parameters to an
xml file. User can also edit the parameters before exporting to the file.
Export
Revision 2.0
Import
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 205
Page 206
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
11.20 SMV800 Offline Parameterization
On selecting Parameter/ Parameterization, the Offline parameter configuration page will be displayed.
User can start with a new Offline Configuration from scratch or open the existing Offline
Configuration file. Select Parameter/Parameterization.
All the offline configuration tabs are shown below. User can create his configuration and then can
save the configuration to an xml file by selecting Export.
Export
Import
Alternately, user can import an existing Offline Configuration file by selecting Import feature.
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 207
12 Comparison of configuration options from
DD host vs DTM
Table 51 – Flow Parameters
parameters related to selected
Liquid
 Viscosity coefficients,
 Density coefficients,
 Visc Coefficient Temperature
limits default
 Density Coefficient
Temperature limits default
 Reynolds Coefficients r1 r2,
 Reynolds Exponent
 KUser,
 Beta factor
1. Materials
2. Coefficients related to selected
Material




Pipe Material
Bore Material
Pipe Thermal expansion
coefficient,
Bore Thermal exp coefficient
-The Other Parameters not directly
related to any one fluid
 Pipe Diameter,
 Bore diameter,
 Design density,
 Design Viscosity,
 Static pressure,
 Flow Coefficient,
 Pipe roughness,
 Segment height,
 Isentropic Exponent
 radius
Page 208
DD based Tool
DTM based Tool
Manual entry
Automatic Calculation
DD based Tool
DTM based Tool
Automatic Calculation
Automatic Calculation
DD based Tool
DTM based Tool
Manual entry
Manual entry
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
13 Example Configuration of Flow for below
specification:
Example:
 SMG810
 Reference Temperature of 25oC (77oF),
 Dynamic compensation
 Applicable standards and installations per ASME MFC 3M or ISO 5167-1 for Uncalibrated
Orifice; Bigger than 2.8Inch Pipe Diameter
 (0.2 < beta < 0.6 Orifice).
Parameter values are summarized in Table 52.
Screens with the parameters are shown in the Figure 24 to Figure 29 in this section.
Table 52 – Flow Configuration parameters
SP 4500,
DP 400,
Temp 850
Parameters in DTM
Units
Parameters
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab5
Pipe Diameter_D
Inch
d ref (cone diam)
3
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab5
Bore Diameter_d
Inch
D ref (pipe diam)
6
Advanced Flow
Setup/Tab4/Nominal (Default)
Values/ Nominal Temperature
C
Tref
25
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab2/Bore
Thermal Exp Coefficient_alphad
Inch/R
Alpha_d
0.00000889
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab2/Bore
Thermal Exp Coefficient_alphaD
Inch/R
Alpha_D
0.00000889
Calculated (not user entry)
R
Tf in Deg R
2021.67
Calculated (not user entry)
R
Tref un Deg R
536.67
Calculated (not user entry)
Inch/R
Calculated (not user entry)
Inch/R
Pipe Diameter at
Flowing
Bore Diameter at
Flowing
Calculated (not user entry)
Beta
Calculated (not user entry)
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab3
Check Manual input (Differential
Pressure) ON, enter Differential
Pressure
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab3
Check Manual input (Static
Pressure) ON, enter Static
Pressure
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab3
Check Manual input
(Temperature) ON, enter
Temperature
Velocity Approach (Ev)
Revision 2.0
6.0792099
3.03960495
0.5
1.032795559
in H20@ 4C
Sim DP
400
Psi
Sim SP
4500
Deg C
Sim PT
850
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 209
Manual Inputs
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab3
Check Manual input (Expansion
Factor_Y) ON, enter Expansion
Factor_Y
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab4
Check Manual input (Density)
ON, enter Density
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab4
Check Manual input (Viscosity)
ON, enter Viscosity
Advanced Flow
Setup/Tab2/Base Density
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab3
Check Manual input ON, enter
Coefficient of Discharge _Cd
Calculated Flow Values
Manual Input Density
Observed Flow Values Manual
Input Density
Manual Y
1
lbm/ft3
Manual Density
5
CentiPoise
Manual Viscosity
Base density for Std vol
flow
3
lbm/ft3
Cd
Advanced Flow
Setup/Tab4/Design Values/
DesignTemperature
Advanced Flow
Setup/Tab4/Design Values/
Design Density
Page 210
0.985
lb/sec
Mass Flow
41.94600989
Kg/sec
Mass Flow
19.02637452
ft3/sec
Vol Flow
8.389201978
ft3/sec
Std Vol Flow
41.94600989
lb/sec
Mass Flow Observed
41.9443
ft3/esc
Vol flow Observed
8.388874
ft3/sec
Std Vol flow Observed
41.9443
Advanced Flow Setup/Tab2/
Advanced Flow
Setup/Tab4/Design Values/
Design Absolute Pressure
1
Auto Density (For
GAS), manual Cd,
viscosity Y
PSI
Design pressure Pd
Deg F
Design Temperature Td
lbm/ft3
Design density
lbm/ft3
Calculated Density
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
14.5
6868 (In the current
DTM tool, if US units
selected in the Units
preference page, then
if you want to send
down value of 68
degF, then enter 68
deg C equivalent in
degF. DTM issue will
be fixed in the next
build)
1
81.00216908
Revision 2.0
Calculated Flow Values w
Auto Density
Observed Flow Values w Auto
Density
lb/sec
Mass Flow
168.7497012
ft3/esc
Vol flow
2.083273856
ft3/sec
Std Vol flow
168.7497012
lb/sec
Mass Flow Observed
ft3/esc
Vol flow Observed
ft3/sec
Std Vol flow Observed
168.9802
2.0796
168.9802
Note:
Tab1 = Unit Configuration Screen
Tab2 = Advanced Flow Setup Screen
Tab3 = Flow Configurations Screen
Tab4 = Process Data Screen
Tab5 = When Algorithm Options = SMV3000, Tab5 = Flow Parameters Screen.
When Algorithm Option = SMV800,
Tab5 = Element Specific Screen for WEDGE, VCone, Conditional Orifice or Gost
Tab6 = Flow Parameters Screen
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 211
Steps:
 Select the Advanced Flow Setup Tab. Setup the desired Unit for the Flow related parameters:
Figure 24 - Advanced Flow Setup Tab
Page 212
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0

Select the Algorithm Options as below, select Next
Figure 25- Algorithm Options
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 213

Select the Input types for various parameters, turn on/off Simulation as needed
Figure 26 - Input types
Page 214
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0

Select Density, Viscosity parameter choices, Design and Reference values
Figure 27 - Density, Viscosity parameters
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 215

Select the Pipe / Bore diameters and other parameters
Figure 28 - Pipe / Bore diameters
Page 216
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0

Review your configurations on the Summary page
Figure 29- Summary page

Select Finish. Flow configuration will be sent to the device. Check the Process variables by
selecting the Process Variables tab
Revision 2.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 217
14 HART DD binary file format compatibility matrix
Table 53 - HART DD binary file format compatibility matrix
"Host - SMV800 - HART DD binary file format" compatibility matrix
Host
DD file format to be used
Experion R410
Fm8
Experion R400 to R300
Fm6
Experion below R300
fms
FDM R440 and above
Fm8
Refer the respective Tools’ User Manual for details on loading the DD file on these Tools.
Page 218
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
15 Security
15.1 How to report a security vulnerability
For the purpose of submission, security vulnerability is defined as a software defect or weakness that
can be exploited to reduce the operational or security capabilities of the software or device.
Honeywell investigates all reports of security vulnerabilities affecting Honeywell products and
services.
To report potential security vulnerability against any Honeywell product, please follow the
instructions at:
https://honeywell.com/pages/vulnerabilityreporting.aspx
Submit the requested information to Honeywell using one of the following methods:
Revision 2.0

• Send an email to security@honeywell.com.
or

Contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Centre (CCC) or
Honeywell Technical Assistance Centre (TAC) listed in the “Support and Contact
information” section of this document.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 219
16 Troubleshooting
16.1 Diagnostic Messages for DE transmitters
The diagnostic text messages that can be displayed on the SCT, SFC
or on a TPS/TDC system are listed in the following tables. A description of the probable
cause and suggested action to be taken are listed also to help in troubleshooting error
conditions.
Diagnostic Messages
The messages are grouped in tables according to the status message categories.
Table 54 - Lists Critical status diagnostic messages
Table 55 - Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table
Table 56 - Communication Status Message Table
Table 57 - Information Message Table
Table 58 - SFC Diagnostic Message Table
column provides the location of the SMV status. If you are using one of
the diagnostic tools (SCT, SFC or Universal Station) that contains an earlier software
version, you may see the diagnostic messages displayed as these SMV Status numbers.
Diagnostic Message
The SCT Status Message column shows the text which appears in the Status tab window
when the SCT is in the on-line mode and connected to the SMV control loop.
The SFC Display Message column shows the text which appears when the SFC is
connected to the SMV control loop and the [STAT] key is pressed.
TDC Display Status Message column shows the text which appears on a TPS/TDC
Universal Station.
Some messages and information in the tables are specific to the SCT or SFC and are
noted.
Page 220
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2.0
DE Diagnostic Messages,
Continued
Table 54 - Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table
SMV Status
7-0
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message
A/D Failure PV3
STATUS
TAG
ID.#
TDC Status Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
A/D FAILURE PV3
A/D circuit for PV3 input has
failed.
• Cycle transmitter power
OFF/ON.
A/D FAILURE PV3
• Replace electronics module.
7-1
1-1
Characterization Fault
PV3
STATUS
TAG
ID.#
CHAR. FAULT PV3
CHAR. FAULT PV3
Characterization PROM STATUS
TAG ID.
Fault or Bad Checksum CHAR PROM FAULT
Characterization data for PV3 is
bad.
• Cycle transmitter power
OFF/ON.
• Replace electronics module.
CHAR PROM FAULT
Characterization data is bad.
Replace PROM with an identical
PROM. Verify PROM serial
number:
SCT – Select Device tab card.
1-3
DAC Compensation
Fault Error Detected
STATUS
1-4
NVM Fault PV1
STATUS
1-5
RAM Fault
TAG
ID.#
DAC COMP FAULT
DAC COMP FAULT
TAG
ID.#
DAC temperature compensation
is out of range.
SFC – Press [CONF] and
[σ NEXT]
keys.
Replace electronics module.
NVM FAULT
PV1 nonvolatile memory fault.
Replace electronics module.
RAM FAULT
RAM has failed
Replace electronics module
PROM has failed.
Replace PROM.
PAC circuit has failed.
Replace electronics module.
NVM FAULT
STATUS
TAG
ID.
RAM FAULT
1-6
PROM Fault
STATUS
TAG
ID.
PROM FAULT
PROM FAULT
1-7
PAC Fault
STATUS
TAG
ID.
PAC FAULT
PAC FAULT
Continued on next page
Revision1.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 221
DE Diagnostic Messages,
Continued
SMV Status
2-4
2-5
Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table, Continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message
Meter Body Overload
STATUS
TAG ID.#
M. B. OVERLOAD
OR
OR
Meter Body Fault:
TAG ID.#
Pressure > Specified limit STATUS
over URL
METER BODY FAULT
8-3
Input Open PV3
1-2
Input Suspect
TDC Status Message Possible Cause
What to Do
M. B. OVERLOAD OR Differential Pressure or
Static Pressure input is
greater than the
specified limit over
METER BODY FAULT URL for PV1 and PV2
respectively
• Wait for PV1 and PV2 range to return
to normal.
• Meter body may have been damaged.
Check the transmitter for accuracy
and linearity. Replace meter body
center and recalibrate if needed.
STATUS
TAG
I D . INPUT OPEN PV3
OUTP 1
INPUT OPEN PV3
SUSPECT INPUT
TAG ID.
SUSPECT INPUT
3-1
Input Suspect PV2
OUTP 1
TAG ID.
SUSPCT INPUT PV2
SUSPCT INPUT PV2
Temperature input TC
or RTD is open.
Replace the thermocouple or RTD.
PV1 or sensor
temperature input data
seems wrong. Could be
a process problem, but
it could also be a meter
body or electronics
module problem.
• Cycle transmitter power OFF/ON.
• Put transmitter in PV1 output mode
check transmitter status. Diagnostic
messages should identify where
problem is. If no other diagnostic
message is given, condition is most
likely meter body related.
PV2 Input data seems
wrong. Could be a
process problem, but it
could also be a meter
body or electronics
module problem.
• Check installation and replace meter
body center section. If condition
persists, replace electronics module.
• Cycle transmitter power OFF/ON.
• Put transmitter in PV2 output mode
and check transmitter status.
Diagnostic messages should identify
where problem is. If no other
diagnostic message is given,
condition is most likely meter body
related.
• Check installation and replace meter
body center section. If condition
persists, replace electronics module.
Page 222
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
DE Diagnostic Messages,
Continued
SMV Status
7-2
3-0
Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table, Continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
Input Suspect PV3
Invalid Database
OUTP 1
TAG ID.
SUSPCT INPUT PV3
-
INVALID DATABASE
TAG NO.
INVALID DATABASE
Possible Cause
What to Do
PV3 Input data seems wrong.
Sensor reading is extremely
erratic.
Could be a process problem, but
it could also be a temperature
sensor or electronics module
problem.
The temperature sensor board is
in the Terminal block
Transmitter database was
incorrect at power-up.
• Cycle transmitter power OFF/ON.
• Check sensor leads for weak
area that may be ready to break
or loose connection.
• Try communicating again.
7-4
NVM Fault PV3
STATUS
TAG ID.
NVM FAULT PV3
NVM FAULT PV3
PV3 nonvolatile memory fault.
• Verify database configuration, and
then manually update non-volatile
memory.
Replace electronics module.
8-4
Over Range PV3
STATUS
TAG ID.
OVERRANGE PV3
OVERRANGE PV3
Process temperature exceeds
PV3 range.
• Check process temperature.
Reduce temperature, if required.
9-0
PV4 (Flow) Algorithm
Parameters Invalid
3-3
PV4 in failsafe
STATUS
TAG ID.#
ALGPARM INVALID
-
STATUS 9- 0
Configuration for selected
equation is not complete.
STATUS 3- 3
An algorithm diagnostic has
determined the flow to be invalid.
• Replace temperature sensor, if
needed.
Check the flow configuration using
the SCT flow compensation
wizard.
• Resolve the conditions causing
the other diagnostic message.
• Check all flow configuration
parameters.
Continued on next page
Revision1.0
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Page 223
DE Diagnostic Messages,
Continued
Table 55 - Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table
SMV Status
9-3
9-4
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
TAG ID.#
Bad AP Compensation STATUS
PV4
BAD AP COMP PV4
TAG ID.#
Bad PT Compensation STATUS
PV4
BAD PT COMP PV4
BAD AP COMP PV4
BAD PT COMP PV4
Possible Cause
What to Do
Problem with absolute/gauge
pressure input PV2 or input
processing circuitry for PV2.
• Verify that absolute/gauge
pressure input is correct for
selected flow equation.
Problem with process temperature
input PV3, input processing
circuitry for PV3, or PV4 algorithm
parameter data.
• If error persists, replace
transmitter.
• Verify that process temperature
input is correct.
• Verify open/defective
temperature sensor.
• Correct process temperature
measurement.
• Check for temperature limits
exceeded in viscosity or density
configuration.
• Check design temperature value
for PV4 standard gas algorithm.
2-6
Corrects Reset PV1
STATUS
TAG ID.#
CORRECTS RST PV1
CORRECTS RST PV1
4-6
Corrects Reset PV2
STATUS
TAG ID.#
CORRECTS RST PV2
CORRECTS RST PV2
TAG ID.#
Corrects Active on PV3 STATUS
CORR. ACTIVE PV3
CORR. ACTIVE PV3
8-6
224
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
All calibration “CORRECTS” were
deleted and data was reset for PV1
range.
All calibration “CORRECTS” were
deleted and data was reset.
Recalibrate PV1 (DP) range.
Recalibrate PV2 (SP) range.
Process temperature PV3 has
Nothing – or do a reset corrects
been calibrated and is now different
than
factory default (uncalibrated).
Revision 1
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
SMV Status
3-6
Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table , continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Density temperature or pressure out of range
Either the temperature (PV3) or
the pressure (PV2) is not within
the boundaries of SMV steam
equation.
Check to see if the PV
measurement is correct.
STATUS 3- 6
The SMV steam equation is
defined for pressures between 8
and 3000 psia, and temperature
between saturation and 1500 °F,
except above 2000 psia.
2-2
4-2
8-2
Revision1.0
Excess Span Correct
PV1
Or
S p an Correction is Out
of Limits
Excess Span Correct
PV2
STATUS
Excess Span Correct
PV3
STATUS
TAG ID.#
EX. SPAN COR PV1
EX . SPAN COR PV1
STATUS
TAG ID.#
EX. SPAN COR PV2
EX. SPAN COR PV2
TAG ID.#
EX. SPAN COR PV3
EX. SPAN COR PV3
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
SPAN correction factor is outside
acceptable limits for PV1 range.
Could be that transmitter was in
input or output mode during a
CORRECT procedure.
• Verify calibration.
SPAN correction factor is outside
acceptable limits for PV2 range.
Could be that transmitter was in
input or output mode during a
CORRECT procedure.
• Verify calibration.
SPAN correction factor is outside
acceptable limits for PV3 range.
• Verify calibration.
Page 225
• If error persists, call the
Solutions Support Center
• If error persists, call the
Solutions Support Center
• If error persists, call the
Solutions Support Center
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table , continued
SMV Status
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message
TDC Status Message
2-1
Excess Zero Correct STATUS
TAG ID.#
PV1
EX . ZERO COR PV1
Or
Zero Correction is Out of
Limits
EX . ZERO COR PV1 ZERO correction factor is outside • Verify calibration.
acceptable limits for PV1 range.
• If error persists, call the
Could be that transmitter was in
Solutions Support Center
input or output mode during a
CORRECT procedure.
4-1
8-1
9-5
Excess Zero Correct
PV2
STATUS
Excess Zero Correct
PV3
STATUS
In Cutoff PV4
STATUS
TAG ID.#
EX . ZERO COR PV2
TAG ID.#
EX . ZERO COR PV3
TAG ID.#
Input Mode PV1 (DP)
STATUS
TAG ID.#
INPUT MODE PV1
What to Do
EX . ZERO COR PV2 ZERO correction factor is outside • Verify calibration.
acceptable limits for PV2 range.
• If error persists, call the
Could be that transmitter was in
Solutions Support Center
input or output mode during a
CORRECT procedure.
EX . ZERO COR PV3 ZERO correction factor is outside • Verify calibration.
acceptable limits for PV3 range.
• If error persists, call the
Solutions Support Center
IN CUTOFF PV4
IN CUTOFF PV4
5-4
Possible Cause
INPUT MODE PV1
Calculated flow rate is within
configured low and high limits for
PV4 low flow cutoff.
Nothing – wait for flow rate to
exceed configured high limit.
Transmitter is simulating input for
PV1.
Exit Input mode:
Verify that flow rate is in cutoff.
SCT – Press “Clear Input Mode”
button on the DP InCal tab.
SFC – Press [ S H I F T ] ,
and [ C L R ] keys.
226
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
[INPUT],
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
SMV Status
5-5
Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table , continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
Input Mode PV2 (AP)
STATUS
TAG ID.#
INPUT MODE PV2
INPUT MODE PV2
5-6
Input Mode PV3 (Temp) STATUS
TAG ID.#
INPUT MODE PV3
INPUT MODE PV3
5-7
TAG ID.#
Input Mode PV4 (Flow) STATUS
INPUT MODE PV4
2-0
Meter Body Sensor Over STATUS
TAG ID.#
Temperature
M. B. OVERTEMP
2-7
No DAC Temp Comp STATUS
TAG ID.#
Or
NO DAC TEMPCOMP
DAC Temperature
Compensation data is
corrupt
Revision1.0
INPUT MODE PV4
M. B. OVERTEMP
NO DAC TEMP COMP
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Possible Cause
What to Do
Transmitter is simulating input
for PV2.
Exit Input mode:
Transmitter is simulating input
for PV3.
Transmitter is simulating input
for PV4.
Sensor temperature is too high
(>125 °C). Accuracy and life
span may decrease if it remains
high.
Failed DAC.
Page 227
SCT – Press “Clear Input Mode”
button on the AP InCal tab.
SFC – Press [ S H I F T ] ,
[ C L R ] keys.
Exit Input mode:
[INPUT],
and
SCT – Press “Clear Input Mode”
button on the TEMP InCal tab.
SFC – Press [ S H I F T ] ,
[ C L R ] keys.
Exit Input mode:
[INPUT],
and
SCT – Press “Clear Input Mode”
button on the FLOW InCal tab.
SFC – Press [ S H I F T ] , [ I N P U T ] , and
[ C L R ] keys.
Take steps to insulate meter body
from temperature source.
Replace electronics module.
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
SMV Status
6-4
6-5
6-6
Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table , Continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
TAG ID.#
Output Mode PV1 (DP) STATUS
OUTPUT MODE PV1
TAG ID.#
Output Mode PV2 (SP) STATUS
OUTPUT MODE PV2
Output Mode PV3
(Temp)
STATUS
TAG ID #
OUTPUT MODE PV1
OUTPUT MODE PV2
OUTPUT MODE PV3
OUTPUT MODE PV3
Possible Cause
What to Do
Analog transmitter is operating as
a current source for PV1 output.
Exit Output Mode:
Analog transmitter is operating as
a current source for PV2 output.
Analog transmitter is operating as
a current source for PV3 output.
SCT – Press “Clear Output Mode”
button on the DP OutCal tab.
SFC – Press [ O U T P U T ] and [ C L R ]
keys.
Exit Output Mode:
SCT – Press “Clear Output Mode”
button on the AP OutCal tab.
SFC – Press [ O U T P U T ] and [ C L R ]
keys.
Exit Output Mode:
SCT – Press “Clear Output Mode”
button on the TEMP OutCal tab.
SFC – Press [ O U T P U T ] and [ C L R ]
keys.
6-7
Output Mode PV4 (Flow) STATUS
TAG ID.#
OUTPUT MODE PV4
OUTPUT MODE PV4
Analog transmitter is operating as
a current source for PV4 output.
Exit Output Mode:
SCT – Press “Clear Output Mode”
button on the FLOW OutCal tab.
SFC – Press [ O U T P U T ] and [ C L R ]
keys.
3-7
228
PV4 Independent
variable out of range
-
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
STATUS 3- 7
For R250 Laminar Flow
transmitters only. Asserted when
a PV is not within the range of a
term in the laminar Flow equation.
Revision 1
• Check the value of every PV
against the ranges in the
Laminar Flow equation.
• Redefine the equation, if
necessary.
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
SMV Status
9-7
8-7
Revision1.0
Non-Critical Status Diagnostic Message Table , Continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message
Reynolds Number is Out
of Range
STATUS 9-7
-
Sensor Mismatch PV3 SAVE/RESTORE
TYPE MI SMATCH
SNSR MISMTCH PV3
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Possible Cause
What to Do
The high or low Reynolds number
limit was exceeded.
• Verify high or low Reynolds
number limit.
Number of wires selected does
not match number of sensor wires
physically connected to the
transmitter.
Page 229
• Calculate Reynolds number for
flow conditions causing the
message.
Check sensor wiring and type.
DE Diagnostic Messages,
Table 56 - Communication Status Message Table
SMV Status
-
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message TDC Status Message Possible Cause
Command Aborted
TAG NO.
-
Communications aborted.
-
SFC – Pressed [ C L R ] key during
communications operation.
Communications unsuccessful.
COMM ABORTED
-
Communication Error
TAG NO.
Upload failed
END AROUND ERR
-
Download Failed
SAVE/RESTORE
RESTORE FAILED
-
-
Invalid Response
TAG NO.
-
ILLEGAL RESPONSE
-
230
Illegal operation
URV 3. T A G I D .
INVALID REQUEST
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
-
Database restore or download
function failed due to a problem
with the current configuration or a
communications error.
The transmitter did not respond
properly since the response was
not recognizable. The message
was probably corrupted by external
influences. Transmitter sent illegal
response to SCT or SFC.
Requesting transmitter to correct or
set its URV to a value that results in
too small a span, or correct its LRV
or URV while in input or output
mode.
SFC – Keystroke is not valid for
given transmitter.
What to Do
Retry aborted operation.
• Check loop wiring and
STC/SFC connections.
• If error persists, replace
transmitter electronics module.
Check transmitter and try again.
Try communicating again.
• Check that correct URV
calibration pressure is being
applied to transmitter, or that
transmitter is not in input or
output mode.
Check that keystroke is
applicable
given
transmitter.
SCT – The requested transaction is for
Make
sure
the device version is
not supported by the transmitter.
compatible with the
currentrelease of the SCT 3000.
Revision 1
DE Diagnostic Messages,
continued
SMV Status
-
Communication Status Message Table , continued
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message
-
STATUS
TAG
ID.
TDC Status Message Possible Cause
-
NACK RESPONSE
-
-
TAG
NO.
-
FAILED COMM CHK
Transmitter sent a negative
response because it could not
process one or more commands.
SFC failed a communications
diagnostic check. Could be an
SFC electronic problem or a faulty
or dead communication loop.
What to Do
Check configuration and try again.
• Check polarity and try again.
• Press [stat] key and do any
corrective action required and try
again.
• Check communication loop.
-
-
TAG
NO.
-
Either there is too much
resistance in loop (open circuit),
voltage is too low, or both.
-
No response from transmitter.
Could be transmitter or loop
failure.
HI RES/LO VOLT
-
-
TAG
NO.
NO XMTR RESPONSE
• Replace SFC.
• Check polarity, wiring, and
power supply. There must be 11
volts minimum at transmitter to
permit operation.
• Check for defective or
misapplied capacitive or inductive
devices (filters).
• Try communicating again.
• Check that transmitter’s loop
integrity has been maintained, that
SCT or SFC is connected
properly, and that loop resistance
is at least 250Ù.
SCT – Select Tag ID from the
View pull down menu.
SFC – Press [ID] key and do any
corrective action required and try
again.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 231
DE Diagnostic Messages, continued
Table 57 - Information Message Table
SMV Status
SCT Status Message
6-3
2 Wire TC PV3
STATUS
2 WIRE TC PV3
6-0
2 Wire RTD PV3
STATUS
2 WIRE RTD PV3
PV3 input is being
provided by 2-wire RTD
type.
6-1
3 Wire RTD PV3
STATUS
3 WIRE RTD PV3
PV3 input is being
provided by 3-wire RTD
type.
6-2
4 Wire RTD PV3
STATUS
4-3
SFC Display
Message
TAG
ID.
2 WIRE TC PV3
TAG
ID.
2 WIRE RTD PV3
TAG
ID.
3 WIRE RTD PV3
TDC Status
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
PV3 input is being
Nothing – Information only. However, this may
provided by 2-wire
indicate a problem if sensor type does not
Thermocouple (T/C) type. match the sensor physically connected to
transmitter.
PV3 input is being
provided by 4-wire RTD
type.
Nothing – Information only. However, this may
indicate a problem if number of wires
displayed does not match number of RTD
leads physically connected to transmitter; or if
sensor
should beonly.
thermocouple.
Nothingtype
– Information
However, this may
indicate a problem if number of wires
displayed does not match number of RTD
leads physically connected to transmitter; or if
sensor
should beonly.
thermocouple.
Nothingtype
– Information
However, this may
TAG
ID.
4 WIRE RTD PV3
4 WIRE RTD PV3
PV2 Sensor = AP
-
STATUS 4- 3
4-4
PV2 Sensor = GP
-
STATUS 4-4
Sensor type for the
current SMV is gauge
pressure.
Nothing – Information only.
-
Write Protected
URV 1 . TAG ID .
WRITE PROTECTED
-
The value could not be
written because the
transmitter is write
protected.
The hardware jumper within the device must
be repositioned in order to permit write
operations.
232
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Sensor type for the
current SMV is absolute
pressure.
indicate a problem if number of wires
displayed does not match number of RTD
leads physically connected to transmitter; or if
sensor
should beonly.
thermocouple.
Nothingtype
– Information
Revision 1
DE Diagnostic Messages, continued
Table 58 - SFC Diagnostic Message Table
SMV Status
SCT Status Message SFC Display Message
TDC Status Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Applicable PV4 algorithm
parameter is set to default value of
not-a-number (NaN).
Hardware mismatch. Part of
Save/Restore function.
Enter and download desired
value to transmitter database.
-
SFC’s CPU is misconfigured.
Replace SFC.
-
-
ALGPARM Kuser
>RANGE
-
-
-
SAVE/RESTORE
-
H. W. MI SMATCH
-
-
STATUS
TAG
ID.
None – SFC tried to restore as
much of database as possible.
NVM ON SEE MAN
-
-
SAVE/RESTORE
OPTION MISMATCH
-
On a database restore, one or
more options do not match.
None – SFC tried to restore as
much of database as possible.
-
-
STATUS
-
Selection is unknown.
Be sure SFC software is latest
version.
-
Not enough resistance in series
with communication loop.
Check sensing resistor and
increase resistance to at least
250Ù.
-
SFC is operating incorrectly.
Try communicating again. If
error still exists, replace SFC.
-
SFC – Value calculation is greater
than display range.
SFC – Press [CLR] key and
start again. Be sure special
units conversion factor is not
greater than display range.
SCT – The entered value is not
within the valid range.
SCT – Enter a value within the
range.
TAG
ID.
UNKNOWN
-
-
TAG
NO.
LOW LOOP RES
-
-
TAG NO.
SFC FAULT
-
-
URV 1 . T A G I D .
>RANGE “H20 _39F
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 233
-
-
234
Screen Number Failed - No Response from
Device. Error Code
(105).
-
Custom Screen Tag
Failed - No Response
from Device. Error
Code (105).
-
-
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
No Display present on this device
or Display is not connected
properly
If there is no Display on the
device, this is expected
message from the device.
No Display present on this device
or Display is not connected
properly
If the display is present, then
make sure that the display is
plugged in correctly, no missed
pins or no loose connections
f there is no Display on the
device, this is expected
message from the device.
If the display is present, then
make sure that the display is
plugged in correctly, no missed
pins or no loose connections
Revision 1
16.2 HART Diagnostic Messages
Table 59 to Table 63 lists and describes the HART critical and non-critical HART diagnostic details.
Table 59 – HART Critical Details
Additional Status
Display
Status
One or more
of:
HART
DD/DTM
Tools
Device Status
DAC Failure
(When a Critical Device
Status is set, one or more
of the following statuses
will be set in the Additional
Status menu to provide
clarification of the cause of
the failure)
DAC Failure:
Temp Above 140C
Comm Module
Comm Module
Temp
Under Curr Status
Over Curr Status
Packet Error
Details/Resolutions
The temperature measured in the
Communications module has exceeded
140C, which exceeds the specification for
this device. The module is damaged.
Other modules may also be damaged.
Resolution:
Verify the environmental temperature is
within specifications for the device. Reset
the device. If problem persists, replace the
Electronics Module. Other modules
exposed to excess environmental
temperature may also need to be
replaced.
The output current of the device is below
the specification.
Resolution:
Verify that the loop supply voltage and
loop resistance is within spec. Reset the
device. If problem persists, replace the
Electronics Module.
The output current of the device exceeds
the specification.
Resolution:
Verify that the loop supply voltage and
loop resistance is within spec. Reset the
device. If problem persists, replace the
Electronics Module.
The Electronics module has detected
packet errors within the communications
packets for inter-processor
communications (SPI). The module
cannot communicate to the other modules
within the device.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 235
SPI Failure
Communication:
DAC Write Failure
Comm Module
Config Data
Corrupt
Comm NVM:
Common DB Corrupt
Vital Config DB
Corrupt
General Config DB
Corrupt
Comm Module
SIL Diagn
Failure
Communication:
RAM Failure
ROM Failure
Program Flow Failure
The inter-processor communications
section (SPI) of the Electronics module
has a critical failure and the module
cannot communicate to the other modules
within the device.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC)
has failed and the analog output cannot
be set to the calculated value.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
The Electronics module is reporting
corruption in the common parameters
portion of the database in the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM).
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics module
The Electronics module is reporting
corruption in the vital configuration
parameters portion of the database in the
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics module
The Electronics module is reporting
corruption in the general configuration
parameters portion of the database in the
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics module
Electronics module is reporting corruption
in the Random Access Memory (RAM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
Electronics module is reporting corruption
in the Read-only Memory (ROM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
Electronics module is reporting corruption
in the program code flow
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics Module.
236
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
One or more
of:
Meter Body
Meter Body
Comm
Temp Sensor
Board
Temp Input
Temp Sensor
Comm
Sensor:
Pres Sens failure
Sensor Critical
Failure
Pres NVM Corrupt
Pres Sens Comm
timeout
TempSensing Failure
Temp Calib Corrupt
Temp Sensor Comm
Timeout
Temperature:
Sensor NVM Corrupt
Sensor Char CRC
Failure
Sensor/CJ Bad
Pressure module is reporting a failure of
the pressure sensing measurement
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body.
Pressure module is reporting corruption
of the Non-Volatile Memory data (NVM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body.
Communications module is unable to
communicate with the Pressure module
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body.
Temperature module is reporting a failure
in the temperature sensing measurement
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is reporting
corruption in the temperature Calibration
data
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Communications module is unable to
communicate with the Temperature
module
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module
Temperature module is reporting
corruption of the Non-Volatile Memory
data (NVM )
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is reporting
corruption in the temperature
Characterization data
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is detecting an issue
with the process temperature sensor input
or the Internal Cold Junction Temperature
measurement. See additional statuses to
determine the exact issue.
Resolution:
See additional statuses for resolution.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 237
Suspect Input
One or more
of:
Meter Body
Meter Body
Comm
Temp Sensor
Board
Temp Input
Temp Sensor
Comm
Sensor Critical
Failure
Sensor RAM Failure
Sensor ROM Failure
Sensor Flow Failure
Temperature:
Sensor Bad
Temperature module is detecting an issue
with the process temperature sensor
input. The temperature sensor input may
be out of range for the sensor type or the
input may be open.
Resolution:
Check the temperature sensor. If the
sensor has failed, replace the sensor.
If the process temperature exceeds the
range of the current sensor type, either
correct the process to an in-range
temperature or switch to a different sensor
type which is ranged for the expected
process temperature range.
After resolving the issue, reset the device.
If the problem persists, replace the
Temperature Module.
Temperature module is reporting
corruption in the Random Access Memory
(RAM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is reporting corruption
in the Read-only Memory (ROM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is reporting
corruption in the processing code flow
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is detecting an issue
with the process temperature sensor
input. The temperature sensor input may
be out of range for the sensor type or the
input may be open.
Resolution:
Check the temperature sensor. If the
sensor has failed, replace the sensor.
If the process temperature exceeds the
range of the current sensor type, either
correct the process to an in-range
temperature or switch to a different sensor
type which is ranged for the expected
process temperature range.
After resolving the issue, reset the device.
If the problem persists, replace the
Temperature Module.
238
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
CJ Bad
One or more
of:
Sensor Critical
Failure
Meter Body
Meter Body
Comm
Temp Sensor
Board
Temp Input
Temp Sensor
Comm
Sensor Input Failure
Pressure:
Meter Body Failure
Sensor Charact
Corrupt
Suspect Input
Temperature module is detecting an issue
with the cold junction temperature input.
The cold junction temperature may be out
of range for the device or the cold junction
sensing section is faulty
Resolution:
Verify that the cold junction sensor within
the Temperature Terminal board is not
outside of the operating temperature limits
(-40 to 85 degrees C). If it is outside the
limit, move the device to a location within
the operating limits and reset the device to
clear the status.
Otherwise, the cold junction temperature
sensing section may have failed. Reset
the device. If the problem persists, replace
the Temperature Module.
Temperature module is detecting an issue
with the process temperature sensor
input. The temperature sensor input may
be out of range for the sensor type or the
input may be open.
Resolution:
Check the temperature sensor. If the
sensor has failed, replace the sensor.
If the process temperature exceeds the
range of the current sensor type, either
correct the process to an in-range
temperature or switch to a different sensor
type which is ranged for the expected
process temperature range.
After resolving the issue, reset the device.
If the problem persists, replace the
Temperature Module.
Pressure module is reporting a critical
failure of the pressure sensing
measurement within the Meter Body,
which may be caused by one of the
following:

Meter body failure

Sensor communication timeout

Sensor firmware flow failure
.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body.
Pressure module is reporting corruption in
the Pressure Characterization data
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body
Pressure, Meter Body Temperature and/or
Static Pressure input are extremely out of
range such that the value is suspect.
Resolution:
Verify that all inputs are within
specifications. Reset the device. If the
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 239
Sensor RAM Corrupt
One or more
of:
Meter Body
Meter Body
Comm
Temp Sensor
Board
Temp Input
Temp Sensor
Comm
Sensor Critical
Failure
Sensor Code Corrupt
Sensor Flow Failure
Pressure:
Sensor RAM DB
Failure
Pressure:
DP/MBT/SP/PT/Flow
Bad
Bad DP
Bad MBT
Bad SP
Bad PT
240
problem persists, replace the Meter Body.
Pressure module is reporting corruption in
the Random Access Memory (RAM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter Body
Pressure module is reporting corruption in
sensor firmware
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
Pressure module is reporting corruption in
the processing code flow
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
Pressure module is reporting corruption in
the database in the Random Access
Memory (RAM)
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
One of process inputs to the device and/or
the flow calculation has failed. Refer to
other detailed status bits for more detail.
Resolution:
Refer to the additional detailed status bits
for resolution.
The Differential Pressure input
measurement is far outside the specified
range. The meter body may be damaged.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
The Meter body Temperature
measurement is far outside the specified
range. The meter body may be damaged.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
The Static Pressure input measurement is
far outside the specified range. The meter
body may be damaged.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Meter body.
The Process Temperature input
measurement is far outside the specified
range. The Temperature module may be
damaged.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Bad FLOW
One or more
of:
Sensor Critical
Failure
Meter Body
Meter Body
Comm
Temp Sensor
Board
Temp Input
Temp Sensor
Comm
Comm Module
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature Module.
The Flow calculation has failed. Possible
causes are:

Bad DP/SP/MBT/PT input

Invalid flow algorithm
configuration

Firmware flow control fault
Resolution:
If Bad DP/MBT/SP/PT status is set, follow
the resolution suggested.
If Bad Flow is a result of an invalid
algorithm configuration other statuses will
be set to clarify the issue. Correct the
configuration parameters and recheck the
calculated flow. A power cycle is
recommended here to reset and get
correct reading.
If a Flow Control Fault is set, reset the
device. If the problem persists, replace the
Meter Body.
The voltage supply to the
Communications Module is outside of the
operational range of 2.8 to 3.2 volts.
Comm Vcc
Fault
Resolution:
Verify that the loop voltage and loop
resistor are within specifications.
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Communications Module.
Table 60 - Non-Critical 1 Diagnostic Details
Additional Status
Display
Status
HART
DD/DTM
Tools
Device Status
(When a Non-Critical
Device Status is set, one or
more of the following
statuses will be set in the
Additional Status menu to
provide clarification of the
cause of the failure)
Display:
Disp Comm Failure
Display Setup
Local Display
Disp NVM Corrupt
Revision 2
Details/Resolutions
The Display has been disconnected or
configuration data has been corrupted.
Resolution:
Secure Display connections and recheck.
If problem persists, reset the device. If the
problem still persists, replace the Display.
The Local Display is reporting corruption
of the Non-Volatile Memory data (NVM )
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Display module.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 241
Comm NVM:
Display View Config
DB Corrupt
Display Common DB
Config Corrupt
Display View 1 Corrupt
Display View 2 Corrupt
Display View 3 Corrupt
Display View 4 Corrupt
Display View 5 Corrupt
Display View 6 Corrupt
Display View 7 Corrupt
Display View 8 Corrupt
DAC Failure:
Temp Above 100C
Comm NVM:
Comm Sec NC
Failure
Config Change DB
Corrupt
Adv Diag DB Corrupt
The configuration database in the
Electronics module containing the Display
View configurations has been corrupted.
Resolution:
Check additional statuses to check which
of the Display Views is affected.
Reconfigure the affected views. If
problem persists, replace the Electronics
module and/or the Display module.
The configuration database in the
Electronics module containing the
common Display configurations has been
corrupted.
Resolution:
Reconfigure the Display setup. If problem
persists, replace the Electronics module
and/or the Display module.
If the Display View Config CB Corrupt
status is set, one or more of these detail
statuses will be set to identify the affected
View parameters.
Resolution:
Reconfigure the Display setup. If problem
persists, replace the Electronics module
and/or the Display module.
The temperature measured in the
Communications module has exceeded
100C, which exceeds the specification for
this device. The module is in danger of
being damaged.
Resolution:
Verify the environmental temperature is
within specifications for the device.
The Electronics module is reporting
corruption in the configuration changed
parameters portion of the database in the
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics module.
The Electronics module is reporting
corruption in the Advanced Diagnostics
parameters portion of the database in the
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Electronics module.
242
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Temperature:
CJ CT Delta Warning
Temp ADC Ref Failure
One or more
of:
Temp Cal
Correct
DP Zero
Correct
DP Span
Correct
Meter Body
Input
Temp ADC0 Range
Failure
Sensing Sec
NC Failure
Temp ADC1 Range
Failure
The difference between the Internal Cold
Junction Temperature (CJ) and the
Processor Core Temperature (CT)
measured in the Temperature module is
greater than 10 degrees C.
Resolution:
Verify that the environmental temperature
is within specifications.
The reference voltage measurement in
one of the two Analog to Digital Converter
(ADC) parts in the Temperature module is
not operating correctly. The process
temperature measurement may be
affected.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature module.
The first Analog to Digital Converter
(ADC) part in the Temperature module is
not operating correctly. The process
temperature measurement may be
affected.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature module.
The second Analog to Digital Converter
(ADC) parts in the Temperature module is
not operating correctly. The process
temperature measurement may be
affected.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature module.
The Process Temperature input exceeds
the Temperature Upper Range Limit
(URL) as determined by the configured
Sensor Type.
Temp Sensor Over
Temperature
Temperature:
Excess Cal Correction
Resolution:
Check the process temperature. If the
process temperature exceeds the range of
the current sensor type, either correct the
process to an in-range temperature or
switch to a different sensor type which is
ranged for the expected process
temperature range.
The temperature calibration correction
performed by the user is excessive for the
given inputs. Temperature LRV Corrects,
URV Corrects, or both may have caused
the issue.
Resolution:
Perform a Reset Corrects on the
Temperature Calibration to reset the User
calibration to factory default. If required,
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 243
Character Calc Error
Pressure:
Excess Zero
Correction
Excess Span
Correction
Char Calc Error
Sensor Overload
244
repeat the temperature calibration being
careful to ensure that inputs during
calibration match the Lower Calibration
Point (LRV Correct) and Upper Calibration
Point (URV Correct) configured under the
Process Temperature Configuration tab
The redundant integrity check on the
Temperature calculation indicates a
failure.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Temperature module.
The DP and/or SP pressure Zero
calibration or LRV correction performed by
the user is excessive for the given inputs.
Resolution:
Perform a Reset Corrects on the DP
and/or SP Pressure Calibration to reset
the User calibration to factory default. If
required, repeat the Pressure calibrations
being careful to ensure that input during
Zero calibration (Input Correct) is at zero
pressure and input during LRV calibration
(LRV Correct) matches the configured
pressure LRV value.
The DP and/or SP pressure URV
correction performed by the user is
excessive for the given inputs.
Resolution:
Perform a Reset Corrects on the DP
and/or SP Pressure Calibration to reset
the User calibration to factory default. If
required, repeat the Pressure calibrations
being careful to ensure that input during
URV calibration (URV Correct) matches
the configured pressure URV value.
The redundant integrity check on the
Pressure measurement calculation
indicates a failure.
Resolution:
Reset the device. If the problem persists,
replace the Pressure module.
The Meter Body is sensing Differential or
Static pressure greater than the specified
limit of the Upper Range Limit (DP URL)
Resolution:
Check that the process inputs are within
specification for the Differential and Static
Pressure for this device input range.
Correct the excessive pressure input. If
higher pressures are required, a higher
range device type may be required. Meter
Body may have been damaged.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
CJ Range
Analog Out
Mode
PV Out of
Range
The Internal Cold Junction Temperature
(CJ) measured in the Temperature
module is outside of the specified range.
Range limits are -40 to 85 degrees C.
CJ Out of Limit
Resolution:
Verify that the environmental temperature
is within specifications. Temperature
module may have been damaged.
Output current is fixed and not varying
with applied input. Loop current mode
is disabled or Loop Test is active.
Fixed Current
Mode
Resolution:
If Analog output (4-20 ma) control is
required, Enable Loop Current Mode
or exit the Loop Test mode if active.
The process input mapped as
Primary Variable (PV) is outside of
the specified range (LTL to UTL)
PV Out of
Range
Temperature:
Temp No Fact Calib
One or more
of:
Pressure Fac
Cal
Temp Fac Cal
No Fact Calib
Pressure:
Press No Fact Calib
DAC Temp
Comp
No DAC
Compensation
Resolution:
Check the range specifications and, if
required, replace transmitter with one
that has a more suitable range. For
Pressure as Primary Variable, Meter
Body may have been damaged.
Check the transmitter for accuracy
and linearity. Replace Meter Body
and recalibrate if needed.
Factory Calibration for the
Temperature module is missing.
Accuracy will be compromised.
Resolution:
Return the device for Factory
Calibration.
Factory Calibration for the Pressure
module is missing. Accuracy will be
compromised.
Resolution:
Return the device for Factory
Calibration.
No temperature compensation data
exists for analog output calculations.
This data is written during factory
calibration. Loop accuracy may be
slightly compromised. The effect will
be a minor degradation of ambient
temperature influence specifications.
Resolution:
Replace Electronics Module (PWA) to
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 245
achieve the maximum current loop
accuracy or return the device to
factory for DAC compensation.
A User calibration has been
performed for the Process
Temperature input (Temperature LRV
and URV Correct)
Resolution:
The temperature input is precisely
calibrated in the factory prior to
shipping the device. No user
calibration is generally required. To
reset to factory calibration, perform a
Temperature Reset Correct.
Temp Cal
Correct
Table 61 - Non-Critical 2 Diagnostic Details
Additional Status
Display
Status
HART
DD/DTM
Tools
Device Status
LRV Set Err.
Zero Config
Button
Details/Resolutions
SET LRV operation using external
Zero button was rejected.
Resolution:
Verify the inputs are valid for the
intended operation.
SET URV operation using external
Span button was rejected.
URV Set Err.
Span Config
Button
Resolution:
Verify the inputs are valid for the
intended operation.
Calculated Analog output is either
above or below the specified Loop
Current Limits. The transmitter input
is not in specified range.
AO Out of
Range
Resolution:
Check the transmitter input and verify
the configured operating range.
If this is observed frequently, it is an
early indication of critical under/overcurrent failure.
Loop Current
Noise
246
(When a Non-Critical
Device Status is set, one or
more of the following
statuses will be set in the
Additional Status menu to
provide clarification of the
cause of the failure)
Resolution:
Closely monitor the device status for
indications of other failures, or
proactively replace the Electronics
module.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Temperature:
Temp Comm
Temp Unreliab Comm
Sensor
Unreliable
Comm
Pressure:
Meter Body
Comm
Press Unreliable Comm
Either the transmitter is installed in a
noisy environment or internal
communication quality between the
Electronics Module and Temperature
Sensor is degrading.
Resolution:
Call service person.
Either the transmitter is installed in a
noisy environment or internal
communication quality between the
Electronics Module and Pressure
Sensor is degrading.
Resolution:
Call service person.
Device is in Write Protect Mode and
the user tried to change one or more
of the parameters. The write attempts
exceeded the Tamper attempt limit.
Resolution:
Identify source of tampering. If
configuration changes are required,
contact a qualified individual to unlock
the Write Protection Mode feature and
make the required updates.
No DAC calibration has been
performed on the device.
Tamper Alarm
No DAC
Calibration
Communication:
Low Xmtr Supply
Supply Voltage
Low Supply
Voltage
Brownout Status
Revision 2
Resolution:
Perform DAC calibration on the 4-20
ma output for precise analog output
measurement.
The supply voltage to the transmitter
power terminals is too low.
Resolution:
Check that the power supply and loop
resistance are within specification. If
possible, try to increase the voltage
level of the supply. If supply voltage
and loop resistance are adequate and
the problem persists, replace the
Electronics Module.
The supply voltage to the transmitter
terminals has dropped low enough to
cause a warm reset.
Resolution:
Check that the power supply and loop
resistance are within specification. If
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 247
Temperature:
Low Sensor Supply
Pressure:
Low Sensor Supply
possible, try to increase the voltage
level of the supply. If supply voltage
and loop resistance are adequate and
the problem persists, replace the
Electronics Module. If the problem still
persists, replace the Meter Body.
The supply voltage to the
Temperature Sensing section in the
Temperature module is low.
Resolution:
Check that the power supply and loop
resistance are within specification. If
possible, try to increase the voltage
level of the supply. If supply voltage
and loop resistance are adequate and
the problem persists, replace the
Temperature module.
The supply voltage to the Pressure
Sensing section in the Pressure
module is low.
Resolution:
Check that the power supply and loop
resistance are within specification. If
possible, try to increase the voltage
level of the supply. If supply voltage
and loop resistance are adequate and
the problem persists, replace the
Meter Body.
Table 62 - Non-Critical 3 Diagnostic Details
Additional Status
Display
Status
Temp Module
Temp
248
HART
DD/DTM
Tools
Device Status
Sensor Over
Temperature
(When a Non-Critical
Device Status is set, one or
more of the following
statuses will be set in the
Additional Status menu to
provide clarification of the
cause of the failure)
Temperature:
Temp Sensor Over
Temperature
Details/Resolutions
Sensor internal CPU temperature is
going out of limits. Valid Range (-40
to 85 degC).
Resolution:
Power cycle the device. If the problem
still persists make sure the
environment is within spec.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Pressure:
Meter Body
Temp
Press Sensor Over
Temperature
Temperature:
Sensor Input Failure
One or more
of:
Temp Input
Temp Input
TB6
Sensor Input
Open
Temp Input
Rang
Revision 2
Sensor In Low Power
Mode
Sensor Input Out of
Range
The Meter Body temperature is too
high. Accuracy and life span may
decrease if it remains high.
Resolution:
Verify the environmental temperature
is within specification. Take steps to
insulate the Temperature module
from the temperature source.
The
temperature
sensor
(Thermocouple or RTD) has an open
input. The sensor connections may
be disconnected or broken.
Resolution:
Check the temperature sensor
connections for disconnections or
broken wires.
Repair the sensor
connections.
The Temperature sensor module or
Pressure sensor module is in a
special low power mode due to a
Critical Status.
Resolution:
Repair the cause of the Critical
Status.
The temperature sensor is reading
an out of range input value. The
value is outside the limits of
Temperature limits for the
configured sensor type (LTL to
UTL)
Resolution:
Check that the process temperature
input is within the range limits for the
configured temperature sensor (LTL
to UTL). If a higher temperature
range is required, configure and
connect a different sensor type to
meet the requirements of the process.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 249
Flow:
DP Simulation
SP Simulation
DP Simulation Mode
Resolution:
While conducting testing, the status
indicates that simulation is being
used. When testing is completed,
clear the simulation mode for the
inputs to return to true process
measurement.
Simulation mode is enabled for the
Static Pressure process input.
Simulation mode simplifies testing of
flow calculations prior to online
operation.
SP Simulation Mode
Resolution:
While conducting testing, the status
indicates that simulation is being
used. When testing is completed,
clear the simulation mode for the
inputs to return to true process
measurement.
Simulation mode is enabled for the
Process Temperature process input.
Simulation mode simplifies testing of
flow calculations prior to online
operation.
PT Simulation Mode
Resolution:
While conducting testing, the status
indicates that simulation is being
used. When testing is completed,
clear the simulation mode for the
inputs to return to true process
measurement.
Simulation mode is enabled for the
Flow calculation. Simulation mode
simplifies testing of flow output.
DP/SP/PT/Flow
Simulation
Mode
PT Simulation
Flow
Simulation
250
Simulation mode is enabled for the
Differential Pressure process input.
Simulation mode simplifies testing of
flow calculations prior to online
operation.
Flow Simulation Mode
Resolution:
While conducting testing, the status
indicates that simulation is being
used. When testing is completed,
clear the simulation mode for the
inputs to return to true process
measurement.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Flow:
During setup and configuration of the flow
algorithm parameters, insufficient
configuration or invalid parameter values
have been entered which are causing a
division by zero math error in the flow
calculation
Resolution:
Carefully review the flow algorithm
parameter values that have been
configured. Correct any errors. When the
flow is showing a good value and this
status is cleared, reset the device to clear
any Critical Status that may have been
generated due to the bad flow calculation.
Parameters to check:
Divided By Zero
Flow Divide
by 0
Flow
Calculation
Details
For Primary Elements / Algorithms
other than Pitot Tube (Algorithm Option
= SMV3000) and for any Elements
(including Average Pitot Tube,
Algorithm Option = SMV800)
Pipe Diameter D cannot be equal to Bore
Diameter d
d must be > 0
D must be > 0
d<D
For primary element / algorithm = Pitot
Tube (applicable to Algorithm Option =
SMV3000 only)
Pipe Diameter D must be equal to Bore
Diameter d
alpha_D must be equal to alpha_d
D = d and alpha_D = alpha_d
D and d must be > 0
alpha_D and alpha_d must be > 0
Primary Element = Wedge
Segment Height H < D
H and D > 0
Viscosity and Density Coefficeints (as
applicable)
Make sure at least one of the Viscosity
coefficients > 0
Make sure at least one of the Density
coefficients > 0
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 251
During setup and configuration of the flow
algorithm parameters, insufficient
configuration or invalid parameter values
have been entered which are causing a
square root of a negative value math error
in the flow calculation
Flow Sqrt of
Neg
Flow
Direction
Flow SP/PT
Comp
SqRt of Negative
Reverse Flow
PV4 Bad SP/PT
Compensation
Resolution:
Carefully review the flow algorithm
parameter values that have been
configured. Correct any errors. When the
flow is showing a good value and this
status is cleared, reset the device to clear
any Critical Status that may have been
generated due to the bad flow calculation.
The flow calculation is producing a
negative flow value indicating that the flow
is reversed in the element. Note that if
reverse flow is expected, the Reverse Flow
Calculation option must be selected in the
Flow Setup, otherwise any reverse flow
detected will produce a flow value of zero.
Note that, for some Primary Elements and
Algorithm Standards, Reverse Flow may
not be applicable. In this case, flow value
will be zero regardless of the Reverse Flow
Calculation option.
Resolution:
If reverse flow is not expected, review the
flow algorithm parameter values that have
been configured and correct any errors.
One or both of the Static Pressure or
Process Temperature inputs has failed
such that these inputs to the flow
calculation are undetermined. If SP and/or
PT Compensation have been disabled in
configuration of the Flow algorithm, this will
have no effect on the flow calculation.
Otherwise the flow value will be
determined by the AP and/or PT Failsafe
configuration. With Failsafe OFF, the
calculation will use the configured nominal
or design value for the failed input. With
Failsafe ON, the flow calculation will fail
and a Critical Status will be generated.
Resolution:
Check for the cause of the failed input.
After repairing the failure, reset the device
if required.
252
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 1
Table 63 – Extended Device Status Diagnostic Details
Additional Status
Display
Status
HART DD/DTM
Tools
Device Status
Maintenance
Required
Device
Variable Alert
Critical Power
Failure
Revision 2
(When a Non-Critical
Device Status is set, one or
more of the following
statuses will be set in the
Additional Status menu to
provide clarification of the
cause of the failure)
Details/Resolutions
This status is not currently used. It is
reserved for future use.
This status will be set when any of the
process inputs are reported as “bad”.
Resolution: Refer to additional detail
statuses for actions and resolutions.
This status is not currently used. It is
reserved for future use.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 253
16.3 Flow Configuration Diagnostics, Messages and Values
Diagnostics /
message
Method
Internal
Parsing Error
Tool ( DD Host
/ DTM Host )
DD Host
Details/Resolutions
Possible causes:
After performing full Flow Configuration using DTM or 475, user has switched to use a DD
based tool and invokes the Flow Configuration method again.
Resolution: Run the “Flow Default Settings” method under Device Setup/Standard Flow Setup
Menu
During setup and configuration of the flow algorithm parameters, insufficient configuration or
invalid parameter values have been entered which are causing a division by zero math error in
the flow calculation
Resolution:
Carefully review the flow algorithm parameter values that have been configured. Correct any
errors. When the flow is showing a good value and this status is cleared, reset the device to
clear any Critical Status that may have been generated due to the bad flow calculation.
Flow value
reading 0
without any
Statuses
Parameters to check:
DD Host / DTM
Host
For Primary Elements / Algorithms other than Pitot Tube (Algorithm Option = SMV3000)
and for any Elements (including Average Pitot Tube, Algorithm Option = SMV800)
Pipe Diameter D cannot be equal to Bore Diameter d
d must be > 0
D must be > 0
d<D
For primary element / algorithm = Pitot Tube (applicable to Algorithm Option = SMV3000
only)
Page 254
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
Pipe Diameter D must be equal to Bore Diameter d
alpha_D must be equal to alpha_d
D = d and alpha_D = alpha_d
D and d must be > 0
alpha_D and alpha_d must be > 0
Primary Element = Wedge
Segment Height H < D
H and D > 0
Viscosity and Density Coefficients (as applicable)
Make sure at least one of the Viscosity coefficients > 0
Make sure at least one of the Density coefficients > 0
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 255
Appendix A. Custom Configuration sheets
For detailed information on configuration dependencies please refer to The SmartLine Multivariable Configuration sheet, #34-SM-00-06 on the
CD or can be located on our web site at: https://www.honeywellprocess.com/en-US/explore/products/instrumentation/pressure-transmitters/smartmultivariable-transmitters/Pages/default.aspx
SMV800 HART Configuration
Default selections are in boldface.
SMV800 Model Key
Honeywell S.O. Number
SMA810 ___
SMA845 ___
______________________________
SMG870 ___
General Configuration
Message
Polling Address
Loop Current Mode
NAMUR Output
Write Protection
Tag
Descriptor
Long Tag
HART PV
HART SV
HART TV
HART QV
Loop Output Source
Failsafe Direction
_________________________________
____
Enabled ___
Disabled ___
Enabled ___
Disabled ___
Enabled ___
Disabled ___
_________
_________________
_________________________________
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
Upscale ___
Downscale ___
Process Temperature ___
Process Temperature ___
Process Temperature ___
Process Temperature ___
Process Temperature ___
Flow ___
Flow ___
Flow ___
Flow ___
Flow ___
Meter Body Temperature ___
Meter Body Temperature ___
Meter Body Temperature ___
Differential Pressure (DP) Configuration
DP Engineering Unit
inH2O @ 39.2°F ___
mmH2O @ 4°C ___
DP Lower Range Value
DP Upper Range Value
DP Damping (sec)
inH2O @ 60°F ___
inHg @ 0°C ___
__________
__________
_______
mmH2O @ 68°F ___
mbar ___
psi ___
mmH2O @ 4°C ___
inH2O @ 60°F ___
inHg @ 0°C ___
__________
__________
_______
Torr ___
gf/cm2 ___
kPa ___
inH2O @ 68°F ___
mmHg @ 0°C ___
kgf/cm2___
ftH2O @ 68°F ___
psi ___
bar ___
atm ___
Pa ___
MPa ___
Static Pressure (SP) Configuration
SP Engineering Unit
SP Lower Range Value
SP Upper Range Value
SP Damping (sec)
Page 256
inH2O @ 68°F ___
mmHg @ 0°C ___
kgf/cm2___
mmH2O @ 68°F ___
Torr ___
gf/cm2 ___
ftH2O @ 68°F ___
bar ___
Pa ___
mbar ___
kPa ___
inH2O @ 39.2°F ___
atm ___
MPa ___
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Revision 2
Process Temperature (PT) Configuration
PT Sensor Type
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
Engineering Unit
Lower Range Value
Upper Range Value
Damping (sec)
TC/RTD Fault Detection
Fault Detect Latching
Cold Junction Type
Fixed Cold Junction Temperature (°C)
Revision 2
TC Type E ___
TC Type J ___
TC Type K ___
°C ___
__________
__________
_______
On ___
On ___
Internal ___
________
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
TC Type N ___
TC Type T ___
TC Type S ___
°F ___
Off ___
Off ___
External ___
TC Type R ___
TC Type B ___
°R ___
Fixed ___
Page 257
RTD Pt25 ___
RTD Pt100 ___
RTD Pt200 ___
K ___
RTD Pt500 ___
RTD Pt1000 ___
Flow Configuration
Flow
Flow
Flow
Flow
URL
URV
LRV
Output Type
Volume Flow Engineering Unit
Mass Flow Engineering Unit
Flow Kuser Factor
Flow Calibration Factor
Low Flow Cutoff
Low Flow Cutoff Low Limit (%)
Low Flow Cutoff High Limit (%)
PV1 Simulation
PV1 Simulated Value (inH2O @ 39.2°F)
PV2 Simulation
PV2 Simulated Value (psi)
PV3 Simulation
PV3 Simulated Value (°C)
PV4 Simulation
PV4 Simulated Value (in ft3/sec when Volume
Flow, lb/sec when Mass Flow. User selectable
Volume/Mass units when using DTM)
PV2 Failsafe
PV3 Failsafe
Local Atmospheric Pressure (psi)
Algorithm Type
Fluid Type
Fluid Name
Page 258
__________
No Flow Output ___
Ideal Gas Actual Volume Flow ___
Ideal Gas Mass Flow ___
ft3/sec ___
ft3/h ___
ft3/min ___
gal/day ___
lb/sec ___
g/min ___
lb/min ___
g/h ___
__________
__________
On ___
Off ___
__________
__________
On ___
Off ___
__________
On ___
Off ___
__________
On ___
Off ___
__________
On ___
Off ___
Ideal Gas Volume Flow at Standard Condition ___
Steam Mass Flow ___
m3/sec ___
m3/day ___
kg/h ___
t/min ___
bbl/day ___
gal/min ___
lb/h ___
g/sec ___
__________
On___
Off ___
On___
Off ___
__________
SMV800 Method ___
SMV3000 Method ___
Gas ___
Liquid ___
Superheated Steam ___
1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE ___
1-OCTENE ___
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE ___
1-PENTADECANOL ___
1,2,4-TRICHLOROBENZENE
1-PENTANOL ___
1,2-BUTADIENE ___
1-PENTENE ___
1,3,5-TRICHLOROBENZENE ___
1-UNDECANOL ___
1,4-DIOXANE ___
2,2-DIMETHYLBUTANE ___
1,4-HEXADIENE ___
2-METHYL-1-PENTENE ___
1-BUTANAL ___
ACETIC ACID ___
1-BUTANOL ___
ACETONE ___
1-BUTENE ___
ACETONITRILE ___
1-DECANAL ___
ACETYLENE ___
1-DECANOL ___
ACRYLONITRILE ___
1-DECENE ___
AIR ___
1-DODECANOL ___
ALLYL ALCOHOL ___
1-DODECENE ___
AMMONIA ___
1-HEPTANOL ___
ARGON ___
1-HEPTENE ___
BENZALDEHYDE ___
1-HEXADECANOL ___
BENZENE ___
1-HEXENE ___
BENZYL ALCOHOL ___
1-NONANAL ___
BIPHENYL ___
1-NONANOL ___
CARBON DIOXIDE ___
1-OCTANOL ___
CARBON MONOXIDE ___
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Liquid Mass Flow ___
Liquid Actual Volume Flow ___
Liquid Volume Flow at Standard Condition ___
gal/h ___
m3/h ___
l/h ___
m3/min ___
l/min ___
kg/sec ___
t/h ___
kg/min ___
Laminar Mass Flow ___
Laminar Actual Volume Flow ___
Laminar Volume Flow @ Standard Condition ___
SP-Compensated Saturated Steam ___
PT-Compensated Saturated Steam ___
CARBON TETRACHLORIDE ___
ISOBUTANE ___
CHLORINE ___
ISOPRENE ___
CHLOROPRENE ___
ISOPROPANOL ___
CHLOROTRIFLUOROETHYLENE ___
m-CHLORONITROBENZENE ___
CYCLOHEPTANE ___
m-DICHLOROBENZENE ___
CYCLOHEXANE ___
METHANE ___
CYCLOPENTENE ___
METHANOL
CYCLOPROPANE ___
METHYL ACRYLATE ___
ETHANE ___
METHYL ETHYL KETONE ___
ETHANOL ___
METHYL VINYL ETHER ___
ETHYLAMINE ___
n-BUTANE ___
ETHYLBENZENE ___
n-BUTYRONITRILE ___
ETHYLENE OXIDE ___
n-DECANE ___
ETHYLENE ___
n-DODECANE ___
FLUORENE ___
n-HEPTADECANE ___
FURAN ___
n-HEPTANE ___
HELIUM-4 ___
n-HEXANE ___
HYDROGEN CHLORIDE ___
n-OCTANE ___
HYDROGEN CYANIDE ___
n-PENTANE ___
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE ___
METHANE ___
HYDROGEN SULFIDE ___
NEON ___
HYDROGEN ___
NEOPENTANE ___
Revision 2
NITRIC ACID ___
NITRIC OXIDE ___
NITROBENZENE ___
NITROETHANE ___
NITROGEN ___
NITROMETHANE ___
NITROUS OXIDE ___
OXYGEN ___
PENTAFLUOROETHANE ___
PHENOL ___
PROPADIENE ___
PROPANE ___
PROPYLENE ___
PYRENE ___
STYRENE ___
SULFUR DIOXIDE ___
TOLUENE ___
TRICHLOROETHYLENE ___
VINYL CHLORIDE ___
WATER ___
Custom Fluid ___
Custom Fluid Name
Compensation Mode
Standard Flow Compensation
Flow Calculation Standard
Design Temperature (°F)
Design Absolute Pressure (psi)
Design Density (lb/ft3)
Standard Density (lb/ft3)
SMV3000 Primary Element Type
Primary Element Type
Revision 2
_________________
Standard ___
Dynamic ___
Absoute Pressure ___
Temperature ___
ASME-MFC-3 ___
Wedge ___
ASME-MFC-14M ___
Average Pitot Tube ___
ISO5167 ___
Integral Orifice ___
GOST ___
Conditional Orifice ___
AGA3 ___
Legacy SMV3000 ___
V-Cone/Wafer Cone ___
__________
__________
__________
__________
Orifice - Flange Taps (ASME-ISO) D >/= 2.3 inches ___
Orifice - Flange Taps (ASME-ISO) 2 </= D </= 2.3 ___
Orifice - Corner Taps (ASME-ISO) ___
Orifice - D and D/2 Taps (ASME-ISO) ___
Venturi - Machined Inlet (ASME-ISO) ___
Venturi - Rough Cast Inlet (ASME-ISO) ___
Venturi - Rough Welded Sheet-Iron Inlet (ASME-ISO) ___
Nozzle (ASME Long Radius) ___
Orifice - 2.5D and 8D Taps (ASME-ISO) ___
Venturi Nozzle (ISA Inlet) ___
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 2 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 2.5 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 3 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 4 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 5 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 6 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 8 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 10 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 12 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 0.875 inch for 14 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 12 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 14 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 16 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 18 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 20 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 22 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 24 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 26 inch Pipe
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 Corner Pressure Taps ___
Orifice ASME-MFC-3-2004 D and D/2 Pressure Taps ___
Orifice ISO5167-2003 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Orifice ISO5167-2003 Corner Pressure Taps ___
Orifice ISO5167-2003 D and D/2 Pressure Taps ___
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Corner Pressure Taps ___
Orifice GOST 8.586-2005 Three-Radius Pressure Taps ___
Orifice AGA3-2003 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Orifice AGA3-2003 Corner Pressure Taps ___
Integral Orifice ___
Small Bore Orifice Flange Pressure Taps ___
Small Bore Orifice Corner Pressure Taps ___
Conditional Orifice 405 ___
Conditional Orifice 1595 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Conditional Orifice 1595 Corner Pressure Taps ___
Conditional Orifice 1595 D and D/2 Flange Pressure Taps ___
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 ASME Long Radius ___
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 Venturi ___
Nozzle ASME-MFC-3-2004 ISA 1932 ___
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 Long Radius ___
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 Venturi ___
Nozzle ISO5167-2003 ISA 1932 ___
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 Long Radius ___
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 Venturi ___
Nozzle GOST 8.586-2005 ISA 1932 ___
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 “As-Cast” Convergent Section ___
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 Machined Convergent Section ___
Venturi ASME-MFC-3-2004 Rough-Welded Convergent Section ___
Venturi ISO5167-2003 “As-Cast” Convergent Section ___
Venturi ISO5167-2003 Machined Convergent Section ___
Venturi ISO5167-2003 Rough-Welded Sheet-Iron Convergent Section ___
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Cast Upstream Cone Part ___
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Machined Upstream Cone Part ___
Venturi GOST 8.586-2005 Welded Upstream Cone Part made of Sheet Steel ___
Averaging Pitot Tube ___
Standard V-Cone ___
Wafer Cone ___
Wedge ___
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Leopold Venturi ___
Gerand Venturi ___
Universal Venturi Tube ___
Low-Loss Venturi Tube ___
Page 259
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 28 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 30 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 32 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 34 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 36 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 1.25 inch for gt 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 16 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 18 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 20 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 22 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 24 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 26 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 28 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 30 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 32 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 34 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 36 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for 42 inch Pipe
Preso Ellipse 2.25 inch for gt 42 inch Pipe
Other Pitot Tube
V-Cone Y Method
V-Cone Simplified Liquid Calculation
McCrometer ___
Yes ___
ASME ___
No ___
V-Cone Maximum Flow Rate on Sizing (in ft3/sec
when Volume Flow, lb/sec when Mass Flow. User
selectable Volume/Mass units when using DTM)
__________
V-Cone Maximum Differential Pressure on Sizing
(in inH2O @ 39.2°F. User selectable when using
DTM)
__________
Use Wedge Fixed Flow Coefficient?
Yes ___
Wedge Fixed Flow Coefficient
Beta Factor for Wedge (in)
Segment Height for Wedge (in)
Use Fixed Viscosity?
Fixed Viscosity Value (cP)
Use Fixed Density?
Fixed Density Value (lb/ft3)
Use Fixed Expansion Factor?
Expansion Factor Fixed Value
Isentropic Exponent Value
Use Fixed Discharge Coefficients?
Discharge Coefficient 1 Fixed Value
Discharge Coefficient 2 Fixed Value
Discharge Exponent
Use Fixed Temperature Expansion Factor?
Temperature Expansion Factor Value
Reynolds Number Low Limit
Reynolds Number High Limit
Pipe Roughness (in)
Initial Radius (in)
Inter-control Interval (yr)
__________
__________
__________
Yes___
__________
Yes ___
__________
Yes___
__________
__________
Yes___
__________
__________
0.5 ___
Yes___
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Page 260
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
No ___
No___
No ___
No___
No___
0.75 ___
No___
Revision 2
Bore Material (Gost Standard)
35Π ___
45Π ___
20XMΠ ___
12X18H9TΠ ___
15K,20K ___
22K ___
16ГC ___
09Г2C ___
10 ___
15 ___
20 ___
Bore Material (Non-Gost Standard)
Bore Diameter (in)
Bore Diameter Measured Temperature (°F)
__________
__________
Bore Temperature Expansion Coefficient (in/in°F)
Pipe Material
__________
35Π ___
45Π ___
20XMΠ ___
12X18H9TΠ ___
15K,20K ___
22K ___
16ГC ___
09Г2C ___
10 ___
15 ___
20 ___
Bore Material (Non-Gost Standard)
Pipe Diameter (in)
Pipe Diameter Measured Temperature (°F)
__________
__________
Pipe Temperature Expansion Coefficient (in/in°F)
__________
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
30,35 ___
40,45 ___
10Г2 ___
38XA ___
40X ___
15XM ___
30XM,30XMA ___
12X1MФ ___
25X1MФ ___
25X2MФ ___
15X5M ___
18X2H4MA ___
38XH3MФA ___
08X13 ___
12X13 ___
30X13 ___
10X14Г14H14T ___
08X18H10 ___
12X18H9T ___
12X18H10T ___
12X18H12T ___
08X18H10T ___
08X22H6T ___
37X12H8Г8MФБ ___
31X19H9MBБT ___
06XH28MдT ___
20Π ___
25Π ___
30,35 ___
40,45 ___
10Г2 ___
38XA ___
40X ___
15XM ___
30XM,30XMA ___
12X1MФ ___
25X1MФ ___
25X2MФ ___
15X5M ___
18X2H4MA ___
38XH3MФA ___
08X13 ___
12X13 ___
30X13 ___
10X14Г14H14T ___
08X18H10 ___
12X18H9T ___
12X18H10T ___
12X18H12T ___
08X18H10T ___
08X22H6T ___
37X12H8Г8MФБ ___
31X19H9MBБT ___
06XH28MдT ___
20Π ___
25Π ___
Page 261
304 Stainless Steel ___
316 Stainless Steel ___
304/316 Stainless Steel ___
Carbon Steel ___
Hastelloy ___
Monel 400 ___
Other ___
304 Stainless Steel ___
316 Stainless Steel ___
304/316 Stainless Steel ___
Carbon Steel ___
Hastelloy ___
Monel 400 ___
Other ___
Advanced Display Configuration
Large PV ___
Flow Value ___
Differential Pressure ___
Static Pressure ___
inH2O @ 39.2°F ___
inH2O @ 60°F ___
Advanced Display - Screen Format
Advanced Display - PV Selection
Advanced Display - Display Units
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Advanced
Display - Decimals
Display - PV Scaling
Display - Scaling Low
Display - Scaling High
Display - Display Low Limit
Display - Display High Limit
Display - Custom Unit
Display - Custom Tag
Display - Trend Duration (h)
Display - Language
Advanced Display - PV Rotation
Advanced Display - Sequence Time (sec)
Page 262
inH2O @ 68°F ___
PV & Trend ___
PV & Bar Graph ___
Meter Body Temperature ___
Process Temperature ___
Temperature Sensor Resistance ___
Percent Output ___
Loop Output (mA) ___
ft3/sec ___
kg/sec ___
gal/min ___
bar ___
ft3/min ___
kg/min ___
gal/h ___
mbar ___
ft3/h ___
kg/h ___
gal/day ___
atm ___
ftH2O @ 68°F ___
Torr ___
m3/sec ___
lb/sec ___
t/sec ___
°R ___
inHg @ 0°C ___
psi ___
mmH2O @ 4°C ___
gf/cm2 ___
kgf/cm2___
Pa ___
m3/min ___
m3/h ___
m3/day ___
lb/min ___
lb/h ___
g/sec ___
t/min ___
t/h ___
ton/sec ___
K ___
% ___
Custom Unit ___
mmH2O @ 68°F ___
mmHg @ 0°C ___
None ___
None ___
__________
__________
__________
__________
_________
_______________
____
English ___
French ___
Enabled ___
____
kPa ___
MPa ___
l/min ___
l/h ___
g/min ___
g/h ___
ton/min ___
ton/h ___
1 ___
Convert Units ___
2 ___
Spanish ___
Italian ___
Disabled ___
Turkish ___
Chinese ___
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Linear ___
3 ___
German ___
Russian ___
Revision 2
Japanese ___
bbl/day ___
°C ___
°F ___
Appendix B — PV4 Flow Variable Equations
B1 Overview
Appendix Contents
This appendix includes these topics:
B.1 Overview ………………………………………….. ……….263
B.2 Standard Flow Equation …………………………………. 264
B.3 Dynamic Compensation Flow Equation …………………268
Purpose of this appendix
This appendix gives a brief description on the use of the available flow equations for calculating the
SMV 3000’s PV4 flow variable. Configuration examples for a number of flow applications are
provided to show how to configure SMV PV4 flow variable using the SCT 3000 flow compensation
wizard.
Reader Assumptions
It is assumed that you are familiar with the flow application in which the SMV 3000 multivariable
transmitter is to be used and that you are familiar with using the SCT 3000 SmartLine configuration
Toolkit.
Reference Data Sources
Consult the following references to obtain data that are necessary and helpful for configuring the
SMV PV4 flow variable:
-
The flow element manufacturer’s documentation.
-
Flow Measurement Engineering Handbook, by Richard W. Miller, McGraw-Hill, Third
Edition, 1996.
-
The flow application examples in this appendix give actual configuration setups.
Page 263
The process fluid manufacturer’s documentation on fluid density and viscosity
characteristics.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
B.2
Standard Flow Equation
The Standard Flow Equation (Kuser Model) allows automatic calculation of the Kuser value that is
used to configure PV4 flow variable for SMV 3000. The Kuser value is a scaling factor, based on the
dynamics of your process, which is used to adjust the flow rate to the desired process parameters,
such as
- dimensional units
- density
- pressure
- temperature
The standard flow model uses an empirical method to configure PV4 flow variable for the following
primary elements:
- orifice plates
- Venturis
- nozzles
- averaging pitot tubes
- and other flow elements with outputs proportional to
The standard flow model can be used to calculate PV4 for volumetric and mass flow rates for gas,
liquid, and steam at standard conditions. A flow equation for steam mass is also available which
compensates for density based on the ASME steam tables
NOTE: Use the dynamic flow compensation model for increased flow measurement accuracy. See
Subsection B3.
Standard Flow Equation Configuration Examples
The following pages contain two examples for configuring the SMV PV4 output using the Flow
Compensation Wizard in the SCT 3000 configuration program. The configuration examples show
how to navigate through the wizard program and enter values to configure the SMV PV4 flow
variable for a given flow application. Examples for the following applications are presented:
·
Air through a Venturi meter
·
Superheated Steam
The standard (Kuser) model wizard in the SCT 3000 is started from the Equation Model page of the
Flow Compensation Wizard.
Example: Air Through a Venturi
An engineer has specified a SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter to compensate for air density
changes and to calculate the standard volumetric flowrate of air through a Venturi meter. The
engineer has sized the Venturi meter to produce a differential pressure of 49 inches H2O at 630 CFM
at standard conditions. The flowing pressure is 129.7 psia, flowing temperature is 100 degrees F, and
the standard (base) density is 0.0764 lbs/ft3.
The steps in Table 64 show how to configure the SMV to calculate the PV4 flow variable for this
application.
Page 264
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
Table 64 - Air Through a Venturi Meter Configuration Example
Step
1
Action
Select a template for the SMV 3000 model you have for your flow
application.
Select standard volume flow in the Algorithm field of the FlowAlg tab
and then select the Engineering Units (CFM) on the FlowConf tab
card.
2
Click the Wizard . . . on the SCT/SMV 3000 configuration window to
access the Flow Compensation Wizard Equation Model page.
3
Select Standard from the Equation Model list box on the Equation
Model page of the Flow Compensation Wizard to launch the Kuser
Model, then click Next to proceed to the Fluid Type page.
4
Select Gas as the fluid type from the list box on the Fluid Type page,
then Next to proceed to the Gas Flow Type page.
5
Select Standard Volume as the gas flow type from the list box on the
Gas Flow Type page, then click Next to proceed to the Process Data
page.
6
Enter the relevant flow process data from the Venturi Sizing Data
Sheet into the appropriate entry fields on the Process Data page as
follows:
Normal Flowrate
= 630 CFM
Normal DP
= 49 inches H2O @ 39.2 °F
Design Pressure
= 129.7 psia
Design Temperature = 100°F
Standard Density
= 0.0764 lbs/ft3
Compensation Mode = Full
You can change the engineering units by clicking on the text box with
the right mouse button.
Click Next to proceed to the Flowing Variables page.
7
Click the following options for failsafe indication on the Flowing
Variables page (so that there is an “a “ in each check box):
This will ensure that the PV4 flow output will go to failsafe if either
the static pressure or temperature sensors fail.
• Set Damping = 1.0 seconds.
Click Next to proceed to the Solutions page.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 265
8
The calculated Kuser value appears on the Solutions page of the
Kuser Model along with a list of items (with values) that you have
configured from previous pages. Review the Wizard values to make
sure they are correct.
9
Click
Finish
to to
complete
theestablish
Kuser calculation
procedure.
Connect
SCT
SMV and
communications.
(Refer
to the SCT manual #34-CT-10-08 for procedure, if
necessary.)
Perform Download of the database configuration file to the SMV.
10
11
Use the procedure in section 5.6.14 to verify the Kuser and flow
calculation for this application. You can simulate inputs for PV1, PV2,
and PV3 to verify PV4 output.
Standard Flow Equation,
Continued
Example:
Superheated Steam Using an Averaging Pitot Tube
An engineer has specified a SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter to compensate for steam
density changes and to calculate the mass flowrate of superheated steam using an averaging pitot
tube. The engineer has sized the averaging pitot tube to produce a differential pressure of 13.21
inches H2O at 45,000 lb/hr. The flowing pressure is 294.7 psia, flowing temperature is 590 degrees F,
and flowing density is 0.49659 lbs/ft3.
The steps in Table 65 show how to configure the SMV to calculate the PV4 flow variable for this
application.
Table 65 - Superheated Steam using an Averaging Pitot Tube Configuration Example
Step
1
Action
Select a template for the SMV 3000 model you have for your flow
application.
Select superheated steam mass flow in the Algorithm field of the
FlowAlg tab and then select the Engineering Units (lb/h) on the
FlowConf tab card.
Page 266
2
Click the Wizard . . . on the SCT/SMV 3000 configuration window to
access the Flow Compensation Wizard Equation Model page.
3
Select Standard from the Equation Model list box on the Equation
Model page of the Flow Compensation Wizard to launch the Kuser
Model, then click Next to proceed to the Fluid Type page.
4
Select Steam as the fluid type from the list box on the Fluid Type
page, then click Next to proceed to the Process Data page.
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
5
Enter the relevant flow process data from the Averaging Pitot Tube
Sizing Data Sheet into the appropriate entry fields on the Process Data
page as follows:
Normal Flowrate
= 45,000 lb/hr
Normal DP = 13.21 inches H2O @ 39.2 °F
Design Density
= 0.49659 lbs/ft3
You can change the engineering units by clicking on the text box with
right mouse button.
Next to proceed to the Flowing Variables page.
6
Click the following options for failsafe indication on the Flowing
Variables page (so that there is an “a “ in each check box):
This will ensure that the PV4 flow output will go to failsafe if either
the static pressure or temperature sensors fail.
•
Set Damping = 1.0 seconds.
Click Next to proceed to the Solutions page.
7
The calculated Kuser value appears on the Solutions page of the
Kuser Model along with a list of items (with values) that you have
configured from previous pages. Review the Wizard values to make
sure they are correct.
Click Finish to complete the Kuser calculation procedure.
Revision 2
8
Connect SCT to SMV and establish communications. (Refer to the
SCT manual #34-CT-10-08 for procedure, if necessary.)
9
Perform Download of the database configuration file to the SMV.
10
Use the procedure in section 5.6.14, to verify the Kuser and flow
calculation for this application.
You can simulate inputs for PV1, PV2, and PV3 to verify PV4 output.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 267
B.3 Dynamic Compensation Flow Equation
Dynamic Compensation Flow Equation
The Dynamic Compensation Flow Equation provides algorithms for use in determining a highly
accurate PV4 flow variable for SMV 3000. Use dynamic compensation to measure liquids, gases, and
steam. Dynamic compensation flow equation compensates for:
- temperature
- pressure
- density
- discharge coefficient (gas, liquid, or steam)
- thermal expansion factor
- gas expansion factor
NOTE: A standard flow equation is also available which uses an empirical method of calculation for
PV4, thereby compensating only for temperature and pressure changes in gas and steam applications.
Dynamic Compensation Configuration Examples
The following pages contain three examples for configuring the SMV PV4 output using the Flow
Compensation wizard in the SCT 3000 configuration program. The configuration examples show how
to navigate through the wizard program and enter values to configure the SMV PV4 flow variable for
a given flow application. Examples for the following applications are presented:
- Liquid Propane
- Air
- Superheated Steam
The Dynamic Compensation Flow model wizard in the SCT 3000 program is launched from the
Equation Model page of the Flow Compensation Wizard.
Example: Liquid Propane
An engineer has specified a SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter to dynamically compensate
and calculate the mass flowrate of liquid propane through a standard 304 SS orifice meter with flange
taps. The engineer has sized the orifice meter to produce a differential pressure of 64 inches H2O at
555.5 lb/m. The flowing pressure is 314.7 psia and the flowing temperature is 100 degrees F.
The steps in Table 66 show how to configure the SMV to calculate the PV4 flow variable for this
application.
Page 268
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
Table 66 - Liquid Propane Configuration Example
Step
Action
1
Select a template for the SMV 3000 model you have for your flow
application.
Select mass flow in the Algorithm field of the FlowAlg tab and then
select the Engineering Units (lb/m) on the FlowConf tab card.
2
Click the Wizard on the SCT/SMV 3000 configuration window to
access the Flow Compensation Wizard Equation Model page.
3
Select Dynamic Corrections from the list box on the Equation Model
page of the Flow Compensation Wizard to invoke the Dynamic Flow
Compensation Model, then click Next to proceed to the Flow Element
Properties page.
4
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in
each entry field of the Flow Element Properties page:
Element Type
= Flange tap
(D greater than 2.3 inches)
Bore Diameter
= 1.8611 inches
Material
= 304 SS
Flowing Temperature = 100°F

The expansion coefficient is automatically calculated based
on the entered data.
Click Next to proceed to the Fluid State page
5
Select the fluid state as Liquid from the list on the Fluid State page,
then click Next to proceed to the Liquid Flow page
6
Select Mass as the type of liquid flow from the list box on the Liquid
Flow page, then click Next to proceed to the Fluid page.
7
Select PROPANE as the type of fluid from the list box on the Fluid
page, then click Next to proceed to the Pipe Properties page.
8
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in
each entry field of the Pipe Properties page:
Pipe Schedule
= 40s
Nominal diameter = 4 inches
Material
Revision 2
= Carbon Steel

The actual diameter and thermal expansion coefficient for
the pipe are automatically calculated based on the entered
data.

Click Next to proceed to the Discharge Coefficient page.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 269
9
Enter the following lower and upper Reynolds number limits in each
entry field of the Discharge Coefficient page. These values are used
to clamp the discharge coefficient equation at these Reynolds
numbers:
Lower Limit
= 80,000
Upper Limit
= 800,000
Click Next to proceed to the Viscosity Compensation page.

10
Graph coordinates (Reynolds Number vs. Discharge
Coefficient) will appear when the mouse is clicked on the
graph.
Enter the following equation order (order 4 is recommended) and
temperature limits for the viscosity compensation in each entry field
of the Viscosity Compensation page. The viscosity values will be
clamped at the temperature limits.
Order
=4
Low Temp
= 50
High Temp
= 150
Click Yes to refit the curve with the new limits.

Graph coordinates will appear when the mouse is clicked on the
graph.
Select Next to proceed to the Density Compensation page.
11
Enter the following equation order and temperature limits for the
density compensation in each entry field of the Density
Compensation page. The density values used in the flow calculation
will be clamped at the temperature limits.
Order
=4
Low Temp
= 50
High Temp
= 150
Click Yes to refit the curve with the new limits.
Graph coordinates will appear when the mouse is clicked on the
graph.
•
Select Next to proceed to the Flowing Variables page.
Page 270
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
12
Click on the following options for Failsafe Indication on the Flowing
Variables page (so that there is an “a” in each check box). It has
been determined that the operator needs the flow output to go to
failsafe when there is either a pressure or temperature failure
(selecting Abs. Pressure and Process Temp. will assure this).


Set damping for the flow output at 1.0 seconds.
Since Flow Failsafe has been selected for a pressure or
temperature failure, the default values do not need to be set.
If failsafe for the flow output is not needed when a pressure or
temperature sensor fails, the default values for temperature and
pressure are used in the flow calculation and the flowrate
continues to be reported.
Click Next to proceed to the Solutions page.
13
The Solutions page presents itemized columns representing the data
entered and the corresponding Wizard values that were calculated
from the Wizard table data. Many of these values are used inside the
SMV 3000 Multivariable Transmitter to compensate and calculate the
flow for your application. Review the data to make sure the correct
choices have been made based on your flow application.
Click Finish to complete the Flow Compensation Wizard.
14
Connect SCT to SMV and establish communications. (Refer to the
SCT manual #34-CT-10-08 for procedure, if necessary.)
15
Perform Download of the database configuration file to the SMV.
16
Use the procedure in section 5.6.14 to verify the flow calculation for
this application. You can simulate inputs for PV1, PV2, and PV3 to
verify PV4 output.
Example: Air
An engineer has specified a SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter to dynamically compensate
and calculate the standard volumetric flowrate of air through a standard 304 SS orifice meter with
flange taps. The engineer has sized the orifice meter to produce a differential pressure of 10 inches
H2O at 175 standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM). The flowing pressure is 40 psia, the flowing
temperature is 60 degrees F, the flowing density is 0.2079 lbs/ft3, and the standard density if 0.0764
lbs/ft3.
The steps in Table 66 show how to configure the SMV to calculate the PV4 flow variable for this
application.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 271
Table 67 - Air Configuration Example
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
Select a template for the SMV 3000 model you have for your flow
application.
Select Standard Volumetric flow in the Algorithm field of the FlowAlg
tab and then select the Engineering Units (CFM) on the FlowConf tab
card.
Click the Wizard . . . on the SCT/SMV 3000 configuration window to
access the Flow Compensation Wizard Equation Model page.
Select Dynamic Corrections from the list box on the Equation Model
page of the Flow Compensation Wizard to invoke the Dynamic Flow
Compensation Model, then click Next to proceed to the Flow Element
Properties page.
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in
each entry field of the Flow Element Properties page:
Element Type
= Flange tap
(D Greater than 2.3 inches)
Bore Diameter
= 1. 5698 inches
Material
= 304 SS
Flowing Temperature = 60°F

The expansion coefficient is automatically calculated based
on the entered data.
Click Next to proceed to the Fluid State page.
5
Select the fluid state as Gas from the list box on the Fluid State page,
then click Next to proceed to the Gas Flow page.
6
Select Standard Volume as the type of gas flow from the list box on
the Gas Flow page, then click Next to proceed to the Fluid page.
7
Select AIR as the type of fluid from the list box on the Fluid page,
then click Next to proceed to the Pipe Properties page.
8
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in each
entry field of the Pipe Properties page:

Pipe Schedule
= 40s
Nominal diameter
= 3 inches
Material
= Carbon Steel
The actual diameter and thermal expansion coefficient for the
pipe are automatically calculated based on the entered data.
Click Next to proceed to the Discharge Coefficient page.
Page 272
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
9
Enter the following lower and upper Reynolds number limits in each
entry field of the Discharge Coefficient page. These values are used
to clamp the discharge coefficient equation at these Reynolds
numbers:
Lower Limit
Upper Limit

= 10,000
= 100,000
Graph coordinates (Reynolds Number vs. Discharge
Coefficient) will appear when the mouse is clicked on the
graph.
Click Next to proceed to the Viscosity Compensation page.
10
Enter the following equation order (order 4 is recommended) and
temperature limits for the viscosity compensation in each entry field
of the Viscosity Compensation page. The viscosity values will be
clamped at the temperature limits.
Order
=4
Low Temp
= 50
High Temp
= 150
Click Yes to refit the curve with the new limits.

Graph coordinates will appear when the mouse is clicked on
the graph
Click Next to proceed to the Density Variables page.
11
Enter the relevant process information from the Orifice Sizing Data
Sheet in each entry field of the Density Variables page.
Isentropic Exponent *
= 1.4044
Design (flowing) Density
= 0.2079 lb/ft3
Standard (base) Density
= 0.0764 lb/ft3
Design Temperature
= 60°F
Design Pressure
= 40 psia
Click Next to proceed to the Flowing Variables page.
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 273
12
Click on the following options for Failsafe Indication on the Flowing
Variables page (so that there is an “a” in each check box). It has been
determined that the operator needs the flow output to go to failsafe
when there is either a pressure or temperature failure (selecting Abs.
Pressure and Process Temp. will assure this).


13
14
15
16
Set damping for the flow output at 1.0 seconds.
Since Flow Failsafe has been selected for a pressure or
temperature failure, the default values do not need to be set.
If failsafe for the flow output is not needed when a pressure
or temperature sensor fails, the default values for
temperature and pressure are used in the flow calculation
and the flowrate continues to be reported.
Click Next to proceed to the Solutions page.
The Solutions page presents itemized columns representing the data
entered and the corresponding Wizard values that were calculated
from the Wizard table data. Many of these values are used inside the
SMV 3000 Multivariable Transmitter to compensate and calculate the
flow for your application. Review the data to make sure the correct
choices have been made based on your flow application.
Click Finish to complete the Flow Compensation Wizard.
Connect SCT to SMV and establish communications. (Refer to the
SCT manual #34-CT-10-08 for procedure, if necessary.)
Perform Download of the database configuration file to the SMV.
Use the procedure in section 5.6.14t to verify the flow calculation for
this application. You can simulate inputs for PV1, PV2, and PV3 to
verify PV4 output.
*Isentropic Exponent is also called the Ratio of Specific Heats.
Page 274
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
SMV Operation in a Steam Application
SMV Operation in a When operating the SMV in a steam application there are number of
considerations you should be aware of:




Be sure the process is at or above saturation when operating the SMV, since the SMV does
not calculate flow when the process is below saturation.
Operating limit for absolute pressure input is 750 psia (for Model SMV125), but SMV will
continue to make calculations for inputs up to 1500 psia.
SMV Model SMG170 will operate and calculate to 3000 psig. At pressures greater than 2000
psia you must operate at less than 100 °F of saturation temperature.
Operating range for temperature input is saturation to 1500 °F (815.5 °C), assuming that the
temperature sensor used (RTD or thermocouple) can cover this range, with the exception
noted above.
Example: Superheated Steam
An engineer has specified a SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter to dynamically compensate
and calculate the mass flowrate of superheated steam through a standard 304 SS orifice meter with
flange taps. The engineer has sized the orifice meter to produce a differential pressure of 241.3 inches
H2O at 22,345 lb/hr. The flowing pressure is 64.73 psia and the flowing temperature is 350 degrees F.
The steps in Table 68 shows how to configure the SMV to calculate the PV4 flow variable for this
application.
Table 68 - Superheated Steam Configuration Example
Step
1
2
3
Revision 2
Action
Select a template for the SMV 3000 model you have for your flow
application.
Select superheated steam mass flow in the Algorithm field of the
FlowAlg tab and then select the Engineering Units (lb/h) on the
FlowConf tab card.
Click the Wizard . . . on the SCT/SMV 3000 configuration window to
access the Flow Compensation Wizard Equation Model page.
Select Dynamic Corrections from the list box on the Equation Model
page of the Flow Compensation Wizard to invoke the Dynamic Flow
Compensation Model, then click Next to proceed to the Flow Element
Properties page.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 275
4
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in
each entry field of the Flow Element Properties page:
Element Type
= Flange tap
(D greater than 2.3 inches)
Bore Diameter
= 4.2154 inches
Material
= 304 SS
Flowing Temperature = 350 °F

The expansion coefficient is automatically calculated
based on the entered data.
Click Next to proceed to the Fluid State page.
5
Select the fluid state as Steam from the list on the Fluid State page,
then click Next to proceed to the Pipe Properties page.
6
Enter the relevant information from the Orifice Sizing Data Sheet in
each entry field of the Pipe Properties page:
•
7
Pipe Schedule
= 40s
Nominal diameter
= 10 inches
Material
= Carbon Steel
The actual diameter and thermal expansion coefficient for
the pipe are automatically calculated based on the entered
data.
Click Next to proceed to the Discharge Coefficient page.
Enter the following lower and upper Reynolds number limits in each
entry field of the Discharge Coefficient page. These values are used
to clamp the discharge coefficient equation at these Reynolds
numbers:
•
Lower Limit
= 200,000
Upper Limit
= 1,200,000
Graph coordinates (Reynolds Number vs. Discharge
Coefficient) will appear when the mouse is clicked on the graph.
Click Next to proceed to the Viscosity Compensation page.
8
Enter the following equation order (order 4 is recommended) and
temperature limits for the viscosity compensation in each entry field
of the Viscosity Compensation page. The viscosity values will be
clamped at the temperature limits.
Order
=4
Low Temp = 297
High Temp = 400
Page 276
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
Click Yes to refit the curve with the new limits.
Graph coordinates will appear when the mouse is clicked on the
graph.
•
Click Next to proceed to the Density Variables page.
9
Enter the relevant process information from the Orifice Sizing Data
Sheet in each entry field of the Density Variables page.
Isentropic Exponent * = 1.4044
Click Next to proceed to the Flowing Variables page.
10
Click on the following options for Failsafe Indication on the Flowing
Variables page (so that there is an “a” in each check box). It has
been determined that the operator needs the flow output to go to
failsafe when there is either a pressure or temperature failure
(selecting Abs. Pressure and Process Temp. will assure this).

Set damping for the flow output at 1.0 seconds.

Since Flow Failsafe has been selected for a pressure or
temperature failure, the default values do not need to be set.
If failsafe for the flow output is not needed when a pressure or
temperature sensor fails, the default values for temperature
and pressure are used in the flow calculation and the flowrate
continues to be reported.
Click Next to proceed to the Solutions page.
11
The Solutions page presents itemized columns representing the data
entered and the corresponding Wizard values that were calculated
from the Wizard table data. Many of these values are used inside the
SMV 3000 Multivariable Transmitter to compensate and calculate the
flow for your application. Review the data to make sure the correct
choices have been made based on your flow application.
Click Finish to complete the Flow Compensation Wizard.
Revision 2
12
Connect SCT to SMV and establish communications. (Refer to the
SCT manual #34-CT-10-08 for procedure, if necessary.)
13
Perform Download of the database configuration file to the SMV.
14
Use the procedure in section 5.6.14 to verify the flow calculation for
this application. You can simulate inputs for PV1, PV2, and PV3 to
verify PV4 output.
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 277
Glossary
AWG
DP
DE
EEPROM
EMI
FDC
FTA
HART
HCF
Hz
inH2O
LP
LRL
LRV
mAdc
MBT
mmHg
mV
Nm
NPT
NVM
Pa
PM
PSI
PSIA
PV
PWA
RFI
RTD
SMV
SFC
STIM
STIMV IOP
URL
URV
US
Vac
Vdc
Page 278
American Wire Gauge
Differential Pressure
Digital Enhanced Communications Mode
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Electromagnetic Interference
Field Device Configurator
Field Termination Assembly
Highway Addressable Remote Transmitter
HART Communication Foundation
Hertz
Inches of Water
Low Pressure (also, Low Pressure side of a Differential Pressure Transmitter)
Lower Range Limit
Lower Range Value
Milliamperes Direct Current
Meter Body Temperature
Millimeters of Mercury
Millivolts
Newton.meters
National Pipe Thread
Non-Volatile Memory
Measured static pressure in PV4 algorithm
Process Manger
Pounds per Square Inch
Pounds per Square Inch Absolute
Process Variable
Printed Wiring Assembly
Radio Frequency Interference
Resistance Temperature Detector
Smart Multivariable
Smart Field Communicator
Pressure Transmitter Interface Module
Pressure Transmitter Interface Multivariable Input/Output Processor
Upper Range Limit
Upper Range Value
Universal Station
Volts Alternating Current
Volts Direct Current
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
INDEX
A
E
About This Manual ......................................................... iii
Advanced Flow Setup..................................................169
Advanced Flow Setup (for DTM only) .........................166
AP Input Calibaration ..................................................146
Element Specific Properties........................................ 186
B
Basic Setup Page .........................................................165
C
Communication Modes ...................................................7
DE Mode Communication ..........................................7
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Mode Communication .........8
HART Mode Communication ......................................9
Configuration File ..........................................................50
Configuration Tools and Interfaces ...............................10
Application Design, Installation, Startup, and
Operation ............................................................10
MC Toolkit Participation .................................... 10, 11
Copyrights, Notices and Trademarks .............................. ii
Correct DP Input at URV .............................................144
Custom Configuration sheets ......................................256
Custom Engineering Units .............................................39
D
DE Calibration .............................................................136
Analog Output Signal Calibration ...........................136
Calibrating Range Using the MC Toolkit .................140
Calibration Recommendations ...............................136
Conditions for Input Calibration .............................140
DE Output Calibration ............................................137
Input Calibration Procedures Description ..............140
Test Equipment Required for Calibration...............136
DE Input Calibration Procedure ..................................141
DE Mode Communication ...............................................7
DE Transmitter Configuration .......................................19
Configuration Personnel Requirements ...................19
Device Configuration ....................................................22
DevVar Mapping .........................................................191
Diagnostic Messages for DE transmitters ...................220
Diff. Pressure Config ...................................................192
Digitally Enhanced (DE) Mode Communication ..............8
Display Screen Configuration Instructions ....................42
Display Screen Configuration Parameters.....................47
DPConf Configuration - PV1 ..........................................24
Dual / Triple Calibration ..............................................158
Revision 2
F
Field Device Configurator ............................................. 52
aving device history ............................................... 129
Custom Views ........................................................ 131
Device Configuration and Parameter Descriptions.. 61
Exporting device history records to Documint ...... 131
Exporting device history records to FDM .............. 130
Manage DDs ............................................................ 54
Offline configuration ............................................... 56
Offline Configuration ............................................. 133
Online configuration ................................................ 56
Procedure to Enter the Transmitter Tag.................See
Selecting the Process Variable (PV) Unit of Pressure
Measurement ................................................... 123
Setting PV URV, and LRV Range Values 125, 127, 128,
129
Setting Range Values for Applied Pressure.... 126, 127
Settings .................................................................... 53
Using FDC for various device operations ................. 59
Flow Config ................................................................ 194
Flow Compensation Wizard (DE only) .......................... 40
Flow Configuration ..................................................... 177
FlowConf Configuration - PV4 .................................... 35
G
Glossary ...................................................................... 278
H
HART Advanced Diagnostics ....................................... 159
HART Calibration ........................................................ 150
Analog Output Signal Calibration .......................... 151
Calibrating Range .................................................. 152
HART DD binary file format compatibility matrix ....... 218
HART Diagnostic Messages......................................... 235
HART Mode Communication .......................................... 9
HART Transmitter Configuration .................................. 51
Overview of FDC Homepage .................................... 52
L
Local Display Options ..................................................... 5
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 279
M
T
MC Toolkit–Transmitter Electrical/Signal Connections . 12
Meter Body Temp. Config ........................................... 196
TempConf Configuration - PV3 .................................. 30
Temperature Input Calibaration................................. 148
Transmitter Adjustments ............................................... 4
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 220
Troubleshooting and Maintenance ............................ 160
O
Optional 3-Button Assembly ........................................... 5
Output Calibration using SCT3000 .............................. 138
P
Process Data ............................................................... 182
Process Temp. Config.................................................. 193
Process Variables ........................................................ 197
R
References ..................................................................... iii
Release Information....................................................... iii
Review ........................................................................ 204
S
Safety Certification Information ..................................... 4
Saving the current Online Configuration .................... 205
Security ....................................................................... 219
Selecting Flow Units .................................................... 124
Selecting Temperature Units ...................................... 124
Series, Model and Number ............................................. 3
Setting Range Values for Applied Temperature .......... 128
Setting up Communications with the SCT3000 ............. 15
Smartline Configuration Toolkit (SCT 3000) .................. 13
SMV 800 Physical and Functional Characteristics ........... 1
Features and Options ................................................. 1
Local Display Options ................................................. 5
Optional 3-Button Assembly ...................................... 5
Overview .................................................................... 1
Safety Certification Information ................................ 4
Series, Model and Number ........................................ 3
Transmitter Adjustments ........................................... 4
SP Conf Configuration - PV2 ....................................... 28
Static Pressure Config ................................................. 193
Page 280
U
Using DTMs ................................................................ 162
Basic Setup Page.................................................... 165
Calibration Page .................................................... 198
Detailed Setup ....................................................... 202
Device Status ......................................................... 199
Diagnostics ............................................................ 200
Display Setup ......................................................... 203
Downloads............................................................. 162
Meter body Selection ............................................ 202
Procedure to Install and Run the DTM .................. 162
Process Variables ................................................... 197
Services.................................................................. 201
SMV 800 Offline Parameterization ........................ 207
SMV 800 Online Parameterization ........................ 163
Using the SCT for SMV 800 Configuration .................... 21
Using the SCT3000 Tool to Configure Screens on
SMV800 ................................................................... 42
SMV800 Series HART/DE Option User’s Manual
Revision 2
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one
of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC
EMEA
Australia
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax:
1300-36-04-70
Email: (Sales)
FP-Sales-Apps@Honeywell.com
or
(TAC)
hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
Honeywell Process Solutions,
(TAC) hfs-tacsupport@honeywell.com
Honeywell Process Solutions,
Phone: + 80012026455 or
+44 (0)1344 656000
AMERICA’S
Honeywell Process Solutions,
Phone: (TAC) 1-800-423-9883 or
215/641-3610
(Sales) 1-800-343-0228
Email: (Sales)
FP-Sales-Apps@Honeywell.com
or
(TAC)
hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
China – PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6114
Fax: +(822) 792 9015
Revision 2
SMV800 Transmitter User’s Manual
Page 281
For more information
To learn more about SmartLine Transmitters,
visit www.honeywellprocess.com
Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager
Process Solutions
Honeywell
1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S
Houston, TX 77042
Honeywell Control Systems Ltd
Honeywell House, Skimped Hill Lane
Bracknell, England, RG12 1EB
Shanghai City Centre, 100 Jungi Road
Shanghai, China 20061
www.honeywellprocess.com
34-SM-25-06 Rev.2
December 2015
2015 Honeywell International Inc.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising